Today I bring you a guest article on Wars in TTRPGs by Alexander Atoz, in two parts. Wars are inevitable in most RPGs, sooner or later, but GMs often struggle to walk the fine line between making the conflict seem realistically big enough and keeping the experience personal to the players.

Vast armies lend themselves to Roll-playing, not role-playing. But there is a path through the thicket, and Alexander is here to show it to you. I’ll chime in every now and then with my own two cent’s worth.

— Mike

How to Run a TTRPG War

In most TTRPG adventures, the player characters are the story. The villain’s forces are usually small enough that the heroes can take them down personally, over the course of a campaign. Even when allies appear, they’re often just background dressing – advisors, informants, or reinforcements waiting offstage. The PCs are the ones who make the difference.

But what happens when the enemy is too vast to defeat with swords and spells alone? What do you do when the battlefield holds thousands of combatants – too many to count, let alone control? How do you keep your players in the spotlight when the scale of conflict threatens to swallow them?

In this article, we’ll tackle the largest kind of conflict you can run in an RPG: full-scale war.

The article is divided into two major sections. The first covers ancient warfare – where armies fought for supremacy in a single, decisive battle. The second explores modern warfare, where front lines stretch across continents, and no one skirmish can decide the outcome alone.

Each section is further divided in two parts:

1. A breakdown of major elements that define that type of war – and how they affect your game.
2. A set of structures and strategies for building an entire war-based campaign.

Along the way, we’ll also cover:

• How to run large-scale battles
• How to use allies without stealing the spotlight
• How to decide whether your war should follow an ancient or modern model, and,
• The ways that magic, monsters, or advanced tech might blur the line between them.

Let’s begin.

Ancient Wars: What Makes Them Different

Before diving into the ways a TTRPG campaign can use war as a central theme, it’s helpful to look at the different types of war – starting with the ancient world – and what sets them apart.

Smaller in Scale, Bigger in Impact

Ancient wars were typically much smaller in scale than their modern counterparts. Many such conflicts were decided by just one or two significant battles. In the case of famous campaigns that lasted years, many of them consisted of no more a few big battles every year.

Contrast that with WWI, where both sides maintained a line of trenches, all occupied, that covered 440 miles, and maintained that position for about four years straight.

The smaller scale of ancient wars wasn’t due to a lack of ambition, but rather a series of practical limitations that affected logistics, leadership, and long-term campaigning.

Let’s unpack those constraints – especially as they shape both soldier experience and command structure – because understanding them can give you all sorts of tools when building your game.

Communication: The Fog of Antiquity

In an era without telegraphs, radios, or reliable messengers, ancient armies couldn’t coordinate across distances. Splitting your forces meant each group was essentially on its own, unable to reinforce or support each other.

Armies did employ horsemen messengers, signal flags, and occasionally carrier pigeons, but the information they carried was unreliable, often blocked or intercepted, and in any case not timely.

Compare this with modern tactics, which routinely divide forces to flank, encircle, or control terrain – because coordination is possible. In antiquity, that just wasn’t an option.

In your game: Player characters in an ancient setting may have broader authority and looser objectives. But the information they receive will often be outdated, garbled, or wrong, even when the information is about their own sides’ capabilities. Planning around fog-of-war becomes a significant challenge, and sending messages to ask for help is downright unreliable, or its own quest if the players are the ones sent.

Command Structure: Independent but Vulnerable

In modern warfare, the generals are often hundreds or thousands of miles from the front. But in ancient wars, the high command was right there in the field.

The lack of modern communications meant that ancient generals couldn’t micromanage from a distance, they had to be there in the field. Also, it gave individual commanders much more autonomy.

This also helps explain why discipline varied wildly. Medieval knights, for example, often pursued their own glory rather than obeying orders – a nightmare for coordination, but gold for storytelling.

(Historical note: The Roman army is a well-known exception. It maintained tight discipline and deliberately included a surplus of officers to ensure leadership continuity in battle.)

In your game: This limitation means commanders in ancient campaigns had to stick together. Orders from high command were either delivered in person or not at all – which made frontline leadership far more autonomous.

This creates rich opportunities. Want your players to earn a commander’s favor? Resent their interference? Carry out a politically motivated assassination? All of that’s on the table when the leaders are riding with the troops.

In addition, your players will have much more authority to disobey orders, which might be already infeasible when they arrive. Granted, this is something your players would do, regardless of your permission, in any setting, but any soldiers on their side will be much more ready to listen to them.

Supplies and the Cost of War

Ancient armies often carried a large share of their supplies with them – but almost never enough. Supply lines existed, especially for large empires like Rome or Persia, but they were difficult to maintain. Poor communication, hostile terrain, and raiders made it risky to count on deliveries from the rear – especially for smaller or less organized forces. Even Rome couldn’t guarantee consistent resupply deep in enemy territory.

And that’s just the logistics. One of the most overlooked realities of ancient and medieval warfare is the staggering cost of it all. We imagine royal treasuries overflowing with gold, but outfitting, feeding, and paying even 10,000 soldiers was a national-scale expense – something few kings could cover from personal wealth.

Historically, this was handled through emergency taxes, levies on the church, forced loans, and high-interest borrowing from merchants or early banks (Yes, really). Campaigns were often cut short not by strategy or weather – but by empty coffers.

For TTRPGs, this adds rich flavor and decision pressure. You don’t need to count every coin, but the consequences of limited supply are a great narrative lever.

• Time pressure builds as the army runs out of food or funding.
• Players can’t just ?send word to the rear? and expect a rare item to arrive – they’re part of a force that may be struggling to feed itself.
• NPC commanders may be forced into risky engagements, not because it’s wise – but because they can’t afford to wait.

Optional Guideline for Tracking Costs

If you want numbers:

• A basic soldier might cost 1-2 gold per day, including food, pay, and gear upkeep.
• An elite warrior or magically supported unit might run 5-10 gold daily.
  

  Not counting the cost of any magical equipment. Even giving every member of the unit a 5GP potion each is a big outlay – if you’ve hundreds or thousands of combatants.
  — Mike

• A modest force of 500 could cost 15,000 gp/month or more – and that’s before siege engines or mounted troops.

You don’t need to tally it all – but knowing the pressure is there gives both players and GMs an extra axis to build on. After all, war isn’t just about bravery. It’s about whether you can keep your army alive until the end.

Smaller Populations

Ancient armies were constrained by the simple fact that there weren’t that many people to recruit. Archaeologists and historians estimate that most field armies in antiquity topped out in the tens of thousands, with only a few exceptional cases – like the Roman army at Cannae or the mythical numbers claimed for Xerxes – reaching low six digits. And even those often included non-combatants or support personnel.

By contrast, World War I saw over 70 million soldiers mobilized, spread across multiple fronts and nations. Ancient states lacked the population, economic base, and administrative capacity to sustain fighting on multiple large-scale fronts at once. Most had to put everything they had into a single army – and that made every battle count.

Consequences

Because ancient wars were often fought with a single main army per side, a major battle could decide the outcome of an entire war. There were rarely reinforcements or second chances. If the army broke, so did the campaign – and often the state behind it.

This also means that underhanded tactics – the kind that feel far-fetched in modern military fiction – can seem surprisingly plausible in this context. A well-placed trap (a rigged dam, a poisoned grain store, a fire in the enemy camp) might not destroy an entire army, but it could weaken it enough to tip the scales in the next engagement.

To be clear: most of these tricks almost certainly wouldn’t work as written. But in a fictional setting where a bit of plausibility is all you need, they’re fair game – especially since real ancient armies have been wiped out by a single ambush, disastrous terrain choice, or freak weather event.

Weapon-Related Tactics

In the pre-gunpowder era, virtually all battlefield weapons were either melee (spears, swords, axes) or short-ranged (javelins, slings, bows). While some ranged weapons – like composite bows or ballistae – had decent range, they weren’t decisive on their own.

The dominant battlefield strategy in most open-field engagements was to mass troops into dense formations – phalanxes, shield walls, testudos – and attempt to break the enemy’s line by brute force or disruption.

Even if you think you know what a Phalanx is, Phalanx | Wikipedia is worth reading. There’s a link at the bottom to Shield Wall as well as Pike Square, Schiltron, and Tercio.

“Testudo” was new to me, and surprisingly isn’t listed amongst those comparable formations. So if you need to brush up on the Tortoise Formation, the page to consult is Testudo Formation | Wikipedia.

— Mike

Once an enemy force began to break and flee, they were highly vulnerable; at that point, cavalry and light infantry would pursue and rout them before they could regroup.

Consequences

In terms of running a TTRPG campaign, this section doesn’t introduce many new constraints – but it will matter when we talk about how battles are structured mechanically.

One key consequence is that training mattered more in ancient warfare than in many modern conflicts, adding to the reasons why losing an army was so decisive.

Another implication is in security and stealth: guards couldn’t simply shoot a fleeing thief from across the courtyard. Archery was useful, but slow to reload, hard to aim in chaos, and ineffective against armor.

I feel that this is the most contentious claim in the entire article. I was always taught in history that the English Longbow was the reason plate mail went out of fashion, and bows in most RPGs fire more quickly than swords can swing.

But those are numbers for Skilled Bowmen – most weren’t that good.

Using a bow involves the development of significant physical strength in specific muscle groups that weren’t used for anything else. This requires not only hundreds of hours of training but years of practice, frequently starting at a very young age with smaller and lighter bows.

Medieval longbows had a pull force ranging from 80 to 150 pounds. This wasn’t just about pulling the string back once; it was about being able to shoot effectively for extended periods under battle conditions. Skeletons of medieval longbowmen often show distinct physical adaptations like enlarged left arms and bone spurs.

If the pull strength of the bow wasn’t great enough, penetration of armor became impossible. While bows at the upper end could penetrate plate mail, the chances of doing so declined rapidly with reduce pull force – one source suggested that it was as much as half the square of the percentage below 150 for full plate, so 135 lb = -10% -> 100/2 = 50% chance of penetration. That sounds a little high to me – I’d maybe use 1/3 of the square or even 1/4 – but it gets the idea across.

Bows were even less effective against chain-mail, which was cheaper to supply, anyway, because plate was rigid, while the chain gave way, reducing the effective power of the arrow up to 20%, and distributing the force of impact over a wider area, further reducing it’s effectiveness.

And that’s just to use the bow at all. At the same time, you had to work on Accuracy and Rate Of Fire. While the basics of shooting could be learned relatively quickly, achieving the accuracy and speed needed for military effectiveness took years.

Archers had to master a rapid rate of fire (10-15 arrows per minute was expected for a skilled archer) and be able to hit targets at considerable distances (minimum of 200 yards for practice, with war ranges up to 400 yards).

The English longbow was particularly feared for two reasons: One, it developed a greater pull strength than any other non-compound bow, giving it greater range and penetrating power; and two, English children spent hours practicing bowmanship every Sunday. It was part of the culture.

In practice, archery’s primary power was to force the enemy to adopt a defensive position with raised shields, something incompatible with fast maneuvering; this pinned them down long enough for your infantry to close. Avoiding friendly fire then required the archers to stop what they were doing, so it was a tactical advantage but not a decisive one.

Of course, the other side knew this, and so their bowmen targeted yours. You can’t do much with a bow while cowering behind a shield. Only about 10% could actually fire on the enemy infantry / cavalry; the rest had to take out the enemy’s archers, first.

— Mike

If someone slipped away into the dark, the only way to stop them was to run them down.

You probably already knew this. But it’s worth noting how these constraints shaped both the tactics of war and the feel of personal combat in a pre-firearm world.

I now move on to outlining what a campaign built around an ancient era war might look like.

Part 1 – Assembly

Given the structure of ancient warfare, the opening act of your story will often be assembling the army. This isn’t just a matter of raising troops – it’s a chance to create a web of political, logistical, and interpersonal challenges for the players to solve.

Rallying the Troops

Different quests can focus on calling in favors from allies and reluctant vassals, persuading them to send soldiers or support. Depending on the era and setting, the monarch may have near-total power over his lords … or almost none at all.

In history, vassals usually did respond when called – especially under feudal obligation – but they might do so half-heartedly, late, or with excuses. Modern RPG players are so familiar with the “do X for me first” quest structure that you can easily justify delays or conditions without raising eyebrows.

If that feels too artificial, you can frame the delays as rallying aid from neighboring kingdoms rather than formal vassals – or just play up internal politics: rival generals, cowardly nobles, or ambitious clergy getting in the way.

As mentioned above, raising money was also a major factor of getting a war together. That said, this one might be best omitted. While it actually is highly realistic, it won’t feel that way.

It is to have your fund-raising cake and eat it too – make the actual raising of the funds easy and behind-the-scenes, but detail the PCs (and other similar groups) to escort the wealth back to the King, and from there, to wherever else it had to go. Enmesh the players in the logistics of currency transportation; it gives you a chance to show off the impact that the war preparations are having on the society and provides first-hand experience of the overcoming of the difficulties involved.

— Mike

Then there’s the matter of securing passage. In many historical campaigns, armies had to negotiate with local rulers, city-states, or even neutral powers to pass through their territory. Sometimes this meant diplomatic agreements or bribes; other times it meant fighting for every mile.

And of course, this being a fantasy game, players might need to gather intelligence or prepare magical countermeasures to deal with supernatural threats the army could face.

Delays, Sabotage, and Disease

Once assembly begins, complications are likely. In real history, armies were often delayed by disease outbreaks, poor roads, or political foot-dragging. You may prefer something more dramatic: enemy spies, assassinations, or magical sabotage. Fantasy makes such actions more plausible – and more fun.

In fact, it’s entirely believable that a fantasy army might employ necromancy, curses, or magically-induced plagues. Even in real-world warfare, sabotage has always played a role, from the guerrilla tactics of ancient rebels to the industrial espionage of the 20th century.

As for biological warfare: real-world nations haven’t used artificial plagues on a major scale – most likely only because a sufficiently large war hasn’t demanded it since it became practical. WWI saw treaties against poison gas ignored, and WWII gave us strategic terror bombings of civilian populations (carried out by both sides). It’s not hard to imagine fantasy nations crossing similar lines under pressure.

GM Advice: Use Sabotage Sparingly

If you include enemy action delaying army assembly, do it once – maybe twice, tops. Players want to feel like they’re progressing, not treading water. One good way to handle this is a minor act of sabotage that turns out to be a distraction from a larger threat – giving you tension and misdirection without repetition.

Consider having acts of sabotage come from a third party, either a known ally of your enemy or someone looking to curry favor with them. A relatively small outlay can gift an ally significant advantages, even turning the outcome of a war. This raises the prospect of reciprocal countermeasures – i.e. sending the PCs into the enemy’s allied nation to persuade them not to do that any more, or else.

— Mike

Part 2 – On the March

Once the army is ready, the next stage of your campaign will be traveling with it. This is a rich opportunity for adventure – not every battle happens on the battlefield.

Depending on your GM style, you have two broad approaches here:

• Side Quests Along The Route
• Strategic Decisions with Tactical Fallout

Option 1: Side Quests Along the Route

The players can be sent on small missions in support of the army’s advance. These might include:

• Scouting out a fortified position ahead
• Negotiating with a neutral faction (although this may have been a major theme earlier in the campaign)
• Securing a bridge, ford, or mountain pass
• Investigating a nearby abandoned temple or dungeon the army must pass close to.

These quests help maintain the party’s traditional adventuring rhythm, while still contributing meaningfully to the larger war effort.

Look for ways to highlight how the military venture impacts on the ‘standard adventure’, for example adding time-pressure. The PCs might not have as far to go for logistical support eg healing – but what support is available may be more restrictive. And it’s possible that clearing a dungeon under orders means that you don’t get to keep the loot, or part of it.

One other thing to mention, in terms of scouting out a forward position: Surprises. Every war should have surprises, on both sides. Such scouting expeditions are a great way to spring these surprises on the army the PCs are part of. Having the PCs discover that the enemy has an elite unit consisting of pilots and archers mounted on Wyverns, or are summoning a Demon to molest the army, for example.

The PCs don’t necessarily have to be the ones to solve these problems (but someone is going to have to) – it’s enough for them to discover the problem.

— Mike

Option 2: Strategic Decisions with Tactical Fallout

Alternatively – or in addition – you can give the players strategic choices that shape the army’s march:

• Which route to take (faster but riskier? longer but safer?)
• Whether to prioritize speed or reconnaissance
• How to handle a diplomatic incident or skirmish with locals
• What to do about brewing dissent, plummeting morale, or captured spies

Because you don’t want to burden the players with micromanaging the entire army, it helps to frame these decisions as reactions to new information or consequences of earlier choices, not as a general “what should the army do?”

When presenting decisions, avoid vague “What do you do?” prompts. Instead, offer two or three concrete, contrasting choices. And if your players come up with something unexpected but plausible, go with it – as long as it moves the game forward, it’s gold.

Best Practice: Mix Both Styles

Personally, I recommend combining the two approaches. Let the players make meaningful decisions about the army’s course – and then have those choices lead to small, one-session quests.

For example:

• Choosing to march through the desert might require an expedition to secure or purify water sources.
• Choosing the mountains could require clearing or defending bridges and passes.
• If the army skirts a haunted temple, the players might have to delve into it and exorcise its spirits – before half the camp is too sleep-deprived to function and morale collapses.

This way, the army’s journey becomes both strategic and personal – and the players never feel like passengers.

Part 3 – Climactic Army Battle

After all the buildup – gathering forces, marching with the army, facing minor threats – your players will expect (and deserve) a major battle as a payoff. Even if the campaign is character-focused, the war needs its battlefield moment.

But how do you run a massive army-on-army clash in a player-character RPG without bogging everything down in new mechanics?

Use Familiar Combat Mechanics, Lightly Adjusted

My recommendation is to stick with the core combat rules of your RPG system, adjusted slightly to accommodate army-scale action.

That means each unit of the army should have:

• HP (representing cohesion / morale – more on this in a moment),
• Movement rules,
• Damage output,
• Any other necessary stats – all in the same language your players already know.

This saves everyone the trouble of learning a one-off mass combat system that will be used once or twice and never again.

Let Players Help Design Their Units

In most RPGs, characters have unique powers or features that don’t map cleanly onto groups of soldiers. Instead of trying to force a direct conversion, invite your players to design army units inspired by their characters:

• Let each player pick 2Â?3 of their own abilities or tactics.
• Apply those to one or a few units under their character’s leadership.
• These units can fight “in the style of” the player – archery-focused, berserker-style, healing support, whatever fits.

This gives players a sense of personal investment in the battle, ensures they understand the rules of the units they’re controlling, and saves you a lot of prep time. It also makes sense, if their characters had a hand in training or simply served as inspiration.

I’ll also mention that in my experience, players are often much more fair-minded when building rules collaboratively than they are when trying to argue for a specific combat edge to a specific situation.

(And if they do push boundaries a bit? Just adjust the enemies to match. It works, and I wouldn’t even call it cheating. The rules have just been finalized, and now you have to implement them via the other side as well.)

One Key Change: What HP Means

Here’s the one place you do need to change something: what HP represents.

In character combat, HP usually means how much damage a character can take before collapsing. But with units, players naturally assume that losing 10% HP = losing 10% of the soldiers – which creates two problems:

1. By the time one side “wins,” they’re reduced to a handful of exhausted survivors.
2. An army unit that’s lost 50% of its soldiers shouldn’t logically be fighting at full power.

You could try scaling damage output based on remaining HP, but that’s a terrible idea. It bogs down play in math, and worse, it kills the pacing. Instead of a climactic finish, you get a slow, grinding war of attrition – death by a thousand dribbles of damage.

Instead: HP = Morale and Cohesion

Make it clear – both before and during the battle – that a unit’s HP reflects how much punishment it can take before morale crumbles and the soldiers scatter. That’s how many real-world battles were decided anyway: not total annihilation, but a rout.

If you want to make the numbers feel more epic without changing the outcome, you can multiply HP and damage by 10 or even 1,000. The math stays simple, but the visuals become more satisfying: “The line held with 2,400 HP … barely.”

Optional: A Preliminary Battle with the Vanguard

If you (or your players) want more than one large battle, a good solution is to start with a smaller clash involving the vanguard.

The vanguard is a forward detachment of the army – often tasked with scouting, defending against ambushes, and keeping the main force from being caught unaware. It makes sense for the PCs to be traveling with them, given their capabilities and autonomy.

If the players made strategic decisions in Part 2, an enemy attack on the vanguard can be presented as a consequence of those choices – good or bad. It creates a natural escalation.

Just be careful not to stack too many large-scale battles back-to-back. Before the final clash, it’s best to include a small, one-session quest – securing a pass, sabotaging the enemy, protecting an injured scout – to preserve the rhythm of the campaign as a character-driven RPG, not a wargame.

The closer you get to the Big Battle, the greater the danger that you, as the GM, have to overcome – the danger of part of the lead-up overshadowing that climactic battle. Because it’s far more likely to be run using the normal combat mechanics and the ‘major armies’ variant proposed earlier, the clash of Vanguards presents this danger at it’s most acute.

“Very well,” some will think. “I’ll take it just a little easier on the players in the penultimate battle and so avoid that problem completely.” And that is a great way of avoiding turning the climax into an anticlimax – but it introduces a new risk or two.

Specifically, it gives a false impression as to the strength of the enemy. “I didn’t think they would be such wimps” is the feedback that results, and right away your big finish has one foot in a bucket and one hand tied behind its back.

And then, when the climactic battle does eventuate, you can be accused of beefing up the enemy. Or of trying to lull the players into a false sense of security. Of being unfair in general – just to make matters worse.

All this hassle can be avoided by being more intelligent about a pre-Climax one-session quest. It should not be divorced from the war but should play into it, enhancing the excitement of the climax and not distracting from it; but at the same time, the primary antagonists should be chosen so as to give minimal impression as to the enemy strength and abilities.

One approach that works, but can often be over-used as a result, is a “Common Enemy” to appear between the two armies, causing the Vanguards – or a scouting group even in advance of the Vanguards – to have to work together to defeat it. Because of the in-game circumstances, this can acquire all sorts of overtones –

• is this really an 11th-hour last chance at Peace (no, it isn’t)?
• Is it exploring what might have been had the war not arisen (well maybe)?
• Is it informing the players as to the motivations of the enemy (it’s a very good opportunity to do so, at the very least)?
• Or, is it foreshadowing the end of the war and the subsequent peace? (Again, maybe, maybe not).

But above all, what it is is NOT undercutting the climactic battle.

It would also be easy for the enemy to come across as too ready to make peace or implement a detente, or as too bloody-minded to do so when it’s in their own best interests.

For those reasons, it can actually be much better to have the war provide nothing more than the backdrop and some time pressure, and have the opponent be completely unrelated to the major enemy. These issues may seem melodramatic to the reader, but I would advise the GM to take them very seriously.

Oh, and one more piece of advice that I may as well drop in here – when dealing with / describing ancient armies, put heavy emphasis on color as a narrative trait. Back then, it was common for standards to be used to distinguish and identify one group from another on the battlefield, perhaps with tunics in matching color schemes. Large collections of fighting men (and presumably, in a Fantasy campaign), women, can frequently become a riot of color as a result. In more modern warfare, the dominant color is going to be “bland” – chamo or khaki or whatever. So contrast strongly with that to emphasize that this is a war in a Fantasy milieu.

— Mike

Part 4 – Climactic Character-Based RPG Battle

Readers of fantasy may be surprised that I’ve placed the players on the offensive side of the war. After all, in most fantasy novels, the protagonists are almost always on the defensive. It’s the villain who commands the massive army, and the heroes must rally a last stand or sabotage the threat from afar.

This makes sense for fiction – but not always for RPGs.

Why Traditional Fantasy Structures Don’t Work in RPGs

In many fantasy stories, the protagonists spend the war on a side quest: slaying the Lich?s phylactery, destroying the artifact, or assassinating the dark general – all while the main battle rages elsewhere.

That kind of structure is hard to replicate in TTRPGs, because it keeps the players removed from the central conflict. If they’ve helped gather armies, made strategic decisions, and marched with the troops, they’re going to want to see it through – not watch the ending from a side room.

And unlike fiction, where the villain almost always survives until the last page, TTRPG villains can absolutely be destroyed mid-campaign – sometimes earlier than expected. That makes it harder to rely on a looming, external threat to carry dramatic tension all the way through.

Solution: A Fortified Villain and a Final Assault

To preserve the feel of a classic RPG climax, I suggest placing the villain in a fortified city or stronghold – either retreating there after the army’s defeat, or never leaving it in the first place.

The natural medieval response would be a siege. But sieges are long, static, and not suited to a final session or emotional high point. Instead, make the siege unfeasible – either because:

• The villain has reinforcements en route, meaning time is running out (classic epic fantasy), or
• The villain has begun an apocalyptic ritual that must be stopped before it completes (classic D&D adventure).

Either way, the party must infiltrate the city, overcome obstacles and defenders, and confront the villain in his lair – giving them the kind of personal, high-stakes battle that best suits the medium of roleplaying games.

UPDATE:

Alexander has provided some additional commentary about the inserts that I dropped into his article that are worth making a permanent part of this post:

I especially enjoyed your point about the extra vanguard encounter and the dangers that it represents. I did not think of that.

(I don’t think I’d have them ally with the main villain, though. That is a legitimate plot move, and I have enjoyed it, but it doesn’t feel like the right fit for a war campaign. I would instead have them face a small group of allies of the villain, or a different villain that might be associated with the main villain (think Saruman), without having the main villain make an appearance. That said, I already stated that it is now your article … Treat this email as a comment made by a reader who enjoyed the post.)

That about wraps up Part 1. In part 2, Modern warfare.
— Mike

About The Author: Alexander Atoz

I used a screen capture of Alexander’s site to create these banners. Unfortunately, I’m not all that happy with either of them – the subtext is just too hard to read either way. It says, “Combat scenarios for every monster, allowing them to utilize their combat potential to the fullest for the first time ever.”

Alexander Atoz is the writer behind DragonEncounters.com, a blog dedicated to helping GMs make the most of the monsters in the D&D Monster Manual. So far, he’s covered over 120 monsters in depth – including all fourteen demons, all eleven devils, and all forty dragons.

Each dragon type has been given four separate articles, one for each of the four age categories, offering at least one unique combat scenario that reflects that dragon’s changing tactics and personality. None of the encounters repeat, meaning a GM who runs multiple dragon fights will always be giving players something new.

While combat encounters are the blog’s foundation, Alexander goes well beyond the battlefield. He frequently explores how to use monsters in story-driving or support roles – especially underutilized good-aligned creatures. Rather than simply turning them into villains or quest-givers, he offers ways to integrate them into the campaign in subtle and satisfying ways.

For example, his article on aarakocra shows how they can serve as long-range messengers, helping expand the scope of your campaign world. In his couatl write-up, he suggests ways to use its disguise abilities to guide players unobtrusively, streamlining plot progression without railroading.

His young and adult bronze dragon articles explore how to position powerful allies so they contribute meaningfully to the story – in ways that have them fighting both alongside the players and elsewhere in the game world, and either way without overshadowing the players.

In addition, every article involving good-aligned creatures includes guidance on how to prevent the inevitable player attempts to “recruit them for the party”.

The blog also digs into social trickery, deception, and narrative roleplay. His glabrezu article explores how such a fiend might earn the party’s trust, while his guide to doppelgangers offers a trove of infiltration and manipulation ideas beyond the standard “evil shapeshifter”.

Beyond individual monsters, Alexander has written system-neutral advice as part of a number of his articles that are applicable to a wide range of games. Topics include how to run horror, designing chase encounters, handling powerful neutral third-parties, and more – all aimed at making sessions more dynamic, more surprising, and more memorable.

An observed pattern sheds surprising light on how RPG styles differ from one nation to another.

This is the latest in my series of time-out posts in between the Trade In Fantasy series.

The YouTube viewer that I use most often displays, at the end of a video, thumbnails of other videos that you might like to watch, based on what you’ve watched recently and what’s popular at the moment. Out of 12, there are usually 2 or 3 that intrigue me enough to write them down for later viewing.

Today (as I write these words, a few days in advance of my next post), I saw one that connected with other things that I’ve seen to reveal a rather profound thought, and that’s what I’m writing about today.

Not Supermen

A lot of Americans seem to think we Australians are a breed of supermen and women, or at least born with something extra that lets us… ‘ignore’ is not quite the right word, but it will do for now – ignore danger.

It’s a well-known trope that everything in Australia is trying to kill you, it’s just that some critters aren’t very good at it. We’ve:

• 145 varieties of venomous snake including 21 of the 25 most venomous varieties,
• deadly spiders,
• huge spiders that aren’t deadly that we all but welcome into our homes,
• saltwater crocodiles,
• sharks,
• deadly octopi,
• killer wasps,
• venomous marsupials,
• kangaroos, and
• emus,
• and don’t get me started on the cane toads.

There are also

• spiders with allegedly necrotic venom – it causes a wasting disease where the flesh just rots away,
• killer sunshine,
• deadly bushfires
• and droughts
• and floods (we’re still cleaning up after the last one)
• and hurricanes (called tropical cyclones here because they rotate in the opposite direction),

…and more besides – and we take it all in our stride.

In part, we do so because we’ve grown up with these dangers all around us, and learned that if we’re calm and sensible and behave accordingly, we can usually get through without trouble. I was always taught as a child not to make any sudden moves when you see a black snake, because it’s generally more scared of you than you are of it – but to be very wary of brown snakes, because they’ll attack because a blade of grass is bent the wrong way; that male funnel-web spiders are especially aggressive in the heat when they are out searching for mates, especially after heavy rain or in high humidity but they were all to be treated as dangerous, and so on; that you are far less likely to encounter anything dangerous on patrolled beaches, always to swim between the flags, and if the flags aren’t up there’s usually a good reason for that, and so on.

In contrast, while there are some dangerous fauna in the US, it’s encountered a lot less frequently. They have

• rattlesnakes in the desert but few deadly reptiles elsewhere;
• there are brown bears, but they aren’t aggressive unless surprised, threatened, or protecting young;
• grizzly bears may attack, but are far less frequently encountered;
• there are sharks in some waters,
• and alligators in the everglades (but again, this threat is localized);
• there are black widows in some places;
• and there are mountain lions (cougars), but they are, and, like the brown bear, less likely to attack if you don’t do anything stupid.

Compared to Australia, the wilderness is as safe as houses, most of the time – unless you’re in a swamp.

The ten most dangerous animals (to man) in the US are 1. Deer 2. Cows 3. Dogs 4. Black Widows and recluse spiders 5. Venomous Snakes 6 Cougars 7. Horses 8. Black Bears & Grizzly Bears 9. Alligators and 10. Sharks.

Profound Thought

So here’s the profound insight: These differences in environmental hazards filter through to our gaming experiences and the way we react to dangers in various game environments.

Because Americans see dangerous wildlife as exotic and especially perilous, they treat these with a great deal of respect and even apprehension; to Australians, being surrounded by the deadliest native creatures 24/7 is the normal state of affairs. We want to understand what makes them tick, so that we know what to avoid doing to upset them, but in general, we’ll leave them alone if they’ll leave us alone.

Americans are also conditioned by their culture to be suspicious of authority and lone shooters. It’s a danger they face daily, at least it sometimes see that way. Political intrigue is simply a fact of life, to be ignored until it poses a direct threat to the individual. So these things tend to generate less interest as a general rule, and be viewed as less threatening (most of the time).

While Australian politicians have had their fair share of political scandals, we tend to be a pretty unforgiving lot when there’s even a whiff of impropriety. Because we aren’t used to them, conspiracies and corrupt administrations and alien societies that seem threatening are more apt to be of compelling interest to us, and are viewed as far more dangerous even if they don’t yet threaten us directly. They threaten us more, so we tend to be both fascinated and more prone to take action against them.

For this reason, our political attacks are often more directed at creating a scare narrative with the political opposition at its heart.

Both sides, then, feel more threatened by the unfamiliar, and this causes them to evaluate different types of threat in different ways.

If you’re an American GM prepping a game for an American group of players, and an Australian happens to sit in, they won’t have the same triggers and priorities as the rest of the group – trying to push their buttons will elicit different reactions to those that might be expected. And the same is true of the converse position.

A Third Perspective

Let’s see what this principle can tell us about a third group, European gamers (excluding the English, whose experiences have been quite different).

This was ground zero for two world wars and the communist takeover post WWII. There were puppet regimes, corrupt administrations, incompetent governments and some who just seemed impotent to alter the course of events. But these taught the Europeans that they were stronger together than they were apart; with American hegemony as the common touchstone in the west, this led to the formation of the EU.

Individual nations had different experiences, but the totality meant that they had no need to imagine darker times – they were used to them. And they had little reason to trust most authorities, at least early on.

As a result, European TTRPG tend to be darker and earthier than those of the more optimistic Brits and Americans. See, for example, Looking into The Dark Eye, a guest article by Lena Richter, which reviews and introduces the Dark Eye, an RPG system that was (and probably still is) more popular in Germany than D&D.

Then, there’s the nations of Eastern Europe, who had their own nightmares to survive until the fall of the Soviet Union. In Poland, Warhammer is King, especially 2nd Edition, according to some; others put Call Of Cthulhu on top, with WRPG and 5e fighting it out for second spot. Still others put 5e on top with one of the others in second. But D&D 5e permits a wide range of tones and styles; the others are more definitive. I would expect their local D&D to be a little more Dystopian with the PCs representing what little hope can be found in the extant game world, according to this theory.

One commentator makes the sharply relevant point that those over 30 tend to go for CoC and WRPG over D&D; that it is only those with markedly different life experiences – the Soviet Union collapsed in 1991, 34 years ago; you would expect a more optimistic outlook from younger gamers.

The people of Ukraine are, sadly, too busy with a real-world nightmare to worry about gaming these days. Back in the day, it was Pathfinder and D&D slugging it out. I get the impression the two were more evenly matched than was the experience in the US, which seemed to migrate constantly to whatever was newest and shiniest. I hope that you can soon game again, my friends!

Of course, D&D is popular all over; if not in first place, it’s usually not far away. But there are a heap of local games and those, in aggregate, tend to be more illuminating as to the ‘local flavor’.

The perspective Anglaise

Britain’s experience with governments deemed untrustworthy tends to be more recent. Thatcher’s England seems to be where most of it started, a new rebelliousness being in the air (hence Punk). Before that, there was Churchill’s fall from glory, though he is still reverenced as the leader who brought them through World War 2, battered and bruised but unbroken. “Staunch” is the word that comes most evocatively to mind.

During the Punk era, it was not uncommon to diss the Royal Family, but that didn’t seem to last very long beyond that point; I suspect the major grievance was that they didn’t reign Thatcher in (because that’s not the way that Queen Elizabeth operated). From the royalty perspective, there were several stumbles that marred their popularity through the 80s – the messy divorce of Charles, now King Charles, and Princess Diana; her death and the failure by the Royals to recognize the popularity that she had amongst the general public; Scandals involving Prince Andrew. But each time, they bounced back, and by the time of her passing, Queen Elizabeth was as popular as she had ever been.

This creates a disconnect between temporal government and the underlying “British Ideals” that they are supposed to manifest, and that the Royals embody. Hope and idealism are always present, but those in charge of delivering on them are frequently seen to have feet of clay. There are times when exceptional circumstances demand that they rise to the occasion, and sometimes they do so (Churchill), and sometimes when they don’t (Chamberlain, in the modern popular perspective – though I think he’s judged over-harshly; I think he was playing for time, for Britain was desperately unready to fight WW2, and the ‘Peace In Our Time’ speech designed to tell Hitler what he wanted to hear. But that’s just my opinion.)

So, what would Brits most fear, and how would that play into their gaming? I think the process of collapsing into Dystopia is preeminent, the failure of those elected to safeguard them, the abdication of responsibility. The situation currently being experienced in the US is probably perceived as far worse than it actually is, because from this perspective, they are living through the British ‘worst nightmare’.

Accepting that D&D / Pathfinder is almost certainly dominant, we must look lower down the rankings for clues as to the dominant style. My research says that Free League Publishing (from Sweden) have become a significant player in the marketplace, adapting their “Year Zero” system to a variety of popular franchises. Call Of Cthulhu remains popular, unsurprisingly, and games from ‘small’ publishers like Steve Jackson Games on down have splintered and dug out toeholds in the market. Another significant game is obviously going to be the science fiction of Cubicle 7’s Doctor Who franchise.

From all of the above, Staunch Defense against “The Darkness” in an environment where temporal authorities can’t protect the population for any of multiple reasons would seem to be the dominant characteristic. That, of course, is the overriding theme of the Harry Potter series, too – small wonder that it is perceived as quintessentially English / British (depending on who’s doing the looking). And that seems to fit.

A look Eastward

To close out this examination of the principle, let’s look at Japan.

Japan is the world market in which D&D / Pathfinder is weakest, at best being equal number 1. Call Of Cthulhu is equal number 1 in some respects, perhaps the similarities between the country’s respective experiences in World War 2 creating resonance. But I can also see CoC tapping into the Anime zeitgeist of the country. More obviously anime-based games and games reflecting the Samurai traditions and history are also popular.

Eyes Forward

I am deliberately avoiding offending anyone by trying to apply this principle to the extant changes occurring in the US right now. I’m not sure that I could avoid coloring the results with my personal opinions. Suffice it to say that polarization is going to impact the popularity of certain styles of RPG, certain game systems, differently. I’ll leave the contemplation of specifics to individuals who can make their own assessments of how the current political and social environment is going to influence the next decade of gaming there.

What can be said is that, at the end of the day, no matter which game and which themes are the most popular amongst those around you, we are all playing RPGs, and that alone should create a bond that can bridge and transcend the divisions. At least, that’s my hope for the future.

If all goes according to plan, next week I’ll have part 1 of a 2-part guest article for everyone, while I continue to work on the next couple of parts of the Trade In Fantasy series (over 7K words written so far). These are going to be monster posts – the first thing that happened when I started on them was adding another 24 sub-sections to section 5.7! Those 7,000+ words carry me through 5.7.1.4 – I still have 5.7.1.5 – 5.7.1.18 to go, plus 5.7.2 and 5.7.3 at the very least. If they are of similar length to what’s already done (and I hope they are much shorter), that will be another 10K words – and the following installment (if it’s not cut in two) is likely to be 2-3 times that total length! I’ve got my work cut out for me…

Why splitting the party is a natural development, learning to handle it, and techniques that it opens up for the GM. Plus a writing tip or 2! That’s today’s prescription.

This is the latest in my series of time-out posts in between the Trade In Fantasy series.

Phases Of Experience

“Don’t Split The Party” is advice that is still offered to RPG players on a regular basis. For a group of new players, it’s sound advice, and for a new GM as well, because it simplifies the narrative structure and makes the tales of adventures more coherent – and when you’re new to all this, those are things you still need to learn to achieve.

Level 2

There’s a second stage when you have a bit more experience under your belt, in either capacity, in which players feel confident enough to have their characters go off alone to do things that logically don’t require the whole party, like attending worship services or shopping. These low-key activities help teach the GM how to handle richer, more complex narratives with multiple threads running simultaneously.

There can also be a sub-stage in which the players feel ready but the GM does not, in which excuses to keep the party together are contrived by the GM. That can last until a player complains.

Level 3

But eventually, the GM learns how to handle this and everything that takes place gets split into group action and individual action. The key to success in this is to pay extra attention to making sure that everyone gets their own fair share of the spotlight, so you spend a bit of time with one player and then move on to the player next to them at the table.

Because the ‘action’ is overlapping, possibly even simultaneous, these solo narratives consume far more table time relative to game time than when everyone is in a group. This introduces a counter-force that can lead to GMs trying to push the ‘buddy system’ where PCs go around in pairs. I’ve even heard of cases where GMs added an extra player (or worse yet, ejected an existing player) just so that they had even numbers with which to make this work. I think most will agree that’s going too far.

Level 4

Once they start to get used to it – and it generally doesn’t take too long – most GMs learn how to handle split parties when there’s nothing major going on. As soon as that happens, they start finding ways to use it to their advantage. After all, if one character buys into the plot on offer and then pulls in the rest of the group, that can be a far easier ‘sell’ than getting everyone on board for that adventure.

You can start using events in a solo encounter to preload players with critical briefing notes. You can use solo encounters as preludes and prologues and plot hook delivery systems. It’s only a matter of time before an NPC that the PCs don’t like or trust saunters up to one of them in a crowded marketplace and warns them not to stick their noses into X – where X is exactly what the GM wants the party to stick their collective noses into. Hook, baited, cast, and swallowed.

Level 5

After a while, GMs realize that there’s no more problem doing theater-of-the-mind combat sequences for each PC on their own at the same time than there is running a larger combat sequence for the whole group. Combat Time is a whole other issue – think about how long a typical battle takes, as a ratio of real time to game time, and it’s usually a very different ratio to what happens in roleplay, where large swathes of time can be hand-waved to keep things moving along.

Instead of simply warning off the PCs, an enemy now targets each of them as a preemptive strike to prevent them interfering (presuming that the PCs are growing famous enough to justify such action).

Level 6

At about the same time – and it can even swap with the ‘Level 5’ described above – GMs start coming up with solo plot threads for each PC in addition to the main plotline that affects the whole group (the metaphor starts getting a little blurry around at this point).

And, after a while, as the players grow still more adept at treating their characters like real people that they are ‘inhabiting’ within the game world, these plotlines will start interacting, and richer and more complex constructions enter the picture.

Level 7

The natural outgrowth of Level 5 is a streamlined combat system in which, for the sake of gameplay, the GM simplifies game mechanics so that a combat sequence involving one PC can proceed at the same time as non-combat sequences occupy the others. This, at least partially, addresses the problem of Combat Time.

They soon learn that it’s incumbent upon them to make these combat sequences less consequential than whole-group battles, because the player will have a justifiable complaint if they perceive that they lost an important battle because of the streamlining. If the only consequences are plot oriented, there are no such causes of complaint.

Level 8

The last barrier having fallen, once the GM and players get good enough at their respective crafts, it becomes natural to have two or three or even more plot threads running per character in addition to the main group plot. Entire game sessions can consist of solo activities that advance some of these plots, and the ‘quiet spots’ in one plot thread can be distracted from with the greater heat in another.

The GM is now weaving complex tapestries of stories, and even crafting narratives in which a story flows from one solo PC to another, or represents two sides of the same coin, or solo tales explore side-issues tangential to, but stemming from, the main plot. It’s no biggie to have the whole group (minus one PC) engaged in the main plot while the absent PC is dealing with a plot thread that’s related to it, or foreshadows a future group plotline, or is a complete side-issue that’s no less important to them than the main plot.

Level 9

It doesn’t take too long for GMs to realize that of-camera side-plot engagement is a great way of handling player absences, at least some of the time – if you ended on a cliffhanger with Character Y present, it’s harder to write that character out of the ongoing group narrative .if the player has to miss the next session. But, at the start of adventures, it’s a lot easier, because the action starts in down-time for the group, and it’s sometimes possible even in the middle of a plotline.

If he hasn’t already, the GM starts curating a list of plot seeds that can justify a PCs sudden absence and the adventures that he writes start evolving – different end-of-play points getting chosen in a multi-session plot to facilitate PCs coming and going, should it be necessary.

This was actually forced on me prematurely, when one of my players – completely without warning – announced that he’d signed up for a stint in the army and his appearances would be sporadic for a while. But any job that occasionally forces players to work during your normal game time can have the same effect.

Level 10

Congratulations – when you get here, you have achieved mastery over the fine art of splitting the party. Group Unity of action is now purely plot-driven; if a plot requires engagement by a particular PC at a particular point, they are advancing that plot, and if not, they can be advancing a narrative in which they alone hold the spotlight. The players have reached the point where they see nothing strange about this, and view it as making sure that each of them gets a more complete adventuring experience from a session’s play.

There are teething problems from time to time – you never stop getting better at this – but it’s all nuance and recovering from the occasional fumble.

Previous posts on this topic:

• Ask The GMs: “Let’s Split Up.” – “Good Idea, we can do more damage that way!”
• Ensemble or Star Vehicle – Which is Your RPG Campaign?
• The Wandering Spotlight Part One of Two: Plot Prologues
• The Wandering Spotlight Part Two of Two: Shared Stories
• Engagement vs Involvement: The forgotten balance (a sequel to Ensemble or Star Vehicle)

Writing for an RPG is different

Why am I bringing all this up? Because I wanted to show how splitting the party is a natural progression of skill on the part of GMs and players. This sequence of development can be stopped at any point by a collective decision, but the results are deliberately artificial.

I’ve mentioned in a recent post (The Momentum Of Breadcrumbs) about the Dr Who books that I’ve been reading lately. One of them had, towards the end, a complete breakdown of an individual episode, and as I read it, I realized that it would never work in this structure within the confines of an RPG.

Why? Because critical scenes were shown to the audience, as a way to build tension, excitement, and interest, and there was not a single protagonist of the series in any of those scenes. Instead, the antagonists were having their own narrative thread in which context for the main action to follow was explored and displayed for the entertainment of the audience.

Yes, there are ways in which such sequences can occasionally be presented to the players – warnings from deities, dream sequences, prophecies, and what-have-you – but these often fall flat and don’t have the desired impact, and they are really easy to over-use.

Get your fingers burned in this way once too often, and it’s normal and natural to restrict yourself to slightly more linear plots.

RPGs are the only medium in which non-protagonist scenes can be dropped in as required. TV, Movies, Books, Short Stories, Comics, Plays, Radio Plays – they get to do it whenever they want. RPGs, not so much.

That’s what today’s article is really all about – I have a way in which these scenes can be dropped into an RPG from time to time to offer a little later, but first, and for the heart of the article, I want to explore the ramifications, and why they mean that GMs and players should actively pursue the split-the-party line of self-development described.

Splitting The Party as a Tool For Complex Narratives

So, most of the time (it would be all of the time except for the technique I’ll describe later, which can’t be used all the time), you have to keep the focus on the protagonists at all times. That means that you need some alternative methods for getting backstory developments to the attention of the ‘audience’.

The thing is that playing an RPG is a participative act, not a passive one. So you need a way to get the PCs to participate in that backstory, most of the time.

Two options immediately spring to mind: Active roles and Inactive roles.

Active Roles

An active role means that PCs are present to witness the development, but not forced to actually intervene immediately – they can go away, think about their options, and make plans before throwing their hat into the ring.

This is a lot easier to arrange, and a lot more likely to result, when it’s one lone PC becoming aware through happenstance of a problem too big for one PC to handle. Especially if your narrative feeds those cues to the player in question.

And if they don’t take the hint, make sure to capture them, not kill them – rescuing a friend and ally is a great motivator. Of course, the other PCs are starting a bit behind the eight-ball; not only are they missing the expertise and contacts of the captured player, but all they know is that he or she went somewhere and didn’t come back. It will take time for the seriousness of the situation to become apparent, and all the while, the enemy’s plots are maturing and becoming that much harder to counter.

The question naturally arises, what to do with the player whose character has been captured? Well, there are three possibilities: A substitute or an active engagement, or a combination of both.

A Substitute

Give the player an NPC to run in the interim. One that is a lot weaker than the PC that he usually plays. A great choice is often a turncoat or spy from within the enemy’s organization, one not privy to everything that’s going on, but one who knows that the PC has been captured. But this isn’t something that can be done all the time.

You want the player to have something to do, but at the same time, you want to teach that player a lesson – not to bite off more than they can chew when you’ve explicitly warned the player this was what they were doing.

Another option is a character with a short-term story arc that will occupy the player until the other PCs decide to investigate the disappearance of their missing ally.

In this circumstance, I once had a mage accidentally disconnect from his body and become a disembodied spirit, and able to ‘escape’ in that form; not only was he able to sound the warning about what the bad guys were up to, and participate somewhat vicariously in his own rescue, he then brought in a whole other plotline about how to get his spirit back into the body from whence it came.

There’s a lot you can do in this line with a little creativity.

One word of warning, though; this worked out so well that the player in question then concocted a hair-brained scheme to let himself get captured by an enemy as a way to gather intelligence. Suffice it to say that things did not work out for him so well the second time around; his released Spirit was captured in a phylactery and tortured, watching the Cannibalistic bad guy literally eat his body in front of him. The other PCs eventually rescued him and got him stuffed in a Golem body – one about 4′ tall….

Active Engagement

This is trickier to arrange, it needs just the right kind of villain. Someone with the arrogance – or the legitimacy – to think that he can turn the PC to “the dark side” (or his side, whichever works). Or who is so arrogant that he considers the PC to be helpless, and decides to show off, James-Bond-Villain-style.

This can’t be done at the game table where all the other players can hear what’s going on. In fact, it’s better handled in a completely separate solo game session, if that can be arranged – and the PC then spends as long as it takes waiting for the plot (and his friends) to catch up with him.

And what if the villain has not miscalculated and the PC really does turn coat? Have a plan ready for this eventuality!

A Combination

Perhaps the best answer is to blend the two. Most of the time, the player runs a temporary PC – one with a definite in-game shelf life – but, every now and then, take the player aside for a brief contact with what his real PC’s situation is.

Inactive Roles

An inactive role doesn’t put the PC’s head in a noose. Someone comes to the PC and tells him a story. It may be incomplete, it may be full of holes, it may be legitimate or it may be a plant – but the goal is to have the NPC offer up the backstory development as news to the PC, who then decides what to do about it.

There’s a lot you can do with this.

The warning may be legitimate.

The NPC may be the villain looking to use the PCs as cat’s paws to do his dirty work for him – with fake scenes being enacted by minions for the PC’s benefit. The more convincing he can be, the bigger the eventual payoff.

The NPC may be a villain, out to have the PCs take down a rival who is just as bad.

Or, the NPC may be a villain who simply wants the PCs out of the way so that he can get on with “business”.

Unfortunately, you can rarely use all of these options in the one campaign. But if you mix them up to avoid getting predictable, you can have great fun.

The Players as Audience

Okay, so what’s this big technique, then?

I call it the Retroactive Flashback.

It works best at the start of the second session in a multi-session adventure, or in the session after the PCs become aware of the menace posed by the villain at the center of the plot, and his identity.

At the start of that session, you describe the flashback sequence to the PCs without explanation until the very end. You conclude with, “over the last [in-game time-period elapsed since the last session], you’ve all imagined something like this taking place. Whether or not it’s what actually happened, you don’t know.”

You can willfully distort this flashback to hide planned plot twists. You can leave plot holes, and introduce errors of logic. You can put this “imaginary sequence” into the head of one PC or all of them. Or an NPC who has just related it to a PC.

To construct it, you need to make sure that it doesn’t contain anything the PCs don’t know and cant infer as a reasonable supposition. So it’s inherently going to be incomplete – plug most of the gaps with stuff you’ve invented out of whole cloth.

Use it to get the players into the proper mindset for carrying the adventure forward.

Look, it’s a technique that could easily be overused or abused. It’s not a justification for weak storytelling. But it’s a way to insert the antagonist-focused scene without the PC scrying it, or dreaming it, or learning of it through a deus-ex-machina.

You can actively guard against abuse by ensuring that each time you sue it, you have some opportunity for the story to be ‘corrected’ further down the track. If you can’t come up with a good way of doing that, don’t use the technique. But that’s up to you.

And, Speaking Of Writing…. (Bonus Content)

I got taken in by a piece of spam the other day – it doesn’t happen often, but I’m human and have my lapses just like everyone else.

I got an email from a seemingly-legitimate source through the Campaign Mastery feedback page. It read,

First off I want to say awesome blog! I had a quick question which I’d
like to ask if you don’t mind.

I was curious to know how you center yourself and clear your head prior to writing.

I have had a tough time clearing my mind in getting my ideas out there. I truly do take pleasure in writing however it just seems like the first 10 to 15 minutes tend to be wasted simply just trying to figure out how to begin.

Any ideas or hints? Cheers!

————————-
Time: May 26, 2025 at 3:16 pm

I dashed off a quickish reply a few days later when I had a spare moment and thought nothing more of it – until the email came back as “undeliverable – no such address”.

Well, I think that my advice is sound, and deserves to be out there. And it might just be beneficial to other GMs. So I’ve decided to toss it in as some extra content to this (relatively short) article:

I find that the notion that you need to center yourself before writing is actually a myth. Instead, you need to direct yourself so that the thoughts crowding into your head are productive and beneficial to the end product.

Writing starts with a moment of inspiration, an idea, something to say or discuss.

I immediately create a file with an appropriate name in which the development of the written piece will take place, and summarize as briefly and succinctly as possible that idea at the start of it.

I then break down the discussion plan as a bullet-point outline of what the content of the piece will be, from an introduction through to the logical conclusion of the original thought or idea. This -road map’ is not fixed; I will add, subtract, and amend it as I write, but it’s a foundation. Enthusiasm for the idea is usually enough to carry me this far, no matter what the distractions, and it takes little enough time that I can interrupt other tasks long enough to carry it out. I will often also include a single sentence summarizing the intended content or point of each section, because there’s nothing worse than coming to a bullet point and not remembering what you meant by it.

Save the document and set it aside for when you have time to develop it.

Writing session 1: I start with the introduction, which is usually about what has inspired the article or recent events in life. These require little or no pre-planning, it’s just stream-of-consciousness, but it clears the mind. I then turn to the first of my bullet points, and start writing. When I’ve finished with that one, I move on to the next, and so on.

If it’s a short piece, or the words flow especially well, and there’s little or no research required, I may finish the item in one sitting. More commonly, though, I’ll get just a fraction of the way there.

Writing session 2+: I re-read the introduction. This helps connect me back to the original inspiration. I’ll then skim the last completed section, which helps me get back into the flow of writing the article. That brings me to the next of my bullet points, which gives my writing and thoughts direction. The first two steps clear out the cobwebs and get you ready to focus.

If I’m dealing with a larger work, a multipart post or book chapter, there may be subdivisions within each bullet point – the top level ones become chapters and the subordinate ones sections within the chapter.

I know this approach doesn’t work for everyone, but I find it works for me.

Have fun out there, and I’ll see you all next time!

Yet another post talking about the weather – but this time, from the perspective of what detail to throw away.

Table Of Contents

In part 1:

Chapter 5: Land Transport

5.1 Distance, Time, & Detriments

5.1.1 Time Vs Distance
5.1.2 Defining a terrain / region / locality

     5.1.2.1 Road Quality: An introductory mention

5.2 Terrain

5.2.0 Terrain Factor
5.2.1 % Distance
5.2.2 Good Roads
5.2.3 Bad Roads
5.2.4 Even Ground
5.2.5 Broken Ground
5.2.5 Marshlands
5.2.7 Swamplands
5.2.8 Woodlands
5.2.9 Forests
5.2.10 Rolling Hills
5.2.11 Mountain Slopes
5.2.12 Mountain Passes
5.2.13 Deserts
5.2.14 Exotic Terrain
5.2.15 Road Quality
     5.2.15.1 The four-tier system
     5.2.15.2 The five-tier system
     5.2.15.3 The eight-tier system
     5.2.15.4 The ten-tier system

5.2.16 Rivers & Other Waterways
     5.2.16.1 Fords
     5.2.16.2 Bridges
     5.2.16.3 Tolls
     5.2.16.4 Ferries
     5.2.16.5 Portage & Other Solutions

Today:

5.3 Weather

5.3.1 Seasonal Trend
5.3.2 Broad Variations
5.3.3 Narrow Variations
     5.3.3.1 Every 2nd month?
     5.3.3.2 Transition Months
     5.3.3.3 Adding a little randomness: 1/2 length variations
     5.3.3.4 Adding a little randomness: 1 1./2-, 2-, and 2 1/2-length variations

5.3.4 Maintaining The Average
     5.3.4.1 Correction Timing
          5.3.4.1.1 Off-cycle corrections
          5.3.4.1.2 Oppositional corrections
          5.3.4.1.3 Adjacent corrections
          5.3.4.1.4 Hangover corrections

     5.3.4.2 Correction Duration
          5.3.4.2.1 Distributed corrections: 12 months
               5.3.4.2.1.1 Even Distribution
               5.3.4.2.1.2 Random Distribution
               5.3.4.2.1.3 Weighted Random Distribution

          5.3.4.2.2 Distributed corrections: 6 months
          5.3.4.2.3 Distributed corrections: 3 months
          5.3.4.2.4 Slow Corrections (2 months)
          5.3.4.2.5 Normal corrections: 1 month
          5.3.4.2.6 Fast corrections: 1/2 month (2 weeks)
          5.3.4.2.7 Catastrophic corrections 1/4 month (1 week)

     5.4.4.3 Maintaining Synchronization
     5.4.4.4 Multiple Correction Layers

5.4 Losses & Hazards
5.5 Expenses – as Terrain Factors
5.6 Expenses – as aspects of Politics

In parts to come:

5.7 Inns, Castles, & Strongholds

5.7.1 Strongholds
5.7.2 Castles
5.7.3 Inns

5.8 Villages, Towns, & Cities

5.8.1 Villages
     5.8.1.1 Village Frequency
     5.8.1.2 Village Initial Size
     5.8.1.3 The Generic Village

5.8.2 Towns
     5.8.2.1 Towns Frequency
     5.8.2.2 Town Initial Size
     5.8.2.3 The Generic Town

5.8.3 Cities
     5.8.2.2 Small City Frequency
     5.8.2.3 Small City Size
     5.8.2.4 Size Of The Capital
     5.8.2.5 Large City Frequency
     5.8.2.6 Large City Size

5.8.4 Economic Factors, Simplified
     5.8.4.1 Trade Routes & Connections
     5.8.4.2 Local Industry
     5.8.4.3 Military Significance
     5.8.4.4 Scenery & History
     5.8.4.5 Other Economic Modifiers
     5.8.4.6 Upscaled Villages
     5.8.4.7 Upscaled Towns
     5.8.4.8 Upscaled Small Cities
     5.8.4.9 Upscaling The Capital & Large Cities

5.8.5 Overall Population
     5.8.5.1 Realm Size
     5.8.5.2 % Wilderness
     5.8.5.3 % Fertile
     5.8.5.4 % Good
     5.8.5.5 % Mediocre
     5.8.5.6 % Poor
     5.8.5.7 % Dire
     5.8.5.8 % Wasteland
     5.8.5.9 Net Agricultural Capacity

     5.8.5.10 Misadventures, Disasters, and Calamities
     5.8.5.11 Birth Rate per year
     5.8.5.12 Mortality
          5.8.5.12.1 Infant Mortality
          5.8.5.12.2 Child Mortality
          5.8.5.12.3 Teen Mortality
          5.8.5.12.4 Youth Mortality
          5.8.5.12.5 Adult Mortality
          5.8.5.12.6 Senior Mortality
          5.8.5.12.7 Elderly Mortality
          5.8.5.12.8 Venerable Mortality
          5.8.5.12.9 Net Mortality

     5.8.5.13 Net Population

5.8.6 Population Distribution
     5.8.6.1 The Roaming Population
     5.8.6.2 The Capital
     5.8.6.3 The Cities
     5.8.6.4 Number of Towns
     5.8.6.5 Number of Villages
     5.8.6.6 Hypothetical Population
     5.8.6.7 The Realm Factor
     5.8.6.8 True Village Size
     5.8.6.9 True Town Size
     5.8.6.10 Adjusted City Size
     5.8.6.11 Adjusted Capital Size

5.8.7 Population Centers On The Fly
     5.8.7.1 Total Population Centers
     5.8.7.2 The Distribution Table
     5.8.7.3 The Cities
     5.8.7.4 Village or Town?
     5.8.7.5 Size Bias
          5.8.7.5.1 Economic Bias
          5.8.7.5.2 Fertility Bias
          5.8.7.5.3 Military Personnel
          5.8.7.5.4 The Net Bias

     5.8.7.6 The Die Roll
     5.8.7.7 Applying Net Bias
     5.8.7.8 Applying The Realm Factor
     5.8.7.9 The True Size
          5.8.7.9.1 Justifying The Size
          5.8.7.9.2 The Implications

5.9 Compiled Trade Routes

5.9.1 National Legs
5.9.2 Sub-Legs
5.9.3 Compounding Terrain Factors
5.9.4 Compounding Weather Factors
5.9.5 Compounding Expenses
5.9.6 Compounding Losses
5.9.7 Compounding Profits
5.9.8 Other Expenses
5.9.9 Net Profit

5.10 Time
5.11 Exotic Transport

And, In future chapters:

6. Waterborne Transport
7. Spoilage
8. Key Personnel
9. The Journey
10. Arrival
11. Journey’s End
12. Adventures En Route

5.3 Weather

In a previous part of this series I spent an entire post detailing a very rich weather system because ships at sea are utterly dependent on the weather and on very precise details. On land, such specificity is a burden, not a luxury, and so this chapter includes a much simpler weather system. I very strongly want to let it be shaped by the previous one, though, so that if further detail is needed – and from time to time it will be – you can simply drop in whatever part of the previous system is relevant, use it for as long as you need it, and then put it away again.

5.3.1 Seasonal Trend

The place to start, therefore, is with a seasonal trend. How much hotter or colder does it get, each day, on average? And how much does the daily minimum change?

How much does the daily chance of precipitation in some form increase or decrease each day?

How much does the average amount of such precipitation rise or fall?

Is this region or area known for strong winds, and what times of year do they arrive?

These five facts define a seasonal weather pattern. You can specify it in months if you want, on the assumption that a season can be subdivided into three parts – early, middle, and late – or into 6-week spans (so a season of two halves) – or you can even do seasonal spans (4 weeks late of one season and 4 weeks early of the next as one long trend, then four weeks at the height of the new season, then start again – dividing the year into eight unequal portions).

Tropical climates don’t even need that much variation – they have two seasons, wet and dry. And there isn’t so much a transition as a catastrophic changeover.

As readers will have seen in my series, The Diversity Of Seasons, I like to model game weather in my campaigns on a real location as much as I can, for two reasons: first, there may be historical weather records that I can access, ensuring a realism that simply can’t be achieved any other way; and secondly, because an annual weather summary makes it a lot easier to boil a specific climate down into exactly the sort of trends described above.

But, for this system, I think even this is more richly detailed than necessary. So instead, let’s start here:

For a major location or a region, write down a one-line answer to each of the following questions:

1. What’s a good-weather day in summer like?
2. What’s a bad-weather day in summer like?
3. What’s a good-weather day in autumn like?
4. What’s a bad-weather day in autumn like?
5. What’s a good-weather day in winter like?
6. What’s a bad-weather day in winter like?
7. What’s a good-weather day in spring like?
8. What’s a bad-weather day in spring like?

Now, we’ve reduced those 5 parameters down to just one or two: How much more or less likely are bad weather days? How much more or less likely are good weather days?

The assumption, of course, is that most days are going to be somewhere in between.

If that’s all you’re ever going to need, that’s it, you can move on to the next section. Sadly, it probably isn’t, and you’re back to looking at those 5 numeric parameters.

So let’s pick somewhere and set them, just as an example. For no reason in particular, let’s pick a place I know nothing about aside from general perceptions: Brensbach, Germany. No, that doesn’t work, no weather data. All right, Bonn. There’s probably lots of climate info on Bonn.

Wikipedia tells me Bonn is in one of Germany’s warmest regions, so I’ll take that on board.

Looking at the climate chart, there are three values to pick between for daily maximum temperature – Record High, Mean Maximum, and Mean Daily Maximum. The first is the most extreme ever recorded, not useful in this context; the second is the average of the highest in any given month over a number of years, so that’s a contender; the third is the average of all maximum temperatures in the month over those many years. What’s the difference?

Here are three (invented) weather records in graph form for June for Bonn:



In the fictional-2022, there were some highs and some lows and a slight drop in average temperature over the month (the black line). In fictional-2023, there is a slightly more extreme drop in maximum temperature but it’s still fairly consistent. In fictional-2024, there are four major warm periods separated by colder ones and the overall temperature has declined noticeably by the end of the month.

Note the days circled in yellow – those are the individually-hottest days in the course of the month. In two cases out of three, they occur early in the month.

The figure supplied by Wikipedia for the Mean Maximum is the mean of all the individually hottest days for all the Junes on record in Bonn. In terms of forecasting the weather, not very useful. Averaging the maximum temperatures for every June day on record gives the Mean Dally Maximum. That’s the one we want.

But the difference to the other one is also useful – we can write the daily June average as (in this case) 22.5°C ± 9°.

The numbers for July are 24.1°C ± 8.8°.

The difference from June to July is +1.6°C ± 8.9°C

Notice that I’ve averaged the ± values for each month.

Over 30 days, that’s +0.0533333°C – too low to be useful – or 1°C every 18.75 days. Fahrenheit, because the size of a degree is smaller, might appear to be more useful for this, but here’s a though to consider: it’s my contention that 1°C is the smallest temperature change that we humans notice. If it’s 22°C right now, and an hour from now it’s going to be 23°C, we will actually notice the difference.

In some places, Summer will be May-June-July. In other places, it might be mid-May-June-July-mid-August.

I don’t care about any of that. It’s too detailed, too fussy. I want to compare the middle months of each season with the middle month of the next season, and those distinctions mostly get washed away in the process. So the process for setting the post-midsummer change is to compare June (midsummer) with September (mid-Autumn).

June numbers again: 22.5°C ± 9°.
September: 20.0°C ± 7.4°.

Ignoring mid-season, that means that late summer and early autumn in total (about 60 days) yield -2.5°, &PlusMinus 8.2°. And, 2.5 / 60 = 0.0416667, or -1° every 24 days.

I can do the same for the minimum daily temperatures:

June: 11.8°C ± 5.1°
September: 10.3°C ± 5.5°.

60-day change: -0.025°/day or 1° every 40 days, ± 5.3°C.

Average Precipitation is per month. In June it was 81.5mm (3.21 inches). But the row after next gives the average number of rainy days as 14.1 – so divide one by the other to get an average daily rainfall on wet days of 81.5/14.1 = 5.78mm / rainy day, or about 0.2276 inches. That’s more than a shower, it’s a light rain over several hours or a shorter, more intense, rain, like in a thunderstorm. 14.1 out of 30 = 47% chance of rain each day.

The September numbers: 62.5mm over 13.6 days = 4.59mm / rainy day; and 13.6/30 = 45.333% chance of rain each day.

Over 60 days, we go from 47% chance of rain to 45.333% chance of rain, so the overall chance is 47% -1% every 36 days.

The amount of rain on a rainy day goes from 5.78 to 4.59 mm, a change of -1.19mm, or 0.0198 mm/day or -1 mm every 50.42 days, or -0.1 mm every 5 days. That last isn’t bad, in terms of usefulness, but it might be even better to calculate it over rainy days and not all days.

Same change of -1.19mm; but instead of 60 days, we’re looking at the average of 47 and 45.333% times that sixty days, or 46.1665% x 60 = 27.7 rainy days.

-1.19mm / 27.7 rainy days = -0.04296 mm / rainy day or 23.277 rainy days per -1 mm or 2.327 rainy days per -0.1 mm.

Once a weather profile for an area has been calculated, it will never change absent some extraordinary geographic interference. The only remaining question before we can move on is how far does this climate representation extend?

This is a far more rubbery question. There are no good answers, because climate is just too complicated, and impacted by all sorts of factors. To offer some sense of the complexities involved: Africa and Australia are about as far apart as you can get and still be in the same hemisphere – except for South America, which is further from Australia..



This map was produced in 1961 by the Central Intelligence Agency of the USA and is available in raster form from the US Library Of Congress. As a work-product of the United States Government, it is considered to be in the Public Domain in the United States. Image courtesy of’ Wikimedia Commons. Cropped by me with notations moved inboard and contrast / color-depth increased.

When inland Australia has a relatively wet year, there is usually drought in Africa. When it rains there, we have drought here, and heightened bushfire dangers. You might expect that all that ocean in between had a decisive role to play, but no. Is it our weather that changes theirs, or their weather that changes ours, or is the relationship still more complicated than that? I would bet on the latter. It’s my understanding that it’s a question of whether or not the potential rain falls from the atmosphere there, or stays up there until it gets to here, but I have low levels of confidence in that understanding.

The fact that weather is so complicated is both a good and a bad thing, from an RPG systems perspective. It means that almost any output from a game mechanic can be rationalized and interpreted plausibly; but it also means that any decent system gets easily bogged down because there are so many aspects of the weather to pin down..

5.3.2 Broad Variations

In Australia, we are very familiar with El Nino and La Nina phenomena and the Southern Oscillation Index, and the impact that they have on our weather, and are slowly becoming more aware generally of the impact of the Indian Ocean Dipole on our weather. To quote from Wikipedia:

Across most of the continent, El Nino and La Nina have more impact on climate variability than any other factor. There is a strong correlation between the strength of La Nina and rainfall: the greater the sea surface temperature and Southern Oscillation difference from normal, the larger the rainfall change.

During El Nino events, the shift in rainfall away from the Western Pacific may mean that rainfall across Australia is reduced. Over the southern part of the continent, warmer than average temperatures can be recorded as weather systems are more mobile and fewer blocking areas of high pressure occur. The onset of the Indo-Australian Monsoon in tropical Australia is delayed by two to six weeks, which as a consequence means that rainfall is reduced over the northern tropics. The risk of a significant bushfire season in south-eastern Australia is higher following an El Nino event, especially when it is combined with a positive Indian Ocean Dipole event.

… Australia … experiences extensive droughts alongside considerable wet periods that cause major floods. There exist three phases – El Nino, La Nina, and Neutral… Since 1900, there have been 28 El Nino and 19 La Nina events in Australia including the current 2023 El Nino event. The[se] events usually last for 9 to 12 months, but some can persist for two years [or more], though the ENSO cycle generally operates over a time period from one to eight years.

What this means is that there are multiyear long-term cycles of varying duration and intensity, which compound with the typical climatic pattern. It’s the same everywhere, though the intensity of such effects can vary. As a general rule, you cycle from hotter-dryer to cooler-wetter, but there’s enough variability to cause complications.

I propose getting around these implications and complications by applying separate cycles for rainfall and temperature, even though that’s not actually accurate.

Any of the values recorded in the previous section can be affected. One combination of factors might mean warmer nights and cooler days; another might not affect night-time temperatures at all but could push daytime maximums up or down.

Ultimately, these boil down to two factors: how much, and for how long?

How much: roll d-something (based on the level of variability of the season and rounding down) and divide by 2. When the current phase of the cycle ends, make the same roll and apply it in the opposite direction – so if you’re getting +3.5°C on the daily maximums, and you roll 2.5°C, then the modifier drops to +1°C. And, since that’s still a positive number, the next roll will also subtract from it.

How long: 6+d12 months, but if you roll a 12, subtract 2 and add a d6 and another d12.

11/12ths of the time, you’ll get a flat 7-18 months, average 12 months. One time in 12, you’ll get a 16+d6+d12 pattern, which looks like this:



Each time you generate the weather, you simply add this modifier to the result and take it off the variability.

5.3.3 Narrow Variations

That leaves only the more frequent and common daily cycles. There are two phenomena that these have to replicate: one off-events where the system ‘clears its throat’ and protracted events that impact weather over multiple days.

This is rather trickier, because long-range events are rare, but get more likely the shorter they are; while short-term events last a day or two, three at the most, and the shorter the duration, the more likely they are. So we have two completely distinct probability curves, in terms of duration.

That requires, generally speaking, two die rolls. And, given the shapes involved, divided die rolls at that.

Roll 1: 2d8 / (d4+3), minimum result 1
Results > 2, use Roll #2 instead: [(3d8+4) / 2d4] +2



When you plot these, this is what you get: 93% of the time, you’re talking a 1-2 day event, with 1 happening 64% of the time. But on the remaining 7%, there’s a peak probability of 3-to-8 days, but an outside chance of an event lasting up to 12 days – and an extremely remote probability of another 4 days beyond that (amounting to just over 1% of the 7%).

Intensity of event follows the same basic curve as the second results roll without the +2, divided by 2 instead:

Roll3: [(3d8+4) / 2d4] /2, round down.

So instead of 4-5, the answers are 1-1.5. For practical purposes anything more than 4.5 is going to be 1% or less.

If you really want to, you can divide the result by 4.5 and multiply by double the variation determined after the long-term weather patterns are taken into account. I don’t think it’s worth the effort myself – but I would probably have stopped at the “% chance good days” in the first place.

5.3.3.1 Every 2nd month?

There are all sorts of things that can be done to make the system more robust. I don’t think they are necessary, either, with one possible exception.

The first is to divide the year up a little differently. Say that seasonal transitions take a little less time and are more abrupt, and that the mid-season period is longer and more consistent therefore. This is less realistic but makes the changes more dramatic, and hence, more impactful in game terms. It also means that you can ignore all the complicated stuff more of the time and just run off the core season.

Another approach is to ignore the seasons entirely, and let them emerge naturally from the weather. This approach means that you are always transitioning from the previous month to the next month and ignoring what’s recorded for the in-between.

So:
January = the average of December & February.
February = the average of January & March.
March = the average of February & April.
…. and so on.

This ‘second month’ approach smooths over the maths quite a lot. You’re no longer worried about trends; instead, you take the average that you calculate and that is the base weather. Apply the long-term cycles and short term variations as usual.

5.3.3.2 Transition Months

Another technique is to say that the seasons are 2 1/2 months long, and average the relevant months to get a base weather for the entire season. That leaves transitions taking 1 week of the end of the season and the first week of the next, which you get by averaging the two months.

Shortening the transition months like this makes weather transitions so sharp as to be unrealistic, but you are going to be counting on random variations to hide that fact. If that doesn’t seem enough, weight the outcomes of the random rolls to favor the results that should be trending – if you’re heading into summer and the dice indicate a cool day (down 4 degrees on the average), flip the result to make it 4 degrees warmer than the indicated average.

5.3.3.3 Adding a little randomness: 1/2 length variations

This is the one that might be worthwhile – it halves the length of random variations by making the results the number of “half-days” instead of “whole days”. You can then roll a random number for exactly when the change comes through – I would suggest adding or subtracting up to 6 hours, in other words, d12-6 hours. That means that you can get evening shifts, dawn shifts, and noon shifts as well as midnight shifts in the weather.

I would further simplify: if the indicated duration is 1/2 day or less, it counts for zero against the pattern; if it’s more than 1/2 a day, then it counts as a full day.

5.3.3.4 Adding a little randomness: 1 1./2-, 2-, and 2 1/2-length variations

I was talking about these general principles to someone once, and they suggested expanding the half-day variation principle to longer durations, effectively compensating for the /2 by multiplying a d5 by the duration, or maybe a d6. Presented here for the sake of completeness, this is not something I would recommend..

5.3.4 Maintaining The Average

Ever have a time when a series of die rolls for the same thing came up high all the time, even when rolled days apart? I’ve seen it happen. In the extremely long run, it all averages out of course, but the fact of the matter is that simple weather generation systems are necessarily poorly granular – there’s often quite a lot of variation and not a lot of subtlety to the results. So there’s one further refinement that’s worth considering, no matter how you roll for your weather.

If you only generate results when you need them, this lack of granularity gets amplified.

But there is a relatively simple solution: keep track of your results, I mean the end numbers not the bits in between. How hot did it get? How cool at night? How many rainy days were there, and how much rain fell?

From these, you can set yet another correction factor to bring the overall average back to whatever it’s supposed to be.

There are three factors to consider: when to calculate and apply a modifier, how long it needs to last, and how big of an adjustment?

If the weather system tells you there’s five days of heavy rain, you can expect floods. That much rain ruins the fit to the average expectation – the solution is to compensate for the greater rainfall by making other rainfall lighter or shorter or nothing more than threatening clouds, until the overall average is back where it’s supposed to be.

5.3.4.1 Correction Timing

Because you want as much of the correction to take place ‘naturally’, i.e. through daily variations and general weather patterns, these corrections shouldn’t happen all that frequently. For that reason, the timing of them should be linked to the long-term weather cycles and not to anything shorter.

There are four basic options. Which one should you choose? I would roll randomly, they are all as likely as each other.

5.3.4.1.1 Off-cycle corrections

Off-cycle means that as soon as the cycle ends you make the calculation and use the correction instead of rolling for a new long-tern cycle result. Once you’re back to average, you roll a new long-term cycle result to take it’s place and carry on your merry way.

5.3.4.1.2 Oppositional corrections

Oppositional Correction means that when the long term cycle indicates the opposite of what it did when the accumulated error took place, this additional modifier will compound with that long-term trend to make matters better – or worse.

You’re supposed to have a dry season but you roll a lot of rain? Compensate by making the following wet season trend drier than usual.

5.3.4.1.3 Adjacent corrections

This divides the compensation in two and applies them to both the next cycle phase and the one after that. In effect, it spreads the adjustment out over a longer period, making it less noticeable.

5.4.4.1.4 Hangover corrections

Finally, you can keep hold of any required adjustments until there’s a long-term trend in the indicated direction and then apply them. This means that long dry periods get (eventually) balanced by floods, and long wet periods get (eventually) balanced by droughts. The redress might not happen next year, or even the year after – it’s longer term than that.

This can mean that you end up with several such modifiers / corrections taking hold all at once. That happens in reality, too – a long run of medium-to-good years followed not just by a drought or cold snap, but by a massive drought – the kind that affects parts of Africa every now and then – or little ice age, like the ones reported in England in 1650, 1770, and 1850, each separated by intervals of slight warming. Modern climatology conflates all three into something referred to as the Little Ice Age.

Between 1649 and 1666, for four successive winters, the Thames froze over – something that only generally happened one year in ten even in the Little Ice Age. The most severe freezing of England ever recorded was during the Great Frost Of 1683-84 when the Thames froze for months at a time, and the ice reached as much as 11 inches thick (See River Thames Frost Fairs for more information).

That’s what an accumulation of corrections can look like.

5.3.4.2 Correction Duration

The next factor to consider is duration. There are five patterns, each roughly twice as likely as the one that follows it, and with the largest one subdivided along similar probability lines. When you map that onto a d% roll, you get:

01-29 Normal Correction (1 month)
30-44 Slow Correction (2 months)
45-52 Distributed Correction 3 months
52-77 Distributed Correction 6 months
78-90 Distributed Correction 12 months
91-97 Fast Correction (1/2 month)
98-00 Catastrophic Correction (1.4 month = 1 week)

The above takes into account two factors: that most errors will cancel out, leaving a relatively small net correction; and a lot of weather events are like a cascade of dominoes, or a chain reaction – something builds up until it can no longer be contained and then lets go – but it doesn’t happen all at once.

5.3.4.2.1 Distributed corrections: 12 months

I’m going to deal with these in sequence of decreasing length rather than a sequence derived from the probability shown above. A 12-month distribution is as long as a correction gets, and is one of the more improbable outcomes.

It does not mean that an adjustment is applied daily for 365 days. Rather, the size of the total adjustment required dictates the number of days.

The minimum adjustment is generally 0.5°C if your source measurements are to 0.1°, 1° otherwise if they are in °C, and 2° if they are in °F.’

For every 2 of this size, there will be one of twice as long. The pattern is A, BB, CCCC, DDDD DDDD, and so on.

You want the largest such pattern that is less than the total adjustment.

1 A = 1
2 B = 2 (+1 = 3)
3 C = 3 (+3 = 6)
4 D = 4 (+6 = 10)
5 E = 5 (+10 = 15)
6 F = 6 (+15 = 21)
7 G = 7 (+ 21 = 28)
8 H = 8 (+ 28 = 36)
9 I = 9 (+ 36 = 45)
10 J = 10 (+ 45 = 55)
11 K = 11 (+55 = 66)
12 L = 12 (+66 = 78)
13 M = 13 (+78 = 91)
14 N = 14 (+91 = 105)
15 O = 15 (+105 = 120)
16 P = 16 (+120 = 136)
17 Q = 17 (+136 = 153)
18 R = 18 (+153 = 171)
19 S = 19 (+171 = 190)
20 T = 20 (+190 = 210)

That should be far enough! In fact, it almost certainly goes too far, but that’s better than the alternative.

So let’s walk our way through the table and then I’ll explain the process of using it. the first number is the number multiplied by the minimum adjustment to get the actual adjustment for a specific scale. Those scales are labeled A, B, C, and so on. The third number is the weight of the adjustment, which I’ll explain in a moment, while the fourth number (in the brackets) is the cumulative weight.

The presence of a given level of adjustment – M, say – implies that there’s at least one adjustment of each smaller size also required. So the number to compare with the total is the cumulative.

Allocate the largest single adjustment and subtract it from the total correction. Divide the result by the cumulative value of the next lowest score – you’re only interested in whole numbers, so it’s not too difficult a calculation. That’s how many adjustments there are of that next smaller scale. So allocate them, deduct their total correction from the goal, and repeat until you know how many A events there are going to be.

An example: Let’s say that we need a total of 84mm of additional rainfall.

▪ 78 is less than 84, and gives an L adjustment. 91 is too high.
▪ So there is 1 L adjustment of 12 x the base. Let’s use 1 mm as the base. So on on day, there will be +12mm of rain.
▪ Subtract 12 from the total required: 84 – 12 = 72.

▪ The next lowest rating, K, has a cumulative weight of 66. There’s only room for one of those in 72.
▪ Subtract the value of K from the new target of 72: 72-11 = 61.

▪ The next lowest rating, J, has a cumulative weight of 55. There’s still only room for 1. So far, we have three events: L, K, J.
▪ Subtract the value of J from the target total: 61 – 10 = 51.

▪ The I rating scores 9 and has a total weight of 45. Still only 1 event.
▪ Subtract the value of I from the target total: 51-9=42.

▪ The H rating scores 8 and has a total weight of 36. Still only 1 event.
▪ Subtract the value of H from the target total: 42-8=34.

▪ The G rating scores 7 and has a total weight of 28. Still only one event. So far we have 1 each of L, K, J, H, and G.
▪ Subtract the value of G from the target total: 34-7=27.

▪ In the same way, we add a single F and a single E event, accounting for another 11 of the total adjustment and leaving 16 to get.

▪ And then we add a D event with a weight of 5, leaving 11.

▪ You can see that we’re close to a multiple higher than 1, but C doesn’t quite get us there; it has a total weight of 6. Add one C event.
▪ Subtract the C value from the target: 11-3=8.

▪ The weight of a B event is 3. So there are TWO b events in this adjustment, with a total value of 6.
▪ Subtract the 2xB value from the target: 8-6=2.

▪ There are two A events, worth 1 each.
▪ The total sequence is AA, BB, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L.

if the scale of the proposed adjustment seems too high for you – it should be less than the total variability if you know it – the solution is to allocate more of the top level events, retreating steps down the table until you get a daily adjustment you can live with.

SECOND EXAMPLE:
We need a total adjustment after a long cold spell of +120°C. If we’re using 1/2 degrees, that’s a total requirement of 120 / 0.5 = 240 units if adjustment. Our daily capacity is no more than 4°C, or 8 of those adjustments. That’s an H event.

▪ H events have a total weight of 36. 240 / 36 = 6 and a remainder. So there are going to be 6 H events for a total adjustment of 6 x 8 = 48. This leaves 192 to go.

▪ G events have a total weight of 28. Divide the target of 192 by 28 and you get 6 and a remainder. So there are 6 G events, for a net correction of 6×7 = 42 units. This leaves 192-42=150 to go.

▪ F events have a value of 6 and a total weight of 21. Divide the target of 150 by the total weight and you get 7 and a remainder. There are 7 F events of total value 7×6 = 42. 108 to go.

▪ E events have a value of 5 and a total weight of 15 each. Divide the target of 108 by 15 and you get 7 and a remainder. 7 E events are a total correction of 35 units. 73 to go.

▪ D events have a value of 4 and a total weight of 10 each. 73 / 10 = 7 and a remainder. There are 7 D events, worth a total correction of 28. 45 to go.

▪ C events have a value of 3 and a total weight of 6 each. 45 / 6 = 7 and a remainder (what a surprise!) There are 7 C events which are a total correction of 21. That leaves just 24.

▪  events have a value of 2 and a weight each of 3. 24/3=8. There are 8 B events accounting for 16 units of adjustment and leaving 8.

▪ Which obviously means that there are 8 A events.

▪ 8 + 8 + 7×6 = 58 events in total.

Having broken the correction up into individual adjustments, the next step is to determine the distribution of those adjustments.

There are three basic models for doing so: Even distribution is the simplest, randomly even is the next most complicated, and weighted is the most realistic.

5.3.4.2.1.1 Even Distribution

The number of events of a given scale can either be lumped together to form a single longer event, or kept separate to form more events. Group them as you see fit.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
▪ A, A, B, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L = 14 events. That’s a workable number – no grouping.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
▪ 8xA, 8xB, 7xC, 7xD, 7xE, 7xF, 7xG, 7xH – that’s a total of 58 events, as noted earlier. That’s a bit unwieldy. I’ll break each of the lower “7x” into a 3x, a 2x, and two 1x events (C through E)., and the higher ones into a 3x and a 4x grouping. So I end up with:

▪ 8xA, 8xB, C, C. CC, CCC, D, D, DD, DDD, E, E, EE, EEE, FFF, FFFF, GGG, GGGG, HHH, HHHH = 8 + 8 + 3+ 3×3 + 3×2 = 16+3+9+6 = 34 events.

For those events that have a compound duration, add 1 to the total duration of the adjustment and then subtract the total length of those events.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
▪ There are no compound-length events.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
▪ There are 12 compound length events – CC, CCC, DD, DDD, and so on. They total 2+3 + 2+3 + 2+3 + 3+4+ 3+4 + 3+4 = 15 + 21 = 36 days. 12 months = 365 days so 365+12-36 = 377-36 = 341 days.

Divide the result by the total number of correction event groups. Round down to (user’s choice) whole days, half days, or quarter days. That’s the interval between the end of one correction event and the start of the next.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
▪ 365 days / 14 = 26 days. So every 26 days, there’s a correction event lasting a day.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
▪ 341 / 34 = 10. So there are 10 whole days between correction events.

The final consideration is event sequence. For this, you need to actually list them without compression in 8xA and the like. Distribute them as evenly as possible. Then take a die of the next smaller size than the number of events and roll; count along the list to find the first event. List it in sequence, cross it out, and roll again, counting ‘1’ as the next listed entry. If you get to the end of the list, go back to the start and keep counting. When the number of events gets low enough, choose a smaller dice.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
▪ A, A, B, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, 14 events in total, so use a d12.
▪ Distributed: A, B, C, D, K, G, H, A, B, E, F, I, J, L.
▪ Roll #1 is a 9. The 9th item in the list – A, B, C, D, K, G, H, A, B – is B. List it and cross it off the Distributed list (WordPress doesn’t make that very easy so I’ll put them in brackets instead).
▪ Roll #2 is an 11. E, F, I, J, L. gets me to 5. so A is 6, then B, C, D, K, G. The second event is G.
▪ Roll #3 is an 8. H, A, (B), E, F, I, J, L is 7, so A is 8. The third event is A.
I started with 14 events, now I’m down to 11, so a d12 is now too cumbersome and gets reduced to a d10.
▪ Roll #4 is another 8. B, C, D, K, (G), H, A, (B), E, F – the fourth event is F.
▪ Roll #5 is a 6. I, J, L gets me to three, so B is 4, C, 5, and D is 6. The fifth event is D.

▪ And so on – ultimately, my sequence list is B, G, A, F, D, K, B, L, J, H, C, E, A, I.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
▪ 8xA, 8xB, C, C. CC, CCC, D, D, DD, DDD, E, E, EE, EEE, FFF, FFFF, GGG, GGGG, HHH, HHHH , 34 events in total.
▪ Distributed: A, FFF, B, E, C, A, B, DDD, A, GGG, B, C, A, HHHH, B, EEE, A, B, D, CC, A, FFFF, B, E, DD, A, GGGG, B, CCC, A, HHH, B, D, EEE.
▪ 34 events, so start with a d20: Roll#1 is a 3, so B.
▪ Roll #2 is 19, so FFFF.
▪ Roll #3 is 5, so GGGG.
▪ Roll #4 is 11, so C.
▪ Roll #5 is 19, so DD.
▪ Roll #6 is 8, so EEE.
▪ Roll #7 is 17, so D.
▪ Roll #8 is 15, so A.
▪ Roll #9 is 11, so A again.
▪ Roll #10 is 17, so DDD.
▪ Roll #11 is 7, so B.
▪ Roll #12 is 7 again, so A.
… and so on.

5.3.4.2.1.2 Random Distribution

Random distribution is not that much more difficult. Instead of a fixed number of days between events, double the number and choose the next smaller die size.

If there is a large size dice indicated, halve the number to get a more practical alternative and roll two of them.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
▪ 26 days calculated between events. 26×2 = 52. I could rig up a d52 simulator using a deck of playing cards. Or I could use a function that I rarely need at AnyDice and get it to roll a string of d52s for me. But none of those are convenient enough.
▪ So halve it again. Now I’m back to a 26. I could use d20. But I actually have in my unusual dice collection a d24. So 2d24 will work just fine.
▪ In fact, my first 10 rolls are 18, 30, 10 ,36, 15, 15, 39, 20, 27, 36. Continue until you run out of events to schedule.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
▪ 10 days calculated between events, double it to 20, and it’s tailor made for a d20.

The goal is to have a random roll that averages the gap between correction events that you calculated previously. It doesn’t hurt for it to be a dumbbell curve, either; in fact that’s probably preferable to a flat roll.

5.3.4.2.1.3 Weighted Random Distribution

In this model, half the events are to take place in the season most appropriate for them to do so, at half the base interval. One quarter of the events are to take place in the season most unusual for them to do so, at 3/4 the base interval. The rest occupy the rest of the total time-frame.

1. Calculate 1/2 the total events, round down. Multiply by 1/2 the base interval (rounded down).
2. Calculate 1/4 of the total events, round down. Multiply by 3/4 of the base interval (rounded up)
3 Subtract these two subtotals from the total correction time.
4. Subtract the two event count subtotals from the total number of events.
5. Calculate the rest-of-the-year average by dividing the remaining correct time by the remaining number of events. Round down.
6. Split these non-adjacent season events in two as evenly as possible.

EXAMPLE 1 CONTINUED:
14 events. Base interval 26 days. Total time allowed = 365 days.
1. 1/2×14 = 7. No rounding needed. So 7 events 13 days apart = 91 days.
2. 1/4×14 = 3.5, round down to 3. Calculate 3/4 x 26 days = 19.5 days, round up to to 20. So 3 events 20 days apart = 60 days.
3. 365 – 81 – 60 = 224 days.
4. 14 events – 7 – 3 = 4 events.
5. 224 days / 4 events = 56 days. So 4 events 56 days apart.
6. Over two non-adjacent seasons = 2 events per non-adjacent season.

EXAMPLE 2 CONTINUED:
34 events. Base Interval 10 days. Total time allowed = 341 days.
1. 1/2×34 = 17, no rounding needed. So 17 events 5 days apart = 85 days.
2. 1/4×34 = 8.5, round down to 8. 3/4 x 10 = 7.5, round up to 8. So 8 events 8 days apart = 64 days.
3. 341 – 85 – 64 = 192 days.
4. 34 – 17 – 8 = 9 events.
5. 192 days / 9 events = 21.33 days, rounds down to 21. So 9 events 21 days apart.
6. Over 2 non-adjacent seasons, one will have 4 events and one will have 5. Choose randomly.

5.3.4.2.2 Distributed corrections: 6 months

Having established the basic methods, I don’t need to repeat them. Instead of full seasons, though, we’re now talking about 1/2 seasons.

5.3.4.2.3 Distributed corrections: 3 months

It’s a similar story here, but three months is a season. So weighted adjustments are no longer necessary or possible, unless you want to break the 12-week season into sub-seasons of 3 weeks each.

5.3.4.2.4 Slow Corrections (2 months)

Two months is less than a season. Note that the shorter the time interval in which to make the corrections, the more frequent the corrections have to be and the more extreme they might need to be.

5.3.4.2.5 Normal corrections: 1 month

Sydney recently experienced a series of rain events lasting about 3 1/2 weeks. While there were one or two days without rain, and perhaps half-a-dozen in which part of a day had good weather, most of the time, it was dark and gray all day and raining for at least part of the day. This produced short-term flooding in some vulnerable areas and more serious flooding in one region.

Four weeks is unusually long for an intense heat-wave, but there have definitely been times when I have experienced a long “warm wave”. It’s also long for a “Cold Snap” but an appropriate duration for a period of “chilly weather”.

5.3.4.2.6 Fast corrections: 1/2 month (2 weeks)

Regionally catastrophic and generally uncomfortable one way or another. I have experienced deluges, heat-waves and chilly periods of this length before. By the time you get to this rapidity of correction, it’s not so much about intervals between days, it’s about how much on any given day.

If you have to, assign each day an adjustment and then use the interval / random systems (your choice) to either top up or mitigate the adjustment accordingly.

5.3.4.2.7 Catastrophic corrections 1/4 month (1 week)

This doesn’t happen very often. Maybe one year in ten or eleven, something like this will happen. Remember that “errors”” needing correction have built up over a 6-30 month time frame – so having all of that readjustment to average take place in just 1/4 of a month can’t be considered anything less than catastrophic. Weather events of 24-120 times the usual intensity. Monsoonal downpours (171mm is the record for my neck of the woods) – in One Day. That’s 6.7 inches. But, in actual fact, that happened in one HOUR.

I’ve experienced a week of 50°C+ (122°F) peak temperatures – measured, as always, in the shade. From memory, the unofficial “in the sun” number was more like 67°C (152°F). It didn’t cool off much at night, either. That year, it reached the point where we couldn’t concentrate enough to game – all you could do was sit and pant and melt (metaphorically). Roads were melting. Metal in street signs became fatigued. People died.

I’ve experienced a week or so of darn-near subzero temperatures, again unusual for this part of the world. Five layers and a heater and still cold (but part of that was too many layers, causing sweating, which made me even colder. I know better, now).

5.3.4.3 Maintaining Synchronization

Something else to watch for, with all these levels and layers of adjustment is when seasons actually turn. For many years now, it has seemed like the seasons have changed in Sydney a week or two sooner than expected.

Certain landmark dates spring to mind. The second weekend in October is one. That’s the weekend of the Bathurst 1000 motor race, probably the premium such event in the southern hemisphere and certainly the biggest in Australia. The weather has generally just started to turn warm, though the nights are still a bit chilly.

One such weekend, about twenty years ago, it was so hot that the local (to where I was living then) Mr Whippy van ran out of ice-cream and had to phone his wife to get more out of the storeroom and drive it to him. it was 40-something degrees (C) in the shade, and I was acutely uncomfortable because at the time I didn’t own a fan.

For the last decade or so, that race has taken place against a backdrop of what felt like the lingering depths of winter. In a phrase, it’s been “bloody cold”. So the onset of winter seems early, the onset of summer seems late, and the summer itself seems a lot milder overall, with fewer really hot days.

These are all within the scope of random variation. But they are also patterns.

People perceive patterns very readily – even patterns that are just coincidence or otherwise aren’t really there. The problem is that randomly-generated weather sometimes doesn’t exhibit those patterns, or doesn’t do so consistently.

You could ague that the long-cycle variations and extended corrections are the system’s attempts to create those patterns, ready for the players and PCs to recognize, and you would not be altogether incorrect. The problem is that those long-term cycles have been through multiple cycle periods and these patterns have persisted even in the face of them changing. So this is something even deeper and more long-term in its stability.

It’s not something that these mechanics, as presented so far, take into account. Instead, the system lays the onus of creating and accommodating these patterns on the GM. For some people, that’s not good enough. So for them, I recommend yet another layer of adjustments (and these do need to feed into the system for later average corrections). Pick two or three milestone weather events and schedule them through your campaign calendar year.

Suggested examples include:
★ The first long soaking rain of spring;
★ The first big thunderstorm of summer;
★ The first really hot day of summer;
★ The first night of frost on the ground;
★ The first snowfall of the year.
★ The commencement of the harvest.

Make whatever adjustment is necessary on that date each year to achieve that milestone. And half of it for the 2 days that follow, and 1/3 of it for the three days after that, and 1/4 of it for the four days after that.

And leave those adjustments there, for year after year. This effectively overrides the system’s randomness to synchronize the seasons with the calendar.

5.3.4.4 Multiple Correction Layers

I can’t recommend letting a spreadsheet do all the math for you, highly enough. You will have to input base values and the various layers of adjustment, but let it put everything together.

But, unless the PCs are mostly staying in one place for a really long period of time, they will never notice. Therefore, I would only worry about the multiple correction layers and detailed adjustments for the current Base Of Operations and maybe the nearest big city (if the two are not the same).

Maybe for the capital of the Kingdom.

Whenever the PCs venture away from this fixed point in the geography of the campaign, use the simplest possible system – the chance of good weather / chance of bad weather.

If it looks like it might be important, use the more detailed system to generate the weather experienced historically wherever the PCs are now. But the rest of the time, forget it. They will.

5.4 Losses & Hazards

In keeping with that principle, have a PC-owned or operated business experience losses and climatic hazards as seems appropriate. There will be some such almost every year. Use the detailed system as a guide to what could happen and invent the numbers out of whole cloth as you need them. Use the detailed system to justify whatever you come up with.

“As you know, when Skyrym is full in August, flooding of the plains is never far away.”

Is it reality? Is it superstition? is there a causal connection? You don’t care – the weather is what it is, never mind what caused it to be that way. So invent numbers that can be justified and that seem reasonable and that enhance the plot and make the background seem more real, and forget the simulationist reality as much as you can.

5.5 Expenses – as Terrain Factors

Okay, this is now edging it’s way back to where the subject of discussion left off last time. It’s also a part of the subject that has been touched on previously, but it’s time to integrate it into the overall conversation about land travel.

If you have a choice of two routes, both of the same length and difficulty, the better one to choose is the one that has the lower expenses, yes? Obvious.

It’s when things stop being equal that they get more complicated. Route X is shorter but steeper than Route Y, and that increases the overheads from using that route – but Route Y has a fee or charge that has to be paid. Now which one is better?

One way to decide is to arbitrarily set a terrain factor to represent the overheads and expenses that will be incurred.

Every route will have some cost attached to it. Some of those costs will happen every trip, some may be amortized over many trips, averaged out.

There’s also a relative factor to take into account – when you don’t have much money, every expense looms three times as large. When you have the luxury of being able to afford a faster but more expensive route, you can often get longer to sell your wares or a better marketplace in which to do so – higher demand and people willing to pay more. Handle such matters correctly, and make additional profits; handle them poorly and remain relegated to struggle-street.

There is a lot to be said for the notion of making the tale of the business’ success a narrative thread in it’s own right. Two steps forward, one step back, two steps forward, a challenge that has to be overcome… weave that into your background and you can get most of the benefits of a hands-on business operation run by the players through their PCs without actually bogging down with the minutia. The principle of ‘expenses as a terrain factor’ offers a method of creating the narrative that surrounds these events, justifying and explaining them. “Until now, we couldn’t afford X – but now we can.”

5.6 Expenses – as aspects of Politics

By far the bigger expenses, though, are not the relatively fixed and stable ones, they are the soft costs that derive from politics and the political winds that are blowing. Bribes and Taxes and Commissions and Levies and Surcharges – the whole nine yards.

Most rulers are rational; they won’t strangle the operations that are (or could) make their domains richer, because they will get to skim some of that cream off the top.

Rather than looking at this sort of expense as an aspect of a business operation, I recommend regarding it as a plot development that attaches significance and relevance to the campaign by means of the business operation. Use the profitability of the business as a delivery system to make the politics around them matter to the PCs.

Treat the overland business operation as a plot development delivery system.

Overland transport is uniquely positioned for this purpose, when you thin about it.

River travel leaves you no choice but to go where the river takes you. What are choices and options and variables for overland travel are relatively fixed and simplified on a river.

Maritime transport is mostly over the free-for-all seas and oceans. It’s only really when you put into port, or come across another vessel, that there’s any real chance for social or political engagement.

Overland travel means choices. And choices are both levers to be pulled and storytelling opportunities. Go out of your way to create them, manipulate them, and use them.

The more you bottleneck the choices open to the PCs, the less opportunity there is for engagement.

But, on the other hand, to a certain extent, you don’t want the players to be so actively engaged in the business operations. So there is a fine line to be trodden here. Always keep it in mind – but don’t waste the opportunities that land travel offers you; save them for when you need them.

Next week, while I gird my loins for the big posts to come in this chapter, I’ll take a time out with one of a pair of smallish posts that came to mind today. I think.

The difference between the level of detail that you want when a PC is actually present and what is needed when it’s all NPCs and should happen purely in the background is almost total. Earlier treatment of the subject within this series focused on paring back and simplifying to the level of detail required for the first; this time, I’ll be far more abstract and simple in my approach, as befits the latter.

Table Of Contents

At this point, I’m not sure of how far I will get in today’s post. I’m anticipating that this chapter will break into at least three parts, however.

In today’s post:

Chapter 5: Land Transport

5.1 Distance, Time, & Detriments

5.1.1 Time Vs Distance
5.1.2 Defining a terrain / region / locality

     5.1.2.1 Road Quality: An introductory mention

5.2 Terrain

5.2.0 Terrain Factor
5.2.1 % Distance
5.2.2 Good Roads
5.2.3 Bad Roads
5.2.4 Even Ground
5.2.5 Broken Ground
5.2.5 Marshlands
5.2.7 Swamplands
5.2.8 Woodlands
5.2.9 Forests
5.2.10 Rolling Hills
5.2.11 Mountain Slopes
5.2.12 Mountain Passes
5.2.13 Deserts
5.2.14 Exotic Terrain
5.2.15 Road Quality
     5.2.15.1 The four-tier system
     5.2.15.2 The five-tier system
     5.2.15.3 The eight-tier system
     5.2.15.4 The ten-tier system

5.2.16 Rivers & Other Waterways
     5.2.16.1 Fords
     5.2.16.2 Bridges
     5.2.16.3 Tolls
     5.2.16.4 Ferries
     5.2.16.5 Portage & Other Solutions

And in the weeks ahead:

5.3 Weather

5.3.1 Seasonal Trend
5.3.2 Broad Variations
5.3.3 Narrow Variations
     5.3.3.1 Every 2nd month?
     5.3.3.2 Transition Months
     5.3.3.3 Adding a little randomness: 1/2 length variations
     5.3.3.4 Adding a little randomness: 1 1./2-, 2-, and 2 1/2-length variations

5.3.4 Maintaining The Average
     5.3.4.1 Correction Timing
     5.3.4.1.1 Off-cycle corrections
     5.3.4.1.2 Oppositional corrections
     5.3.4.1.3 Adjacent corrections
     5.4.4.1.4 Hangover corrections

     5.3.4.2 Correction Duration
          5.3.4.2.1 Distributed corrections: 12 months
          5.3.4.2.2 Distributed corrections: 6 months
          5.3.4.2.3 Distributed corrections: 3 months
          5.3.4.2.4 Slow Corrections (2 months)
          5.3.4.2.5 Normal corrections: 1 month
          5.3.4.2.6 Fast corrections: 1/2 month (2 weeks)
          5.3.4.2.7 Catastrophic corrections 1/4 month (1 week)

     5.4.4.3 Maintaining Synchronization
     5.4.4.4 Multiple Correction Layers

5.4 Losses & Hazards
5.5 Expenses – as Terrain Factors
5.6 Expenses – as aspects of Politics
5.7 Inns, Castles, & Strongholds

5.7.1 Strongholds
5.7.2 Castles
5.7.3 Inns

5.8 Villages, Towns, & Cities

5.8.1 Villages
     5.8.1.1 Village Frequency
     5.8.1.2 Village Initial Size
     5.8.1.3 The Generic Village

5.8.2 Towns
     5.8.2.1 Towns Frequency
     5.8.2.2 Town Initial Size
     5.8.2.3 The Generic Town

5.8.3 Cities
     5.8.2.2 Small City Frequency
     5.8.2.3 Small City Size
     5.8.2.4 Size Of The Capital
     5.8.2.5 Large City Frequency
     5.8.2.6 Large City Size

5.8.4 Economic Factors, Simplified
     5.8.4.1 Trade Routes & Connections
     5.8.4.2 Local Industry
     5.8.4.3 Military Significance
     5.8.4.4 Scenery & History
     5.8.4.5 Other Economic Modifiers
     5.8.4.6 Upscaled Villages
     5.8.4.7 Upscaled Towns
     5.8.4.8 Upscaled Small Cities
     5.8.4.9 Upscaling The Capital & Large Cities

5.8.5 Overall Population
     5.8.5.1 Realm Size
     5.8.5.2 % Wilderness
     5.8.5.3 % Fertile
     5.8.5.4 % Good
     5.8.5.5 % Mediocre
     5.8.5.6 % Poor
     5.8.5.7 % Dire
     5.8.5.8 % Wasteland
     5.8.5.9 Net Agricultural Capacity

     5.8.5.10 Misadventures, Disasters, and Calamities
     5.8.5.11 Birth Rate per year
     5.8.5.12 Mortality
          5.8.5.12.1 Infant Mortality
          5.8.5.12.2 Child Mortality
          5.8.5.12.3 Teen Mortality
          5.8.5.12.4 Youth Mortality
          5.8.5.12.5 Adult Mortality
          5.8.5.12.6 Senior Mortality
          5.8.5.12.7 Elderly Mortality
          5.8.5.12.8 Venerable Mortality
          5.8.5.12.9 Net Mortality

     5.8.5.13 Net Population

5.8.6 Population Distribution
     5.8.6.1 The Roaming Population
     5.8.6.2 The Capital
     5.8.6.3 The Cities
     5.8.6.4 Number of Towns
     5.8.6.5 Number of Villages
     5.8.6.6 Hypothetical Population
     5.8.6.7 The Realm Factor
     5.8.6.8 True Village Size
     5.8.6.9 True Town Size
     5.8.6.10 Adjusted City Size
     5.8.6.11 Adjusted Capital Size

5.8.7 Population Centers On The Fly
     5.8.7.1 Total Population Centers
     5.8.7.2 The Distribution Table
     5.8.7.3 The Cities
     5.8.7.4 Village or Town?
     5.8.7.5 Size Bias
          5.8.7.5.1 Economic Bias
          5.8.7.5.2 Fertility Bias
          5.8.7.5.3 Military Personnel
          5.8.7.5.4 The Net Bias

     5.8.7.6 The Die Roll
     5.8.7.7 Applying Net Bias
     5.8.7.8 Applying The Realm Factor
     5.8.7.9 The True Size
          5.8.7.9.1 Justifying The Size
          5.8.7.9.2 The Implications

5.9 Compiled Trade Routes

5.9.1 National Legs
5.9.2 Sub-Legs
5.9.3 Compounding Terrain Factors
5.9.4 Compounding Weather Factors
5.9.5 Compounding Expenses
5.9.6 Compounding Losses
5.9.7 Compounding Profits
5.9.8 Other Expenses
5.9.9 Net Profit

5.10 Time
5.11 Exotic Transport

And, In future chapters:

6. Waterborne Transport
7. Spoilage
8. Key Personnel
9. The Journey
10. Arrival
11. Journey’s End
12. Adventures En Route

Chapter 5: Land Transport

As usual (because it’s best practice in my view), I am going to start with an overview of this chapter’s content as plans currently stand.

It’s not worth putting into a formal sidebar with section number, but I thought it worth mentioning the process used in generating what follows. I started with a broad chapter title, and listed as many subheadings as I could think of, while considering what the subject needed to provide the reader / user.

From that, an overview of the game processes to be contained began to emerge; as it did so, subheadings within the major sections were defined. These served to further define the process, creating even more subheadings, and so I cycled back and forth between further defining and enhancing the mental overview and listing explicit subjects and topics in the table of contents that was emerging. This cycle continued until every factor that I could think of was incorporated into the process.

In an ideal world, and if the table of contents is done properly, it should be possible to then abandon, ignore, and forget the conceptual framework and re-create it from scratch from the section and sub-section titles alone (plus the occasional explanatory note along the way). Doing so has the huge benefit of a second chance to discover things that have been overlooked or left out, producing another set of refinements to the TOC.

Next, narrative flow needs to be considered. I try to follow an internally-logical path from one topic to another in these chapters because that makes the content easier for the reader to assimilate and understand, and if there’s something in the systems and sub-systems provided that a reader doesn’t like for whatever reason or wants to tweak / change, the surrounding content places those changes into context. So I spent quite a bit of time moving content around until the narrative flow seems most useful.

Then the overall process needs to be rebuilt from the section titles all over again, because those have changed. This involves summarizing the narrative flow – which is what follows this panel – and then revising the TOC to make sure that everything is covered.

It’s a lot of work, and practicality sometimes means that place-markers are left for later definition and development – the entire weather system and discussion of navigation in the previous chapter started as such placeholders. You can actually track the evolution of the content by comparing the TOC within a chapter as it changes from one post to another.

In this particular chapter, there’s only one such placeholder, as noted above and currently labeled as section 5.11, “Exotic Transport”. I have only vague memories and a single explanatory note as to what was going to be included under that heading, and I’ve said most of what needs to be written on the subject already, I think. So that section might end up being nothing but a reference back to that earlier posted content, or it might turn into a vast and sprawling tranch of content within this chapter. I won’t know for sure until I get there.

I think of the TOC as a road-map to what I have to write about. Actually doing that writing, and breaking sections down into smaller bodies of text if they grow too large, requires amending the TOC as I go to keep it a true reflection of the content.

That means that the TOC you see above has been amended after writing the chapter introduction below, tweaking the work order of the chapter as a whole.

Let’s make this as simple as possible. Overland travel needs to take into account terrain, weather, losses, expenses, and profitability per average load.

• Terrain – one of the biggest and most complicated of details. Longer trips will usually have to cross several different terrains. About 1/3 of this chapter will focus on terrain, it’s that important.
  • Road quality is a constituent factor under the general heading of terrain. It’s what distinguishes one example of a particular terrain type from another, well one of the main things.
• Weather – Weather is another complicated subject but when you boil it down to its essence it amounts to a seasonal trend and a random variation over that trend for individual trips, and just the seasonal trend when looking at several trips in aggregate, perhaps with a smaller degree of variation. Having assembled a fairly comprehensive weather sub-system for the sea transport chapter, again from the perspective of a PC being present to have to deal with the daily, even hourly, fluctuations, the goal this time around is to get as broad, simple, and general as possible. What might not be as immediately obvious is that – ultimately – this can be treated as just another component of terrain.
• Losses – Hazards to be overcome are important features of a specific area of terrain. A the ultimate in abstraction, we don’t care what the hazards actually are, so we can divorce them from the terrain factors, and simply deal with the % of cargoes that are going to be lost over a year’s worth of trips – most of the time. Weather fluctuations can increase or decrease the losses percentage a little, so if that’s to be treated as an aspect of terrain, the divorce can’t be complete.
• Expenses – Wear and tear on equipment, wear and tear and replacement of NPCs – these are so heavily associated with terrain that they might as well be considered accounted for as another sub-item within that general heading. That leaves human expenses – and those tend to revolve around a new subject, politics. But if we distinguish terrain of a given type within Political Realm A from terrain of the same type within Political Realm B, we can also add political landscapes into the terrain calculation. However, because of the world-building that can derive from it, I am resistant to doing so; it should be an average cost per trip over a year, and measured in currency.
• Profitability – The ultimate bottom line, this is the average per load that is left over after cargoes have been sold and money set aside for the next trip’s expenses. It doesn’t generally take into account other overheads at the point of sale – warehouse rental, sales outlets and staff, and so on, but I’m not going to let that stop me. Seasonal variations in availability (and the demand for transport that results) and weather trends over a season can be complicating factors, so I want a mechanism to take specific weather rolls from earlier items in the list and factor them in along with seasonal trends including growing patterns to get a monthly or quarterly series of profit numbers that the GM simply has to add up, deducting those expenses mentioned earlier, to get a single number over whatever time-span is appropriate – usually a year. This also needs to incorporate a factor for business growth or contraction.

Terrain isn’t the only factor, but population distribution and communities tend to follow trade and other factors as well as influencing those factors by their presence. So some systematic approach to the relevant aspects of world-building needs to be provided, and that’s a huge second tranch of subject matter for this chapter. Ideally, this should support a high level of sandboxing, such that a particular community can be generated on the fly when a PC approaches it and ignored until it becomes significant in that way. So I’m dedicating a subsection of the Population section of the chapter to the subject, and deliberately keeping it in mind when constructing that simple world-building approach.

There are so many other factors and elements that impact the size of population centers that properly dealing with that subject also means at least taking those factors into account along the way – so, more world-building.

A single trading trip through multiple different terrains and terrain variations as described above can be compounded into a trade route, but ultimately, that’s more detail than a truly generalized system needs – it simply means choosing the route that yields the most profitable outcome by minimizing the negative impacts of the factors already listed. These again come back to the terrain specifications – but some practical example of doing so also needs to be demonstrated.

5.1 Distance, Time, & Detriments

Any commercial operation in a game environment comes down to either performing a service for someone or moving something from one place to another for profit. This entire series / supplement focuses on the latter, because there’s not much nuance to the first.

So, moving something from one place to another – that in turn comes down to how far it has to go, how long that’s going to take, how much it’s going to cost, how much you’ll make at the end of the trip, and what difficulties will have to be overcome between the start and the finish.

But if you then take PCs out of the equation, things get even simpler, because you don’t need to attach specific details to specific trips; so long as the system employed maintains plausibility, you can aggregate much of the experience and average it over multiple individual trips, ignoring specifics (almost) completely.

It’s a completely different mindset to have to get your head around, so the game mechanics need to do as much of the work for you, as simply and cleanly as possible. Explaining those game mechanics and how the complexities get fed into them and stripped away to stark simplicity creates the credibility that enables the GM to show plausibility within the system and creates the confidence to simply accept the numbers that spit out as an end result as being ‘fair’ and ‘justified’.

It has to be understood that you can always interpret the system as containing specific incidents if they are desired or needed. The narrative with which the trading operation and its current status can be as richly detailed as you want or need it to be – the important thing is not to provide any unnecessary or unwanted detail along the way.

So, the simplest description of the process of moving something from one place to another completely ignores what that something is, how big it is, how heavy, and so on. It’s a generic and generalized commodity as soon as it gets put on the wagon or whatever mode of transport is to be used. All you need to know is distance, time, and speed – and, in fact, you only need to know two of those, because that’s enough to give you the third.

Everything else falls under the general heading of detriments – things that slow the speed, or increase the time or distance. You start with a best-case scenario – perfect roads through flat, solid, stable terrain; passing seamlessly from one checkpoint or settlement to another until that trip is complete.

Time Vs Distance

How can this be simplified further? Well, if the variable of speed is taken out of the equation by equating any losses to additional ‘time taken’, you can simply set an idealized speed for the particular mode of transport and describe everything else that happens in the same way.

Or you could do it in terms of additional distance. Which, then, of these two approaches is the better choice for simplicity?

The human experience is generally to think about most such things in terms of extra time. If I have to go to another suburb for shopping or medical treatment or whatever, I don’t care about how far away it is, I care about how long it’s going to take, and what time I have to leave in order to reach the designated place at the designated time. But that’s a very modern perspective, framed around the reliability and accessibility of transport; back in more olden times, distance was the critical factor because you had to walk that distance.

I’ve told the story before, of how – when I was very much younger – I couldn’t afford busses and trains both to and from gaming, not if I wanted to eat at all during the day. So I would travel to gaming using public transport, and eat, and then walk home, a distance of around 11 kilometers (7 miles). On a good night, with a light load, it would take three or four hours – but I rarely had a light load, and sometimes didn’t have a good night, and – especially when first setting out to do this trip – it could easily take a couple of extra hours. Over time, I found a few nuances and shortcuts which saved maybe 1/4 of a mile – which doesn’t sound like a lot, but with a heavy backpack, and on a rainy night, every step was zealously guarded.

I think the fastest I ever managed was 2 1/4 hours for the trip – giving me an idealized speed over the shorter distance of 4.7 km/h (exactly 3 mph). With 100-120# of books in my backpack – I used one of those large school-cases, full to the brim, and carried it in a backpack, with the top protruding above my head, and wearing some comfortable running shoes.

I have thought a lot about this choice, and ultimately decided that distance is the more easily-handled measure. Time means the complication of multiple units – weeks, days, hours, minutes, seconds – while distance can be reduced to a single unit, either kilometers or miles.

There are 1000 meters in a kilometer, 5278 feet in a mile – but the latter becomes 1055.6 ‘five-feet lengths’, so describing everything as being a ratio of 1000:1 involves an error of about +5.56%. That’s not ideal, but if there are five factors compounding to give an adjusted distance and those factors average just 1.09% high, it completely wipes out that error. In fact, if there’s a rounding error of 2.5% on average, IE measurements to the nearest 5%, that adds up to a maximum possible error of a whopping 27.5%, completely annihilating the significance of that error.

I intend to keep the rounding errors to 0.5%, i.e. numbers in whole percentage points. That gives a maximum possible error over 5 factors of 2.525%, over 10 of 5.11%, over 20 of 10.5%, and over 25 of 13.3%.

But the numbers will be a lot more reliable than that; sometimes, the rounding error will be one way, and sometimes the other. If half (round down) of the factors are low and the rest high, the accuracy of results becomes: 5 factors (2 low, 3 high) = -0.78%; ten factors (5, 5) = -0.0125%; twenty factors (10, 10) = -0.025%; and over 25 factors (12, 13) = +0.47%.

So there are three rules of thumb that GMs need to apply:

▪ Long distances are 1000 units of the usual shorter distance;

▪ Factors should be measured to the nearest % and rounded off;

▪ Unless you’re using imperial measurements (miles) in which case, the first 5-10 should always be rounded down.

That should compensate completely for the error inherent in the first rule.

5.1.2 Defining a terrain / region / locality

Let’s imagine, for a moment, a perfectly rectangular Realm or region. Reality will be more complicated but let’s start there.

The shortest distance from one side to the other will be parallel to the shortest side – it doesn’t matter what the units are, just call it length a.

The longest distance will be corner to corner, a distance defined as c^2 = a^2 + b^2.

The average will be in the middle of those two values: 2c^2 = 2a^2 + b^2.

The number of values for which c > b makes for an interesting question.

2c^2 > 2b^2
2b^2 < 2a^2 + b^2 b^2 < 2a^2 b < 1.414 a. In other words, the more square the shape is, the greater the difference going corner to corner relative to the long side. Once you hit a long side 1.414 times the length of the short side, the average length will be somewhere less than the long side's distance. That makes for a convenient ready-reckoner. If you have an odd shaped region to cross, put it in a (mental) box. If the long side is less than 1.414 times the length of the short side, the average length across your shape will be closer to the length of the long side; if it's less, the average will be closer to 1.5 times the short side. It's not the sort of rule of thumb that I personally would use if I had any other choice, but it's worth having in your back pocket, just in case.

When you define a region on a map, there are two things that are critically important: terrain boundaries and political boundaries. It’s fairly rare for the two to overlap; something like what’s below would be far more common:



There are a couple of regions down on the southern coast where a political boundary exists for reasons of physical geography (lack of land) and that this coincides with a terrain boundary (lack of land), but for the rest of it – no. Terrain boundaries cross political boundaries with gay abandon and vice versa.

Viewed as separate maps, you can more or less make sense of what’s going on.

Putting the two together, even having deliberately planned symbology to make that possible, is just confusing.

The dominant aspect of any region, so far as the GM is concerned, is always going to be political. A number of those boundaries are going to follow natural terrain features, and politics is always going to dictate differing policies and practices when it comes to the treatment of even identical terrain, so that’s the most convenient umbrella under which to organize information.

In the forests of Kingdom A, hunting is permitted; in the same forest in Kingdom B, it is not; and Kingdom C, which has a small piece of the same forest permits hunting of some animals and not others, after purchase of an appropriate license, which – as a practical measure – is restricted to certain group in favor with the government of C – just as one example.

So, for each Realm or kingdom, you need some idea of the roads, and some idea of the terrain that it passes through. Don’t worry too much about population levels and communities just yet; focus on the Realm as a conceptual entity. What makes it culturally and socially distinct from its neighbors?

But we’re actually not interested in that; it’s the roads and the terrain that they cross that we’re interested in.

Unless your map is huge, you aren’t going to show all the roads, anyway – but, skirting any political trouble-spots, the roads that do get shown are going to be the best, anyway, and that generally means the most useful – if they are going where you want to go.

Beneath the terrain map, you need to list each of the major terrains that are found within the kingdom in question.

For now, that’s all that we need to do – have somewhere to record specifics.

5.1.2.1 Road Quality: An introductory mention

I’m going to discuss this in greater detail later on, but the mention of ‘the best roads’ being the ones present on any high-level map has brought the subject up, so I thought a brief mention of it was worth going into, since it very strongly relates to what follows (and what has been discussed already).

We’ve done more work on the subject of roads and road quality for the Pulp Campaign that I co-GM than I’ve ever done for one of my campaigns before, and it’s changed the way that I look at the subject fairly fundamentally.

Roads are categorized in terms of their quality and given a percentage rating. This percentage gets used in all sorts of ways – likelihood of the road causing a breakdown (most frequently, a flat tire) for example – that I’m not going to go into in this discussion. But one of the key purposes is “safe top speed” for different classes of vehicle. A poor quality road might only permit 30 or 40% of top speed with normal levels of safety and twice that, maximum. The details and specifics don’t matter here, I’ll go into those later.

In effect, road quality alters safe speed, which alters travel time, which is the equivalent of imposing a greater distance at normal running speeds. if a road permits only 40% of normal top (safe) speed, then in effect, all distances along that road are 100/40=2.5 times as long.

But here’s the thing: Terrain is a factor that’s only semi-divorced from road quality. A great road through a swamp might not mean the same thing as a great road through flat farmland, which might not mean the same thing as a great road through rolling hills which is not the same thing as a great road through mountains which… well, you get the idea. But, at the same time, good roads mitigate the effects of terrain, while bad roads amplify any negatives. So it’s a little complicated.

Our usual practice is to take whatever the rating is and average it with 100; then multiply by a terrain factor to get a score that is no longer relative to the terrain type but which can be applied as an absolute value.

The reason for the averaging with 100 is that we think that there would be a lot of overlap between the two values – terrain would impact road quality, in other words, and not to do so would be to count those commonalities twice.

In this case, I’m going to take simplification a step further and include that ‘averaging with 100’ in the actual determination of what the rating should be. And I’m going to generalize and apply the one value to all kinds of traffic, not vehicles by any sort of class or weight system.

Another determinant that we use is distance from a major city, population 100K or more. This is a campaign set in the 1930s, in a world in which (for various reasons) the Great Depression was not as bad as the version of that event that our history experienced. This means that some of the social and political changes that resulted were not as strong, or didn’t happen at all, and not everything that was put in place by FDR to deal with the recession was as well-funded, as far-reaching, or as popular.

One of the big employment programs used by FDR to stimulate the economy was building up the American highway network. We figure that where there’s enough traffic to justify it, those works would still have gone ahead; it’s the in-between bits that would not receive as much love from officialdom.

50 miles away from a major population center, the roads noticeably worsen. 75 miles away, and they seriously deteriorate. 100 miles away, and they stop being paved, even if they are a major highway in modern times. 125 miles away, and we’re talking about the quality of the goat-track.

While some of this principle will still be a factor, it won’t be quite as cut and dried in a fantasy environment. Standards will be different and priorities will reflect that. Some roads will even receive more care and attention than they would in the 1930s Pulp World. A ‘good’ road will mean something completely different in this new context.

The final thing to mention before I move on is weather. Whatever a road condition is, any weather other than dry and at least partially sunny automatically makes it worse. As a simple rule of thumb, rather than getting too technical, we ruled that road condition drops one step when it’s wet or foggy, and a second step in snow or heavy rain. This poses a problem for ‘poor’ roads, or whatever the bottom rating is – they can’t go any lower and still be there. So, again, the rule of thumb is that one step below the minimum halves whatever it’s normal rating value is (if positive) or doubles the loss (if negative), two steps and it effectively isn’t there any more. I intend for that particular ruling to carry over into the version of the road-quality sub-system presented in this chapter.

5.2 Terrain

Terrain, for these purposes, is defined as a geographic or geological condition affecting a region or area generally. With geographic changes come ecological and environmental changes, so those get taken into consideration as well.

5.2.0 Terrain Factor

In terms of game mechanics, different terrains are accorded a Terrain Factor. These assume an average standard road quality, neither good nor bad, and define three values: low impact, typical impact, and high impact.

Low and high impact are presented as a ‘normal range’ of effect for the terrain type. When the GM notes a particular terrain as occurring in a particular location in his game world, he gets to pick any value within that range that he feels appropriate. Some swamps are wetter and marshier than others, in other words.

Typical values are as much informative as they are a fall-back option; they will often not be in the exact middle of a defined low-to-high range. If most examples will tend to be closer in impact to the low effect, the typical value will be closer to that lower value – which means that a specific example has to be a whole lot better than usual to get into the higher values, and vice-versa (that’s why the term ‘typical’ was chosen instead of ‘average’ or ‘normal’).

There are also a couple of anomalies presented within the system. Good and Bad roads have a general modifier in addition to the overall road quality system, so they get entries in the discussions below.

5.2.1 % Distance

I prefer to work in legs of around 100 km / 100 miles, because that makes everything easier. After a rough breakdown, I’ll look at how much left over there is going to be, and whether or not there is a continuous terrain segment crossed by the path of about that length. If so, I’ll put the leftovers in the middle.

But I hardly ever get to do so. Length divisions of 20 km / 20 miles are far more common, as shown below. These still make it relatively easy to estimate the % distance that any given terrain holds sway, and that’s the important thing right now.



Welcome to the Kingdom of Zomania, which I hope to use for several (if not all) examples in this chapter. It’s a Kingdom with a slice of mainland, a large island, a reef and some volcanic islands, and a variety of terrains.

Ignoring those islands and focusing on the mainland, a rectangle roughly 190 by 95 whatevers in size (miles or kilometers, choose for yourself). That’s 2-to-1, way more than the 1.414 critical value, so the corner to corner in a straight line is going to be 212.4 and the estimated average straight-line across is going to be about 116.

Roads rarely run in straight lines point-to-point, and the roads I’ve drawn are no exception – note the huge diversion around that epic bay, which would be perfect for fishing. In fact, when I measured it out (as you can see on the map), I got a little under 240 miles – which is going the long way, corner to corner, and off to both sides of that line.

Let’s break it down:

▪ 0-20 forested mountains, tall peaks
▪ 20-25 same with only medium peaks
▪ 25-35 dense forest, rolling hills
▪ 35-47 light forest, rolling hills
▪ 48-54 lightly wooded low hills
▪ 60-80 marsh
▪ 80-140 farmland, presume at least one big city
▪ 140-160 medium-density woods
▪ 160-215 farmland, rolling hills
▪ 215-220 medium-density forest, hills
▪ 220-238 dense forest, low mountains

That’s ten different terrains. But, if you wanted a more general estimate, let’s look at 0-80, 80-160, and 160-238:

▪ 0-80 = 60% forested, same 60% hills/mountains, 25% marsh, 15% farms
▪ 80-160 = 25% woodland, 75% farms, presume at least one big city
▪ 160-238 = 25% forested, 25% low mountains, 75% hills & farmland

which could be simplified to

▪ 0-80 = forested hills/mountains or marsh, some farmland
▪ 80-160 = farms with some woodland
▪ 160-238 = hilly farmland, some forest/mountains

The keyword “some” indicates a direction for adjusting an average – farmland is easy going (generally), so less impact from the ‘forested hills/mountains or marsh’, and greater (negative) impact on the farmland on 80-238.

The more precise you are – the ten-terrain breakdown – the more precise your results but the more work you have to do. If you anticipate the PCs ever traveling along this road, the full 10-terrain version is probably more useful in the long run, but if not, go with the simplified 3-terrain model and it will be good enough.

5.2.2 Good Roads

▪ Good roads reduce negative impacts from terrain by / 2.

Since the baseline is average roads through ideal flat, firm, terrain, every impact of terrain is a negative.

5.2.3 Bad Roads

▪ Bad roads increase negative impacts from terrain by 25%.

Again, because the baseline is average roads through perfect terrain, every terrain impact is a negative.

5.2.4 Even Ground

▪ Range: +0 – +25%
▪ Typical: +5%

This is the baseline.

5.2.5 Broken Ground

▪ Range: +5% – +25%
▪ Typical +15%.

When the ground gets rocky, you slow down and have to occasionally maneuver.

5.2.5 Marshlands

▪ Range: +25% – +100%
▪ Typical: +50%.

When the ground gets sticky, you get slowed down a lot. Road builders will prefer to go around such features, but sometimes that’s not a feasible option.

5.2.7 Swamplands

▪ Range: +50% – +200%
▪ Typical: +150%

When the ground goes underwater on a regular basis, you slow to a crawl, and it’s more likely to be worse than better. Road builders are prepared to go more than twice as far if they can avoid this terrain, and it will still be faster most of the time.

5.2.8 Woodlands

▪ Range: +5% – +20%
▪ Typical: +10%

Diversions around the occasional stand of trees are no big deal, but they can add up.

5.2.9 Forests

▪ Range: +10% – +100%
▪ Typical: +25%

Denser woodlands tend to be seriously detrimental to progress unless there has been a road cut through the middle of the trees. Because this weakens a naturally defensive terrain, some Kingdoms may choose not to do so, but for most, the effort is worthwhile for major roads; smaller roads will wend and wind this way and that, and be far less cleared.

5.2.10 Rolling Hills

▪ Overall downhill: Range: +6% – +20%
▪ Overall downhill: Typical: +8%
▪ Overall uphill: Range: +9% – +22%
▪ Overall uphill: Typical:+15%
▪ Overall balanced: Range: +5% – +18%
▪ Overall balanced: Typical: +10%

Going uphill takes a lot longer than going downhill, but it’s rare that you can make up all the lost time. More often, you need to deliberately slow downhill progress to maintain control. So both legs are bad, but one is worse than the other.

Note that good road quality has only half the usual impact – most of the factor for this terrain results from elevation change, and there’s only so much that is usually done about that until the advent of heavy machinery and explosives.

HOWEVER, if your fantasy realm permits the use of magic to achieve the same results, apply the full effect good roads.

5.2.11 Mountain Slopes

▪ Overall descending: Range: +125% – +350%
▪ Overall descending: Typical: +225%
▪ Overall climbing: Range: +175% – +450%
▪ Overall climbing: Typical:+350%
▪ Overall balanced: Range: +150% – +400%
▪ Overall balanced: Typical: +250%

There’s little that’s more inconvenient than having to go up the sides of a mountain, but if there’s no pass then a way has to be found – usually one involving a lot of strep slopes and switchbacks. Both have a seriously detrimental effect on progress in the actual direction you want to travel. As noted on Rolling Hills, above, even going in a generally downhill direction is not all that good – there will be times when you have to use a block and tackle and part of your animal team to slow-walk down, just as there will be times when you might need to do so to climb (especially if you have a heavy load).

There’s even less that good roads can do to help you in this situation, while bad roads make things worse all round.

▪ Good Roads: x 1/4 normal benefit
▪ Bad Roads: x 1.25 normal penalty

For the record, a bad road in this case is the sort of thing you can see in South America, where the edges are crumbling and there are impossibly steep slopes and rockfalls to contend with and the road is often only wide enough for a single vehicle when you encounter someone coming the other way – meaning that one of you has to back up until you reach a passing point.

Ever seen someone trying to back up a horse-drawn carriage when they can’t simply put animals on the other side and pull? At best it’s 1/20th speed and the animals will be extremely unhappy, it doesn’t come naturally to them (If you haven’t seen it, take whatever nightmares you envisage and double them).

5.2.12 Mountain Passes

▪ With Valley: Range: +25% – +135%
▪ With Valley: Typical: +75%
▪ Naked Pass (no Valley) Range: +75% – +150%
▪ Naked Pass (no Valley) Typical: +110%

As a general rule of thumb, mountain passes involve 1/3 the climb to reach and then 1/6th the descent through the flat of any valley, then 1/6th the ascent and 1/3 the descent, of going up the slope and then down it.

As previously, road quality doesn’t help much.

▪ Good Roads: x 1/4 normal benefit
▪ Bad Roads: x 1.25 normal penalty

5.2.13 Deserts

▪ Range: +15% – +75%
▪ Typical: +25%

Sand doesn’t stick together very well and wheels can easily get bogged down, as can any creatures not specifically adapted to sand travel. Rocky deserts are half these values. Note that some extreme places in the world have sand dunes that are even more catastrophically monumental – these locations can involve triple the penalty range shown, and will have ‘typical’ values far closer to the extreme end of the results. They can quite literally be a mountainous climb and/or descent with the equivalent of bad roads AND the penalty for insecure footing, combined.

5.2.14 Exotic Terrain

I’m afraid I can’t help too much with exotic terrains – and there are some examples here on earth, such as the famous Pendine Sands, and beaches, and so on. Just pick whatever terrain seems most analogous to you and tweak it to fit whatever you have in mind. Here’s what little guidance I can provide:

Pendine Sands: A dry salt lake-bed – but underneath, just an inch or two down, it’s like glue. There are also some similar terrains in Africa such as the Makgadikgadi Pan.

▪ If your vehicle, with load, is enough to sink more than an inch or so into sand (which will almost always happen), use Desert Sand. If your animal’s weights divided by the minimum number of legs they have on the ground at once (usually 1/2 of however many they have), are enough to sink more than an inch into the sand, apply the desert modifier a second time. How much weight are we talking? About 3,000 pounds per square foot. But most animals won’t have feet that are anywhere near to a square foot – 3″ diameter gives 0.05 square feet, so multiply the weight divided by the number of limbs (as discussed) by 20, and hope that your answer is less than 3,000.

▪ Areas such as Hawaii will often combine steep mountains with lava flows. Use mountains and favor more extreme results.

▪ Icy lakes are much firmer (if the ice is thick enough) than a swamp – but that’s not necessarily a good thing when it gets slippery, because it’s very easy to slip and break bones. Compacted snow negates this problem for the most part. Otherwise, treat it as Swamp.

▪ Compacted snow – loose, freshly-fallen snow will compact underfoot (and under wheels) to about 1/6th of it’s depth, 1/10th in a snowdrift. It will compact if more than 3-5 days old to about 1/3rd of the initial fall – which means that the depth underfoot will only compact to 1/2 its current depth.

Let’s run a quick example or two to see how that last, works:

3′ of snow. Compacts to 1/6 = 6 inches depth. So walking / driving through it puts the bottom of your feet / the vehicle 2’6″ below the surface.

3′ of snow fell a week ago. Another foot has fallen since. 3′ compacts naturally to 1/3 depth, or 1′. Add another 1′ of fresh snow, and the surface is 2′ thick. When this compacts, the bottom 1′ will halve in thickness to 6 inches and the top foot to 1/6th or another 2 inches – so your feet and wheels will sink about 8″ into the snow.

10′ of snow in a snowdrift which you can’t see because it’s mostly in a gully, has fallen in the last couple of days. It will compact to 1/6th of it’s depth when you put weight on it unless that weight is distributed using snowshoes and sled bottoms/runners – so that’s 10/6 = 1 2/3 feet = 1 foot 8 inches, or 20 inches total. Which means you plunge such that the bottom of your feet / wheels is 10′-20″ = 8′ 4″ beneath the surface. If you (or your vehicle) are only 6′ in height, that’s a problem.

5.2.15 Road Quality

Road quality is a factor that multiplies by the terrain factors given above. There are four different models (though I don’t expect the last one to be of much value in straight fantasy campaigns – it’s been included for two reasons: one, universality, and two, to accommodate Steampunk).

The major difference between the models tends to be at the higher end; each step up introduces better road quality than was previously available. Some of the labels may be the same, but standards may have evolved – what was once a poor road is now nothing more than a good track; what was a good road is now fairly average, and so on. That means that the defined quality represented by a narrative label usually improves with successive models.

The other factor that often occurs with a step up in models is that roads are often improved or upgraded. What was once a back road may become a major road when the old roads get upgraded into highways.

What this system doesn’t really take into account is any form if infrastructure decay. It assumes roads are being actively maintained to whatever standard they are set. If that’s not the case, you should feel free to downgrade the road quality accordingly. As a rule of thumb, 5 years without maintenance drops a road half-way to the next category down, another 10 years takes it all the way down, 15 years drops it into the next worst category, 20 years into the category below that, then 25 years, 30 years, and so on.

Environmental effects – rain, fog, strong winds, snow – drop the quality 1-2 steps.

Classifications below minimum: If decay or climatic effect drops a road below zero, take whatever it’s rating normally is and double it (if it’s a negative impact) or halve it (if it’s a positive impact). A third downward step means that the road is effectively not there until conditions improve – if there is a trailblazing standard or ‘none’, that’s as good as you get under those conditions.

5.2.15.1 The four-tier system

The four-tier system allocates all roads into one of four categories – none, track, backroad, and road. It’s appropriate for simulating Roman Empire -level Kingdoms – which are generally well below the standards of most Fantasy campaigns. Prior to the Roman Empire, simply use this system without the ‘road’ option; anything that would normally be a ‘road’ is now a backroad, anything that was a backroad is now a track, and anything that was a track is either still a track or simply doesn’t exist.

Roman roads are like spines – they run from a central point as far as they can go, in as straight a line as possible. Anything running off that central spine is a backroad. The main difference is that Roads are paved, possibly with nothing more than gravel and some sort of binding agent like clay – but this is still a vast improvement over bare earth.

▪ None = 1.5
▪ Track = 1.2
▪ Backroad = 1 (the standard)
▪ Road = 0.8

For example, if a terrain section is heavily forested rolling hills, 20 units long:
Heavily Forested: +50%
Rolling Hills, overall balanced: +10%
Combination:
     Bad Roads = +60% x 1.25 = +75%
     Good Roads = +60% / 2 = +30%
Road quality:
     None = 1.5 x +75 = +112%
     Track = 1.2 x +75 = +90%
     Backroad = +60 = +60%
     Road – base = +30 x 0.8 = +24%
but only half impact against the hills:
     +50 / 2, +10 / 2 =
     +25 x 0.8, +5 x 0.9 =
     +20% + 4.8% = +25%.
So, the 20 units are the equivalent of:
     None = +112%= 20+22.4 = 42.4 units
     Track = +90% = 20+18 = 38 units
     Backroad = +60% = 20+12 = 32 units
     Road – base = +25% = 20+5 = 25 units.

5.2.15.2 The five-tier system

The five-tier system upgrades roads to highways with better paving and adds cross-roads to form a secondary spine across a country, turning some former backroads into major roads. Backroads not so upgraded aren’t a lot different and neither are tracks.

It’s also possible that secondary roads more or less parallel to the highways will be added to supplement them – these will also be major roads.

Backroads remain the ‘standard’ with none and tracks being ‘bad roads’ and major roads and highways being ‘good roads’.

For the first time, in other words, it becomes possible to talk about a road network.

▪ None = 1.5
▪ Track = 1.2
▪ Backroad = 1 (the standard)
▪ Major Road = 0.75
▪ Highway = 0.7

5.2.15.3 The eight-tier system
This is effectively the version of the system that we use for the Pulp version of the 1930s. But it’s also appropriate for some old Kingdoms to use, at least in their central regions. And any Realm that defines itself in terms of Trade will encourage this standard throughout.

There are two primary justifications for the upgrades represented here – commerce and military. And while the military might want better roads in order to be able to move troops around more efficiently, there’s almost always something to do with the money that has an even higher priority in their eyes – so, really, commerce is where it’s at.

▪ None = 1.5
▪ Poor track = 1.2
▪ Track = 1.1
▪ Poor backroad = 1 (the standard)
▪ Good backroad = 0.9
▪ Major road = 0.75
▪ Poor highway = 0.7
▪ Good highway = 0.6

5.2.15.4 The ten-tier system

As I said earlier, ten tiers really requires industrial capabilities of some sort – heavy machinery, explosives, and so on, or equivalents thereof. It’s not strictly applicable to a pure fantasy campaign, but it’s relevant to sub-genres like steampunk that meet the requirement, and of course, for any non-fantasy genre that you want to apply this content to.

Most of the categories get an upgrade in this tier.

▪ Trailblazing = 2.25
▪ None = 1.7
▪ Poor Track = 1.3
▪ Track = 1.1
▪ Poor Backroad = 1 (the standard)
▪ Good Backroad = 0.85
▪ Major Road = 0.7
▪ Poor Highway = 0.6
▪ Good Highway = 0.5
▪ Freeways & Superhighways = 0.4

5.2.15 Rivers & Other Waterways

The thing about waterways is that they have to be crossed if you aren’t using them as your mode of transport. And there are 5 basic ways of doing so – Fords, bridges, Tolls, Ferries, and Other (especially Portage).

5.2.15.1 Fords

A ford is a place in the waterway where the water is shallower and, usually, where the river bed is firmer, rockier, and less muddy, so that there is less chance of getting stuck. But it still consists of forcing your way through the river.

A lot of GMs (and other people, to be fair) have the impression that fords are straight across. While they can be, it’s a lot more common for a curved or even a recurved course:



If you’re lucky, someone has driven in flags to march the channel, but most of the time that doesn’t happen, because they get swept away frequently. So the only solution is to gingerly feel your way.

And that takes time. Not a lot of time, but time. For each ford, add 0.05 to the road quality value.

5.2.15.2 Bridges

Option number two is to use a bridge. These are normally straight, and most of the time, don’t add anything to the time – but there’s an exception if you have to stop and pay a toll. The other circumstance that can be relevant is if the bridge is too narrow for passage both ways at the same time, and there’s someone coming the other way.

If there’s a delay of this type, add 0.02 ti the road quality value.

5.2.15.3 Tolls

Of course, if there’s a toll, that has to get added to the expenses for this (and every other trip along this route). Bridges are not cheap and require regular maintenance and occasional replacement..

5.2.15.4 Ferries

Another type of river crossing that is never free* is to take a ferry. This is especially relevant for broader waterways.

* Okay, so there is a free version – it’s essentially a raft connected to trees on either side by long ropes. You drive your vehicle onto the raft and then pull it across the river yourself using the ropes. As you do so, the rope that connects to where you came from unspools and you have to spool the rope that no longer is needed to reach the far shore.

Ferries are slow, especially in an era before motorized engines. On top of that, you may have to wait until enough traffic accumulates to justify the ferry crossing. And when you arrive, it may well be on the opposite shore, so you may have to wait for there to be sufficient demand built up on that side, as well.

For each ferry crossing, add 0.3-0.5 to the road quality value.

Ferries are often relatively expensive, to boot – so that needs to be listed in the expenses section.

5.2.15.5 Portage & Other Solutions
Portage is, the term used for when a boat has to unload its cargo and be carried overland to a point further up or down stream before it can continue – so what’s the relevance here?

Well, it occurred to me that in a fantasy environment there might well be a land-based equivalent where some creature carries the wagon and its load across the watercourse – for a fee, of course.

I could have chosen to invent a new term to describe that, but I thought that adding another meaning to the existing term would be more understandable.

So, how fast would it be? Well, have you ever been to the beach or a swimming pool and tried to walk while even only half-submerged? It’s SLOW – and that’s without factoring in a heavy load, which might even have to be carried across in stages. You could spend hours getting across.

If your usual travel speed is 10 mph – just for the sake of argument – you would take 2 hours to cover 20 miles. Adding two more hours to that would be the equivalent of dropping your average speed from 10 to 5 miles an hour – halving it.

So Portage would add +1 to the road quality factor, +0.25 for each trip required after the first.

I’m sure there are things that I haven’t thought of – parting the ‘red river’ as it were for example. As with the exotic terrains, find the nearest equivalent and adjust as necessary – bearing in mind that an extra 5% can be quite significant when coupled with a slower terrain.

Okay, so I got here – despite still suffering from the lingering effects of the head cold that I mentioned last week. I read somewhere that colds are only supposed to last 7 days, but I can’t remember the last time I experienced one that was gone that quickly. 2-3 weeks is more often the norm that I experienced.

I had originally intended / desired to include the weather subsections in this post, but decided even while writing the chapter outline that doing so in my current mental condition wasn’t going to happen – given the time, i think that decision has been borne out.

Next time, I hope to get down to the population subsystem (sections 5.7 & 5.8). So I would anticipate the next part in this chapter to be even shorter than this one, and for that to be followed by a longer one that will take more than one week to write, probably with one or two time-out posts in between. Then there will be another relatively short post to round out the chapter.

Today I’m going to walk you through the design of a divided die roll, one of my favorite RPG tools.

Dividing one die roll by another creates a large low-result probability and a long tail of low-probability high results. I’ve written about them before in The Physics Of Uncertainty, and used them in Oddities Of Values: Recalculating the price of valuables as well as in the Trade In Fantasy mechanics.

I was doing final revision of the structure of the next chapter of Trade In Fantasy when I realized that I would need just such a die roll. Normally, I would throw an extremely condensed explanation into a sidebar and that would be that, but the more I worked on prepping for the article, the less confident I became that I would have it anywhere near finished in time for publication.

You see, last Tuesday I got caught by the rain and since Tuesday night I’ve had a massive head cold. Symptoms are now starting to moderate, but my thinking is still fuzzy and wrapped in marshmallow and cotton wool. It is literally taking me a lot longer to do anything, and anything that I would normally knock off in a couple of days is now more likely to take three or four.

So I decided that it would be better to take a really small topic that I could explain in detail in the time available rather than the big article that I probably wouldn’t finish in time – and, since I was going to need to design this die roll anyway, it seemed like an obvious choice.

I’m not going to go into the specifics of what it’s for, or why I need it; that would steal too much from the Trade In Fantasy chapter.

That’s why we are where we are. Let’s get on with it!

Divided Die Roll Characteristics

Divided Die Rolls can be specified by defining four values – the minimum, the maximum, the average, and the interval.

In this case, I want an average of 1, a minimum of 0, a maximum of around 4 or 5 but I can be a little flexible in that area, and an interval of 0.1.

The format of a divided die roll is [(AdX + B) x C + D / (EdY + F)] / C.

The C and D variables

In this case, D is a modifier that’s going to come from other mechanics, so I can presume that it’s zero at the moment and come back to it as the very last thing. C is the reciprocal of the interval – so if I want results to be every 0.1, then C is 10.

So I can simplify the above to [(AdX + B) x 10 / (EdY + F)] / 10.

But there are alternate configurations that need to be considered before settling on this. The /10, that’s settled, absolutely essential – that’s how you go from while number results to results that are 1/10th apart. But the x 10 – I could make that “x d10” or “x d20” or “x (d10+5)” and all I’m going to be doing is changing the roll requirements for E, Y, and F.

In fact, it’s essential that I pick something other than x 10 because when you x10 and then /10, you end up with the same number.

Because this is not supposed to be the primary driver of the randomness within the roll, I like the notion of using “x (d10+4.5)” – a slight variation on the third option listed. That gives this part of the roll a range of 5.5 to 14.5 and an average result of exactly 10.

Those are important numbers because this defines the range over which the actual random die roll takes place.

On a low roll on the d10, the range is going to be about 1/2 of what it normally is (55% to be exact), on an average roll, the range will be present in full, and on a high roll, it will be 145% of normal – so that the randomness will occupy a wider range of results.

With those items specified, I can reformat the whole to f(1) x (d10+4.5)/10, which makes this effect a whole lot clearer and shifts everything that hasn’t been decided yet into the umbrella f(1) function.

Eliminating D

I can further simplify things by eliminating D altogether and specifying B as the additive from the game mechanics – which effectively eliminates it for the time being, too. So now we have f(1) = AdX / (EdY + F).

Adjusting Parameters

The next thing I have to do, having isolated and defined the C “value”, is to adjust the desired minimum, average, and maximum results, because those are the parameters that will define A, X, E, Y, and F.

Minimum:
f(0) x (1+4.5) / 10 = 0
f(0) x 5.5 / 10 = 0
f(0) x 5.5 = 0 x 10
f(0) = 0 x 10 / 5.5 = 0

Average:
f(1) x (5.5 + 4.5) / 10 = 1
f(1) x 10 / 10 = 1
f(1) = 1 x 10 / 10 = 1

Maximum:
Three possible values that are acceptable, this is something that is a bit flexible. But let’s work all three:
f(2) x (10 + 4.5) / 10 = 3
f(2) x 14.5 / 10 = 3
f(2) x 14.5 = 3 x 10 = 30
f(2) = 30 / 14.5 = 2.0689655172413793103448275862069 = 2.07

f(3) x 14.5 / 10 = 4
f(3) x 14.5 = 4 x 10 = 40
f(3) = 40 / 14.5 = 2.7586206896551724137931034482759 = 2.76

f(4) x 14.5 / 10 = 5
f(4) x 14.5 = 5 x 10 = 50
f(4) = 50 / 14.5 = 3.4482758620689655172413793103448 = 3.45

There’s one more useful set of values that can be derived at the moment – (f(n) – f(0)) / i.

Minimum – zero divided by anything is still zero.
Average:
f(5) = [f(1) – f(0)] / i = [1 – 0] / 0.1 = 10

Maximums:
f(6) = [f(2)-f(0)] / i = [2.07 – 0] / 0.1 = 20.7
f(7) = [f(3)]-f(0)] / i = [2.76 – 0] / 0.1 = 27.6
f(8) = [f(4)-f(0)] / i = [3.45 – 0] / 0.1 = 34.5

E, Y, and F

The way divided die rolls work is to pair a set of A and X with a set of E, Y, and F to give the correct results.

The width of the denominator makes a big difference. Below are several probability charts, all based on 6d10 / Ed6, and all to more-or-less the same scale:

At the top, the red curve is 610/d6. Note the hump before the curve finally flat-lines. Below that is 6d10/2d6. Notice how the probability is considerably higher for the average result. The purple graph is 6d10/3d6, and it’s higher again. The blue line on the right is 6d10/4d6, and the increase in probability of the 1 result is starting to get smaller. The light blue shows 6d10/5d6, and any result over 2 is now extremely unlikely. The dark and light green that start the bottom row are 6d10/6d6 and 6d10/7d6, respectively, and the probability of a 1 result peaks. That’s followed by yellow and gold, showing 6d10/8d6 and 6d10/9d6, respectively. Notice that the probability of a zero result is growing and has in fact started eating into the probability of a 1 result. With the last curve, in orange, the probability of a zero result is now higher than the probability of a 1.

AnyDice is very useful, but it’s a die rolling program and it expects integer outcomes. It doesn’t do fractions – it rounds.

Another trick that’s really useful is to add an ordinary NdZ die roll to the results.

For the next set of graphs, I’ve taken the maximum result and added 2d-something – for the first chart, 2d10; for the second, 2d8; for the third, 2d6; for the fourth and fifth, 2d4; for the rest, 2d3. These sizes have been chosen because they are roughly 1/4 of the maximum result on the divided die roll. Results and probabilities have been scaled to be the same, and the same colors have been used.

Wow, what a difference! The “+2dN”.clearly dominates the results at lower values, but the long tail continues to exist, low probability outcomes significantly greater than the base range.

So the combination of these techniques gives a huge level of control over the end probability curve, and the shape of that curve is dependent on what’s on either side of that division mark.

Maximum Over Minimum

The other thing to notice is the number of results. The maximum outcome occurs when the maximum is rolled above the division line and the minimum below it.

6d10 has a maximum outcome of 60. 1d6 has a minimum of 1, so the maximum result of dividing the first by the second is 60.

With 2d6 as the divisor, the minimum roll becomes 2, and the maximum result overall becomes 60/2=30.

With 3d6 as the divisor, the minimum roll becomes 3, and the maximum overall result becomes 60/3=20. We would get the same divisor minimum with 2d6+1, but the shape of the curve would be different – more like the 2d6 curve, but scrunched into 2/3 the size, a compromise between the two.

Relationship to Parameters

Our maximum parameter is 20.7, or 27.6, or 34.5 – or somewhere in that vicinity. So we want around 30 results. We could get there with 3d10, or 5d6, or even d10+d20. These are going to have the same maximum result, but different minimums – 3, 5, and 2, respectively. Another option is 3d12, with it’s peak of 36, or 2d12+d8, or 2d12+d6, with peaks of 32 and 30, respectively.

Every additional die or +1 in the denominator multiplies these options by the total +1, because we still want the same end result.

The problem is that lots of dice take time to add up when you roll them. d6 work well because it’s easy to group them into sets totaling 10. d8s and even d10s can be handled using the same technique, but because there are fewer of them, you’re less likely to get convenient sets. d12 and d20…. not so much. That means that the first group of possible rolls is preferable to the second.

Deciding The Denominator

Because of the multiplication factor, the smaller and simpler the denominator, the better. But using one dice produces strange interactions that produce a second peak in the probabilities. Here’s a look at 5d6/d6, stretched a little vertically to make the bulge that results a little more obvious:

Using 2 or more dice in the denominator eliminates this almost completely. Here’s 10d6 / 2d6 for comparison:

Using 3d4 instead of 2d6 would be even better, but d4s (the traditional tetrahedron design) don’t roll very well. Using d3s would solve that – at the price of added inconvenience.

So 2d6+0 is the denominator of choice, at least for the moment.

Peak probability

The other problem I have is with the average result. I very much want it to center around 1, with a range down to 0 and up to 2 being the dominant probability outcome. Taking the desired intervals into account, that’s 0 to 10 to 20. I can achieve that, no problem, just by adding 2d10, or 4d5, or maybe even 4d6-4.

But that maximum of 20 then has to come off our range of results from the divided part. So, instead of 20.7, or 27.6, or 34.5, or similar, we’re now talking 0.7 or 7.6 or 14.5.

The 0.7 is so small as to be trivial. There might as well not be a divided roll. The other two remain viable choices. The question is how to get to them?

Since the denominator is to be 2d6, I can go ahead and double these to 15.2 and 29. Two options immediately come to mind: d10+d6-1 and 3d10.

But these will shift the average result, so whatever the overall average works out to be, I have to deduct that from the roll.

d10+d6-1: average is 5.5+3.5 = 9. So the -1 has to become a -8.

The alternative is 3d10. Average is 5.5 x 3 = 16.5. So the +0 has to become a -16.5. Or add 4 and subtract 20. I don’t like this roll as much as the first.

The third alternative, not mentioned so far, is to apply the average divisor, and shift the adjustment modifier to the other part of the calculation, shown in the first paragraph. The average denominator roll of 2d6 is 7. 9/7 = 1.2857142857142857142857142857143 = 1.286. That’s a bit of a pain; it’s easy with a calculator but otherwise user-unfriendly.

16.5/7 = 2.3571428571428571428571428571429 = 2.36. That’s one decimal place less, which is a good thing, but it’s still not ideal.

But I have one more trick up my sleeve: multiplication-adjustment-division.

The perfect solution would be 7 x (added roll), apply 7 x modifier, divide result by 7. But 7 is a pain in the neck when it comes to multiplication and division. So let’s look at alternatives and see whether or not there’s something close enough to be more convenient.

9/7 first:

2 x 9/7 = 18/7 = 2.57 = 2.6. Better, but not good enough.
3 x 9/7 = 27/7 = 3.857 = 3.86. No.
4 x 9/7 = 36/7 = 5.143 = 5. A contender.
5 x 9/7 = 45/7 = 6.4286 = 6.43. No.
6 x 9/7 = 54/7 = 7.718 = 7.2. No.
7 x 9/7 = 9. Obvious.
8 x 9/7 = 72/7 = 10.286. Rounding to 10 – a contender, but marginal.
9 x 9/7 = 81/7 = 11.57. No.
10 x 9/7 = 90/7 = 12.86. No.
20 x 9/7 = 180/7 = 25.714. No.

No other multiplication looks easy enough. But one serious contender.

16.5/7 second:

2 x 16.5 / 7 = 33/7 = 4.714. No.
3 x 16.5 / 7 = 49.5/7 = 7.07 = 7? A contender.
4 x 16.5 / 7 = 66/7 = 9.423. No.
5 x 16.5 / 7 = 77.5 / 7 = 11.07 = 11? A contender.
6 x 16.5 / 7 = 99/7 = 14.143. No.
7 x 16.5 / 7 = 148.5 / 7 = 21.214. No.
10 x 16.5 / 7 = 165/7 = 23.57. No.
20 x 16.5 / 7 = 330/7 = 47.143. No.

I’ve rejected options with smaller rounding errors than the 8, 10 option based on 9/7, so I’m tempted to eliminate it – but subtracting ten is such an easy calculation that I think it has to stay in the mix. So I’ve now got four contenders.

Combinations

I’ve ended up with six combinations for the divided part and three for the added part, or 18 combinations in all.

Because I’ve already used A through F, in general definitions, as well as X and Y, I’ll label these elements starting with G.

1. G1+K(g1) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (4 x 2d10 -5) / 4
2. G1+L(g1) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (4 x 4d5 – 5) / 4
3. G1+M(g1) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (4 x 4d6 – 21) / 4
4. G2+K(g2) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (8 x 2d10 -5) / 8
5. G2+L(g2) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (8 x 4d5 -5) / 8
6. G3+M(g2) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (8 x 4d6 -37) / 8
7. H1+K(h1) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (3 x 2d10 -7) / 3
8. H1+L(h1) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (3 x 4d5 -7) / 3
9. H1+M(h1) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (3 x 4d6 -19) / 3
10. H2+K(h2) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (5 x 2d10 – 11) / 5
11. H2+L(h2) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (5 x 4d5 – 11) / 5
12. H2+M(h2) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (5 x 4d6 – 31) / 5
13. I+K = (d10+d6-8) / 2d6 + 2d10
14. I+L = (d10+d6-8) / 2d6 + 4d5
15. I+M = (d10+d6-8) / 2d6 + 4d6-4
16. J+K = (3d10 + 4 – 20) / 2d6 + 2d10
17. J+L = (3d10 + 4 – 20) / 2d6 + 4d5
18. J+M = (3d10 + 4 – 20) / 2d6 + 4d6-4

But I have one more trick up my sleeve – instead of multiplying the result, I can multiply the number of dice to be rolled. This produces an additional set of 12 options to consider:

19. G1+K(g1a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (8d10 -5) / 4
20. G1+L(g1a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (16d5 – 5) / 4
21. G1+M(g1a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (16d6 – 21) / 4
22. G2+K(g2a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (16d10 -5) / 8
23. G2+L(g2a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (32d5 -5) / 8
24. G3+M(g2a) = (d10+d6-1) / 2d6 + (32d6 -37) / 8
25. H1+K(h1a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (6d10 -7) / 3
26. H1+L(h1a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (12d5 -7) / 3
27. H1+M(h1a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (12d6 -19) / 3
28. H2+K(h2a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (10d10 – 11) / 5
29. H2+L(h2a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (20d5 – 11) / 5
30. H2+M(h2a) = 3d10 / 2d6 + (20d6 – 31) / 5

Thirty options. There’s no way to test them all at the same time, even using something like AnyDice. But, just looking at them, I have one clear favorite already: H1+K(h1a) is much simpler ad uses a lot less dice than any of the alternatives. I also have a clear alternate preference, I+K, for similar reasons. H2+K(h2), H2+L(h2), J+K and J+M are third choices. Most of the others involve too many dice to be convenient.

Time for another set of compounded graphs looking at those 6 choices. A mistake made through the fuzzy thinking mentioned earlier has put them in reverse order, but oh well.

Analysis

J+M (red)

1. The shape is more or less right.
2. The average is right.
3. The tail isn’t long enough.
4. The minimum comes up as -6. That can be easily corrected but doing so wrecks the average. That can also be fixed but doing so makes the tail – which would have been improved by the first fix – too short again.

Rejected.

J+K (purple)

1. The shape is dominated by the addition.
2. The average is right.
3. The tail isn’t long enough.
4. The minimum comes up as -4. That can be easily corrected but doing so wrecks the average. That can also be fixed but doing so makes the tail – which would have been improved by the first fix – too short again.

Rejected.

H2+L(h2) (green)

1. The shape is more or less right.
2. The average is right.
3. The tail is long enough; the maximum comes up as 32.
4. The minimum comes up as 1. Not perfect but close enough.

Consider Further.

H2+K(h2) (blue)

1. The shape is dominated by the addition. It’s less of a bell curve.
2. The average is right.
3. The tail is the longest of all the contenders; the maximum result is 33.
4. The minimum comes up as -1. The formula can be tweaked to fix that, but it would throw the average out. That can also be fixed, at the cost of a fiddly little bit of arithmetic – every time the roll has to be made.

Rejected, but only because I already have a better candidate.

I+K (yellow)

1. The shape is dominated by the addition, even more than the other examples where that was the case.
2. The average is right.
3. The tail isn’t anywhere near long enough.
4. The minimum comes up as -1. That can be easily corrected but doing so wrecks the average. That can also be fixed but doing so makes the tail – already too short – even shorter, and adds some fiddly maths to the roll.

Rejected.

H1+K(h1a) (orange)

1. The orange is very similar to the green in shape; the peak is a little steeper.
2. The average doesn’t quite look right – it’s closer to 10.3 or something like that, even though 10 is marginally higher in probability, 11 is almost as high. If they were equal, I’d list the average as 10.5; since they aren’t, it has to be a little less than that.
3. The tail is perfectly satisfactory, though a little flatter and lower in probability compared to some of the other options trialed.
4. The minimum is shown as 0.

Rejected because of the average being off.

The wash-up: while several of the choices came close, there was only one that passed every test – H2+L(h2) (green), better known as 3d10 / 2d6 + (5 x 4d5 – 11) / 5.

Further Tweaking?

The maximum result of 32 is a little on the low side. It can be boosted by increasing the size of the roll on the top of the divisor to 4 or 5 d10. This would take the average from 16.5/7 to 22/7 or 27.5/7, respectively. Compensating for this would require further adjustment of the addition part to bring the average back down.

The bigger any such change, the harder this is to do. Things are already at the point where I was contemplating applying the x 5 multiplier to the divided roll so that the division can be handled more easily.

There is still the interval adjustment to incorporate, a further division by 10 once the roll has rounded off to whole numbers.

To be honest, though, my inclination at the moment is to leave well-enough alone and live with the smaller-than-desired maximum.

The Ultimate Modifier I

This formula – a process really – was worked out after simplifying the question by leaving out B. That has to get put back into the process, as follows:

(3d10 + Bias Modifier) / 2d6 + (5 x 4d5 – 11) / 5.

I was thinking that this modifier would be something like plus or minus 10. It’s intended to bias the results based on external non-random factors. But I could easily boost it to a higher plus or minus. This matters a bit because 1/7th of it will add to the average result (desired and intentional) and the whole of it adds to the maximum (also desired and intentional).

This is a factor that I was taking into consideration when mooting no change to the current die roll.

But, at the end of the day, there is a further option to keep up my sleeve in case I need it.

The Ultimate Modifier II

As well as applying the modifier to the divided roll, I could also apply a fraction of it to the end result IF the roll is above a threshold. Or even universally, to all rolls. The latter would take some of the randomness out of the roll and increase the effect of the non-random factors.

I don’t have to decide right now; I can leave that choice for when working on the system mechanics.

A further option to keep in that back pocket is not to base this adjustment on the non-random factors, but on the roll as a whole – if it were >2.0, and the net maximum got up to around 4 or 4.5, adding 0.1 to the result for every 0.5 or part thereof would increase the maximum considerably, and would be a lot simpler in terms of the overall mechanics.

I can even have it both ways – if the bias is above a certain threshold (to be determined, but probably +10 or better), I could use the bias as the basis of the bonus; if not, increasing the significance of the random element by basing the bonus on the overall roll as described.

In fact, I like this option because the bias, if it’s really significant, should mitigate the randomness. It would be a closer simulation of the real world.

Closing out this article

I thought it might be worth going right back to the basics and pointing out that not all divided die rolls have to be this complicated. The best way to illustrate that is by considering a much simpler one or two, just for the heck of it.

2d6/d6

This is one of the simplest you can imagine. Three dice.

Minimum: 2 on the 2d6. If you get a 1 on the 1d6, that’s an overall roll of 2. If you get a 2 on the 1d6, that’s 1. If anything more, that’s 0 – if you round down..Rounding matters because it greatly simplifies the maths of the division, enough that you can generally do it in your head. If, for example, you chose to round off instead of down, then results of 2, 3, or 4 on the single d6 give you a net result of 1.

Average: 7 on the 2d6. If you get a 1 on the 1d6, that becomes a result of 7. If you roll a 6, it becomes a 1. If you roll the average (3.5), it becomes a 2. If you measure the probability, that says that the peak probability is a 2, and that the range 1 to 2 is equal in overall probability to the range 2 to 7 – so the low results are going to be roughly 5 times more frequent than the higher ones.

Maximum: This is always when divided die rolls get interesting. Maximum on the 2d6 is 12. If you roll a 1 on the single d6, that’s an absolute peak result of 12. If you roll a 2, the overall result is a 6. If you roll average (3.5), the answer is 12/3.5 = 3.4, which becomes a 3. If you roll maximum on the denominator die, the overall result falls back to 2.

A good way to think about what’s happening is that the shape of the die roll being divided is changing with each different outcome on the single d6.

4d6/d6

Minimum: 4 on the 4d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator d6 yields an overall result of 4; a roll of 2 gives 2; a roll of 3 or 4 gives 1; what happen on a 5 or 6 depends on what rounding you mandate.

Average: 14 on the 4d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator gives a result of 14; a roll of 2 gives 7; a roll of 3 gives 4 2/3, which might be 5 or 4 depending on rounding; a roll of 4 gives 3; a roll of 5 gives 2 or 3 (rounding again); a roll of 6 gives 2 1/3 which rounds to 2. Peak probability is 14/3.5 = 4.

Maximum: 24 on the 4d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator gives the absolute maximum result of 24, and this will happen once in 6^(4+1) rolls, once in 7776 rolls. A roll of 2 gets 12. A roll of 3 gets 8. A roll of 4 gets 6. A roll of 5 gets 4.8 which could round to either 4 or 5. A roll of 6 gets a result of 4. The average result if you have rolled a maximum on the 4d6 is 24/3.5 = 6..86, which either rounds to 6 or 8.

It’s like rolling a d6 that can sometimes explode into 2, 3, or even 4d6 – if that d6 were weighted to produce low rolls.

One more.

2d6/d3

These results will look very familiar.

Minimum: 2 on the 2d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator d3 yields an overall result of 2; a roll of 2 gives 1; and a roll of 3 gets either 0 or 1 depending on rounding.

Average: 7 on the 2d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator gives a result of 7; a roll of 2 gives 3 or 4; and a roll of 3 gives 2 1/3, which rounds to 2. Peak probability is 7/2 = 3.5.

Maximum: 12 on the 2d6. A roll of 1 on the denominator gives the absolute maximum result of 12, and this will happen once in 3×6^(2) rolls, once in 108 rolls. A roll of 2 gets 6. A roll of 3 gets 4.

In other words, the result is effectively a d6 that has a 1 in 3 chance of doing double effect, and a 1-in-3 chance of being a weighted-low d4 – and both results will come up often enough to be noticed.

And this scales – you can replace any d6 with this divided roll.

This option for rolling damage ups the excitement of combat no end. Or you could replace the 3d6 used to roll stats with this.

Let’s look at that last one. The odds are that you’ll have one of each of the possible denominators – so 2d6/1, 2d6/2, and 2d6/3. There are enough dice to make this a genuine dumbbell probability. Your overall average is probably 7+3.5+2 = 12-13. But, should the denominators smile upon you, you could get a stat of 36; and, should they frown, a stat of 2. Is the risk worth it? A stat of 36 is awfully tempting…

In effect, the stat roll is a 6d6/3d3 divided roll. But you can take some of the wildness out – use d6 + 4d6/2d3, or 2d6 + 2d6/d3. The latter gives you a chance of effectively getting to roll 4d6 (4-14-24) instead of 3 (3-10.5-18) – but at the price of possibly rolling 2d6+1 or 2 (3,4-8,9-13,14).

These options are always food for thought.

Well, I made it to the end – but it took three times as long to write this post as it should have. The good news is that my head cold is substantially improved over the way it was when I started on this post. I think taking this option was the right choice to make.

There are ways of imparting dynamic life to a background and to characters that are hard work and ways that are easy. This is one of the easy ways.

This is the latest in my series of time-out posts in between the Trade In Fantasy series.

I’m concurrently reading two books right now:

• Dr Who The Handbook: The Third Doctor (The Jon Pertwee Years 1970-1974) by David J Howe & Stephen James Walker; and
• The [Dr Who] Discontinuity Guide by Paul Cornell, Martin Day, and Keith Topping.

(links are top Amazon, I get a small commission if you buy).

Between them, they make one good reference book for the period they overlap. The first one is basically a detailed synopsis of the episodes broadcast in the years in question by the BBC, plus a couple of reviews of each plotline.

The Second has lists of production goofs, snatches of dialogue both prosaic and peerless, analysis of continuity flaws and logic holes, and so on. They will even sometimes correct one another, inadvertently giving you the full picture.

The first only covers the four production years in question, and it’s the only one in what is clearly a series of such books that I own. The second covers the entirety of the classic run of Doctor Who from the first season right through to the end of the 26th, so I had plenty of time to see what it was like as a standalone work. If you knew the episode in question, all well and good – but if not, you lacked essential context in which to place the detailed information being provided. What’s missing from the second book is a short episode synopsis. Even a few lines, the length of each of the other subsections devoted to a story-line, would make a huge difference.

Context matters.

So I’m reveling in the multi-page synopses provided by the first, for as long as they last. When they end, I may have to presage each entry by looking up the Wikipedia entry for the episode, if there is one.

In the middle of the discussion of the 6-part adventure The Green Death, the Discontinuity Guide describes the state of politics within the fictional government, showing how this has been dribbled out to viewers a little at a time as it became relevant to the plot in various adventures, combining to tell a slice of history that we experience only as a series of wave-fronts of relevance. An isolated snatch of dialogue here and there links the more substantial pieces together and those substantial pieces place those isolated mentions into context. Together they tell the story of what’s been going on in the background, almost completely unseen by the audience, in exactly the same way that the two books combine to make one great reference.

As soon as I read this summary, I saw the parallels, and it immediately got me to thinking about imparting dynamics to what are often extremely static backgrounds in RPGs.

The Creation Process

This consists of three simple steps.

Step 1: Three Stories plus stuff that just happens

You start by developing three background stories, typically quite different in tone.

• One should be a consequence of a PC action. Since the first adventure (presumably) hasn’t happened yet, this may have to be anticipated. Be careful NOT to monkey with player/character agency, pick something that will happen regardless of PC choices.
• One should be political
• One should be social or sporting
• A fourth list should be just a list of random stuff happening. You probably want this list to be twice as long as any of the others, maybe more. Half of it will be trivial in nature, much of what’s left will be gossip or rumor.

Step 2: Soundbite Sequencing

Break each of the first three “plotlines” into soundbites one sentence long, one to a line (and leave a half-inch or so of empty space before and a quarter-inch after). Between all four, aim to have two soundbites per anticipated game session in the campaign – and allow a bit of margin, because everyone always underestimates how many game sessions any given adventure will last, especially at this early point.

You want to tell the story arc of what happens in a set of lists of such soundbites, one per story.

Don’t be afraid to throw in the occasional random development out of the blue – such things happen in real life. And don’t be afraid to upset the status quo – but try to leave yourself a pathway back to something resembling the status quo over the medium-to-long-term.

Step 3: Calendar Notation

Before each soundbite, list a minimum number of in-game days before the next development in that story. In some cases, you may also need to note a maximum number of in-game days. I would do so by separating the two numbers with a slash (“/”), knowing that if there’s just one number on it’s own, that’s a minimum.

No minimum should be less than 1. And, to be realistic, no maximum should be more than 30 – if you have an event with a maximum higher than that, you need to insert one or two unrelated developments just to keep the story-line ticking over.

To ensure there’s room for those (and for any notes that the GM wants to make about reactions of the PCs), I would actually leave a blank line between soundbites if documenting them longhand. But, since I’d probably use a text file, I can insert lines as necessary, so that’s not an issue.

Choice Of Text Editor

Choice of text editor is probably worth considering. I use Kate for most of my text editing because (1) it’s free, (2) it works on almost every system – I’m not sure about Apple hardware, though; and (3) it has a number of useful tricks up its sleeve, one of which is aligned indents.



Here’s a quick screenshot to explain the relevant program features.

1 – the name of the current document. “Untitled” is the default, changed to the filename when you save it.

2. Shows that the left-hand tab contains the document “untitled”.

3. Shows that the right-hand tab has the working draft of this article.

4. The blue underline means that this is the tab whose contents are shown in the window below.

5. The lack of underline means that this tab’s contents are not currently shown. You can split the view to look at multiple documents at the same time, or even two different positions within the same document at the same time, which can be incredibly useful.

6. These icons – and the asterisk in (1) – indicate that there have been unsaved changes made. Always double-check this before closing the program or a tab.

7. The left hand wall of the text area, to which text will naturally align.

8. The cursor (flashing when you are able to actually edit / add text).

9. The current position of the cursor.

10. This is what happens when I hit the “Tab” button – “soft” means “add spaces, not a tab marker”, the “4” indicates how many, and the Insert means ‘don’t type over the top of existing text’. Note that the ‘soft tab’ still behaves like a tab at times – “shift tab” removes one, for example – but at other times, it’s four spaces, which can be individually deleted.

11. A paragraph of text, most of it nonsense words, automatically left-justified and aligned with the left-hand wall of the text area, as you would expect.



12. If I hit tab and then write a second paragraph – again, mostly nonsense – second and subsequent lines of the paragraph are aligned with the position indented 4 spaces from the left.

13. If I hit tab again and then enter a third paragraph, the alignment of text again shifts four spaces to the right.

14. Although it’s almost impossible to see, there is also a right-hand wall to the text area. I’ve added some green dots and a darkened enlargement to make it more visible. Any text that goes over this line wraps around to the next line of the paragraph, behavior you can turn on or off with F10.

15. Finally, there’s a document thumbnail panel to help you navigate. An Orange bar on the left shows where lines of text are that have been changed since the document was last saved; when you save it, these turn an aqua color. Everything that is displayed in the main text window is shaded so that in a much longer document, you can see where you’re at.

To the right are two more preview areas from different documents. The one on the left is from the draft text of this article as it was before I started writing this paragraph; the one to the right of it is the text document containing the last 4 entries in the Trade In Fantasy series, with the cursor on the last (and 24087th) line. The regular patterns that you can see are the effects of the HTML-coding of tables, and I make it a habit to put lots of white space (more than a screenful, in fact) in between different posts, creating a visual border between them. It’s important to note that paragraphs in the preview panel are never wrapped, they are a single line – as you can see in the example above.

So, why is this so useful in this context?

I can put the soundbites aligned left, with a gap to separate the different plot arcs. If I need additional commentary or notes, I can indent them. If I then need to note PC actions or reactions, I can indent those a second time. A single blank line at the bottom of each trio of lines to visually separate them and I can see where each is at with a glance.

It has other purposes as well, but that’s what’s relevant to this article.

Delivery

Each time the PCs are somewhere where they can get the news, check the number of days since the last soundbite in that story got ticked off your list. If it’s been long enough, the news contains the next element. If there’s nothing from one of the three main plots, tick off the next item from the fourth list instead (so that there’s always something).

Spend absolutely minimal time on this in-game – it’s a little bit of background color, no more important than the color of the castle bunting. It’s a way to have something for NPCs to talk about, nothing more – or so it seems.

Soft Time

News travels by the fastest available route, but in a Fantasy campaign, that can be pretty slow. Soft Time is time added to an event that represents how long it takes for news of the event to reach the PCs.

Obviously, the closer the PCs are to the scene of the event, the shorter the span of soft time.

Let’s look at a series of events to see how this works.

00 Event A
10 Event B
05 Event C

News of Event A reaches the PCs in the first game session and starts the clock ticking. If there was a minimum time here, it would be relative to one of the other plot arcs, whichever one had the shortest minimum time. The PCs are, at this point, located 3 weeks away from the scene, so the soft time of 21 days has to be taken into account – the actual event happened three weeks ago, on day -21, but word is just reaching the PCs now.

The PCs then go off and have adventure #1. It takes 3 days. As a consequence, they are certain to need to move to the regional capital for Adventure #2, and it’s a week away. In actual fact, the GM plans for Adventure #2 to happen en route, and Adventure #3 will be the one with the next opportunity for the PCs to hear news.

When the PCs set off on their journey, the news of Event A is 4 days old, and they are still 21 soft-time days away from it. Four days is less than the 10 days specified for Event B, so news of it has not yet arrived even though it took place 21-10=11 days ago. At the start of the game session, the GM should provide news of an event from the fourth list.

The PCs have Adventure #2 en route, adding 2 days to their journey (even though it actually consumes 3 or 4 game sessions). 4 + 7 (travel) + 2 = 13 days. But the soft time is reduced by 7 days because they have travelled 7 days closer to the location – from 21 to 14 days.

On day 13, the PCs reach the regional capital. It’s been more than 10 days, but Event B doesn’t happen exactly 10 days after event A – that 10 days is simply how soon it could have happened. But this is the first opportunity the GM has had for the news to reach them (unless he throws in a random encounter with a traveler), so news of Event B has only just reached the capital and it’s all anyone is talking about when the PCs arrive.

Subtracting the new soft time from the current date (Day 13 – 14 days = day -1), we find that Event B actually happened on day -1, a day before the PCs even set off on Adventure #1 – but the news has just caught up with them.

The earliest that Event C can happen is 5 days later, on Day 4 (at the same time as the PCs were just setting off), and the earliest that the PCs can hear about it is on Day 4+14=Day 18.

If Adventure #3 takes three days, that would take the PCs up to Day 17, and word of Event C will not have reached them yet. If it takes five days, that would take the PCs up to Day 19, and it is now possible for Event C to be the new talk of the town. But it didn’t happen 5 days after Event B, the timing says that it actually happened 6 days later.

In reality, the PCs would have passed through any number of small towns along the way, so news of events could have reached them much sooner – if they had stopped to talk with a local.

Events are not occurring in a fixed time interval, news of events is reaching the PCs every time there is an opportunity for them to hear about them, and the actual timing of the events is manipulated to allow for the soft time needed.

The result is that anytime they talk to someone heading away from the scene, or located closer to it, if the minimum time has elapsed, there will be news.

Immediate Impact

The immediate impact is that the game world and the NPCs that inhabit it will seem more vibrant, more real, and better able to interact with the PCs because they will always have something to talk about or react to.

From their personalities, you should be able to invent out of whole cloth how each NPC will react to the latest news. The soundbites are there to stimulate conversation.

If ever discussion of an Event seems to be getting a bit tired or overworked or that Event appears to be gaining significance in the eyes of the players, it’s time to change the subject and pop in a fresh bit of news.

Longer-term impact

As time passes, the players will start to notice the connections between one soundbite of the story and the next. If there are relevant consequences to the Event, they should be experienced by the PCs.

The result is that the players will become aware that the background is dynamic, changing over time – there’s a story unfolding that has nothing to do with them, though it may affect them, and it’s something that they may or may not choose to involve themselves in. If they don’t, it’s just evolution of the setting; it’s not intended to be a plot hook (though you can insert plot hooks into list four anytime you have one).

It’s quite possible, especially early on, that the PCs lack the capability to do anything about a situation even if they are so inclined. Any NPCs who are around should pointedly make the PCs aware of their limitations if they start to get all gung-ho.

More than anything else, the fact that there is always news – it could be one, two, three, or (more rarely) four items – marks the passage of time.

And the passage of time matters, as I pointed out in an early Lesson From The West Wing.

Campaign Interactivity

The players (courtesy of plot arc 1) will eventually notice dominoes falling in the background as a consequence of their actions.

This immediately makes them and their characters feel connected to the game world and lends gravitas to their decisions, because their may be consequences and they may be held to account for mistakes they make.

So they should (will?) tend to sharpen up and pay a bit more attention to what they are doing and what you are saying as GM – because there’s nothing worse than completely stuffing something up because you misheard a vital part of the GM’s briefing.

Intervention

At any point, the players may decide to intervene, to involve themselves. Your prepared plot arc will almost immediately go off the rails when they do so; that’s fine. The players have made the call to involve themselves in something more significant than another random dungeon.

They are Engaging with the plot.

You will have to create an adventure in which they make their attempt to intervene – you will need to expand on your plans to accommodate that intervention, or even rewrite them completely.

The results should be drama-filled and exciting, whether that’s what you had planned or not – and there should be a complication for the plot arc; these things should have immediate consequences and ramifications.

As soon as you have worked out what the changed plotline is going to be, you need to work up a replacement plot arc and list of news-bites to present in place of the one that has just been whisked onto center stage.

The more directly the PCs are impacted by events, the more likely that are to want to intervene.

You have to make sure that the players know that if their characters aren’t up to the job of dealing with whatever situation they are choosing to meddle in, those already involved will chew them up like dog meat. Use NPCs to sound appropriate warnings, and don’t forget to exaggerate the capabilities of anyone who has a whiff of the legendary or mythical about them – at least in the minds of the NPCs doing the talking. But if they insist, so be it.

Upping The Storytelling Quotient

From time to time, serendipity means that the background events can manifest in a more palpable difference to the course of events in the main plotline. Don’t go out of your way looking for these, but always be on the lookout for them when they present themselves.

For example, something happens that forces the government to spend money. They have some reserves to call on, but replenishing those reserves and funding further action demands an increase in taxes, initially of 10%, and a tithe of 100 GP anytime an object worth 1000 GP or more is bought or sold.

The people the PCs are trying to sell their loot to have to raise the money to pay their tax, so they will drop the price they are offering by 10% and cut 100gp off the top of the result. The magic item that was worth 5,000 GP? It’s now worth 4400 GP.

At the same time, princes on everything that the PCs buy have gone up 10%, plus 100 GP if the price-tag is high enough to trigger the tithe. That suit of fancier-than-usual plate mail that was 3000 GP? It’s now 3,400 GP.

Or, it might be that a curfew has been ordered, or a region placed under martial law, or prayers of thanks (and a donation to the temple of the PCs choice) might be ordered, or all sorts of other possibilities. We won the war, hooray! A day of celebration has been ordered, all businesses to close unless they are of a festive nature (apply for exemptions here by such-and-such a date and time).

Have you ever been in a city that’s home to a team who have just won a major sporting tournament (or progressed further than that team has ever gone before)? A kind of fever sweeps the populace. Decorations and team uniforms and souvenirs… okay, most won’t be able to afford non-mass-produced uniforms, but flags or something symbolic of the team like ribbons? They will be everywhere. And anyone not wearing one will be treated with suspicion and hostility.

Make the Background engage with the PCs, don’t wait for the PCs to engage with the Background – when and how that’s appropriate.

This simple technique can bring a dormant setting to life and make NPCs seem more real and more interesting. Keeping track of the Soft Time can be a bit of a pain, but it’s not all that complicated once you get used to it – and boy, are the results worth the effort.

An example

Summaries:

• Plot Arc 1: The PCs find a treasure
• Plot Arc 2: Political Shenanigans at Court
• Plot Arc 3: The Rounders – the most reviled team in the sport – come from nowhere in a dominant season.
• Plot “Arc” 4: Odds and Sods

Plot Arc 1: The PCs find a treasure (seeded into the loot from Adventure #1). NB: The events in this plot arc are not the primary binding agent of the campaign, they are a second plot thread that combines with or interacts with that narrative, whatever it is to be.

1. PCs recover a rare (magical) book in the course of adventure #1. None of them can read the text to know what they have. Identifying the book will require consulting a sage but there are none locally.
2. Unknown to the PCs, the book attracts monsters – anything within 1/2 mile per HD will be drawn to it, and will interact with the PCs as they normally would. They will describe it as a compulsion of some sort. Discovering this is the whole of Adventure #2.
3. In the regional capital, the book will summon thugs and thieves and cultists and dark priests and black wizards. The sage will put it behind wards to temporarily nullify the effect and ask for a week or two to study and research the tome. He can’t read the writing, either.
4. A cult (see above) kidnaps one of the PCs demanding the book be turned over to them. They believe it to be a holy work and a long-lost part of their faith, a lure to trap and kill the Gods. This will be a substantial part of Adventure #4.
5. Every Adventure until the book is dealt with will at some point involve contact with a higher-level monster as though they were still carrying the Book.
6. One of the most upright and virtuous Temples/Faiths will demand that the tome be handed over to them for destruction. They allege that it’s a Demon forced into this particular form by his superiors and designed to destroy virtue.
7. The PCs will discover that the siren call is interdimensional – it just takes longer to affect other-planar creatures.
8. The PCs will realize that possession of it has somehow tainted or cursed them. Attempting to get the curse lifted will reveal that it can corrupt the noble and pious, as the virtuous priest they consult about the curse attacks them instead of trying to lift the curse. This will be the focus of an adventure and mean that the PCs cannot trust the faith (see [6] above) to actually destroy it. The Sage will suggest that lifting the curse may require the book to be intact and in their presence, a second reason not to simply hand it over.
9. An order of Paladins will decree that failure to turn over the Tome for destruction as demanded (see [6] and [8] above) means that they are being corrupted by it and declare a crusade against them. In addition to [5] above, each adventure will also now involve an encounter with one or more members of this Order.
10. The sage completes his analysis but has been driven insane with a lust for power by overexposure to the Book despite his wards. The PCs have to attack and defeat him to acquire his notes. They reveal that both cultists and church are half-right and half-wrong, the book is designed to destroy anyone who possesses it, the creation of a nihilistic demon and bound by the Demon’s own flesh.
11. Dealing with the Book has to become the PCs top priority. But they are accused of the murder of the Sage and publicly listed as wanted criminals. It’s unsafe for them to remain anywhere near town as everyone resident there has started to become corrupted by its presence. This will be the focus of their next adventure.
12. The PCs have to decide where to go for help in dealing with the Book. They obviously can’t linger anywhere, and they will have to be careful in dealing with authority. They can choose (i) one of the mother Temples in the National Capital, (ii) a rumored Holy Ascetic who wandered into the mountains to pray 30 years ago and has not been seen since, or (iii) directly consulting the God of Knowledge on Plane [x] which means finding a way to reach Plane [x]. Travel to wherever they need to achieve the next step will be their next adventure.
13. Whoever they consult has to be forced to help them, unless it’s the God Of Knowledge himself. (i) they will be told of a way to destroy the book – casting it into the mouth of an active volcano which creates a river of fire that feeds into the Styx – in Hades. But that may not lift the Curse. (ii) The ascetic will tell them that their souls have been bound to the book, each of them now has their own page within its covers. Lifting the curse requires those pages (and only those pages) to be removed and the remaining book destroyed as above. He doesn’t trust the PCs to do this, and so attacks them. Nor does he know how the book can be destroyed. (iii) Whoever facilitates their journey to Plane [x] has to be forced to do so. The God Of Knowledge will provide both the answers of (i) and (ii).
14. The PCs have to consult a second source to get the rest of what they need to know. Either of the untapped sources can provide the missing puzzle piece (see above)
15. Before they can act on the knowledge just acquired, the PCs are attacked by a minor deity, ‘summoned’ by the Book. They can’t defeat an enemy of this power, but they can trick or deceive them or engage them in a battle with some other Deity long enough to flee.
16. Before the PCs can sneak into Hades in search of this Volcano, they will need a plan to deal with the Demon Princes / Arch-devils who the Book will compel. Whatever prep they decide to make will be another adventure in its own right.
17. AS PART OF THE SAME ADVENTURE, the PCs will be attacked by the Ghosts of the [NPCs] who were the last ones to possess the Tome and who travelled into the wilderness in a vastly remote location and committed suicide to hide it away forever, because they saw no other way to escape it’s taint. NB: These are not ordinary Ghosts, they are closer to intangible semi-Liches or Ringwraiths.
18. The PCs sneak into Hades in search of the Volcano and have to deal with a couple of the Demon Princes / Arch-devils as per their plans, above.
19. The PCs reach the Volcano only to be attacked by the creator of the book himself, who has acquired enough power by being back in Hades to manifest separately from it. He wants to seize the book from them and teleport it randomly to somewhere on the Prime Material Plane to start the process all over again. The only way to truly defeat him is to destroy the Book, but they will have to hold him off long enough to remove the last [n] pages with text on them, presuming these to be “their” pages. Cliffhanger ending leading to the second part which starts with the Destruction of the book.
20. The Book is destroyed but the volcano explodes as a result. The PCs and every resident of Hades not able to survive the wall of lava flowing downstream into the Styx has to flee, too busy to do anything but survive. These all now have a legitimate grievance against the PCs. Part 2 of the plot arc ‘finale’.
21. The PCs now need to force someone to remove the curses on the pages. To their horror, they discover that they have torn out one page too many, leaving a seed that will one day regenerate the entire book. Wherever they go for this treatment will be sacked / besieged by displaced residents of Hades seeking revenge. This forces whoever they have approached to set aside their natural enmity toward the PCs (because of the Curse and past events) long enough to relieve the Curse. They will be given a testiment by the High Priest absolving them of blame in the events surrounding the Book.
22. The PCs need to attend the King’s Court with the testament in order to get the civil charges against them dismissed. Plays into plot thread #2, below.
23. Every adventure thereafter, there is a 1-in-3 chance that a former Resident of Hades will try to destroy the PCs with whatever resources they have on hand.
24. Every adventure in which the above does not take place has a 1-in-2 chance that there will be some other spillover / consequences of the (temporary) destruction of Hades that impact the party.

Observations:
1. It can be harder to get started than once you get going.

2. It helps to have an idea going in, even if you remove or replace it. In the above example, I had the first two items and a vague idea about the third. Everything else was a logical consequence of those first two items, and world-building on the fly.

3. This plot is more immersive than it is supposed to be in terms of PC engagement, so it’s not a great example of what today’s article is all about, but it’s too interesting to discard. Whatever the main plotline of the campaign is going to be, it had better be pretty spectacular to keep this in the background!

4. After doing this one with a text editor, I would never attempt to do one with pen and paper – unless I had no other option. I lost count of the number of times something had to get moved up or down the list.

5. I didn’t do the step of setting the timetable because you need all four lists first.

Plot Arc 2: Court Intrigue starting small and growing more epicly melodramatic as it progresses, with a bit of inspiration from Robin Hood (amongst other sources) and a bit of international relations thrown in on the side.

1. A report sweeps the Kingdom when it alleges that quality Iron Ore is getting harder to find.
2. The Exchequer mints a new Gold Piece, worth the same as the old one but with different images sculpted onto it. But, in a bureaucratic stuff-up, there is a mispelling on the coins; they won’t be able to enter circulation for another month or so.
3. The Merchant’s Guild blocks a move by the Blacksmith’s Guild to increase the prices of steel products by forming an alliance of sorts with the Teamster’s Guild. This alliance wants to concentrate and coordinate supply so that ‘essentials’ get supplied first. Those out in the hinterlands will have to find a substitute, accept lower-grade ore, or do without.
4. There is a persistent rumor that the King’s Champion, Sir Lesley, has behaved inappropriately with the daughter of the Elvish Ambassador. Both parties deny any wrongdoing. Nevertheless, the Elvish Ambassador demands the removal of Sir Lesley from the court. He also sends his daughter back to the Elven Kingdom to remove her from temptation.
5. Sir Lesley is exiled to the fortress at Ispley on the Southern Border.
6. The Chancellor of the Exchequer increases tax rates 5%.
7. The Temples complain about the tax increases, fearing that the lack of reserves will impact donations to the Temples. As a result, many formerly-free services provided by the Temples will now have to attract a charge. This will be a hardship upon the people.
8. King Harold orders the Chancellor to justify the tax increases, and if capital is really needed, to look for some other way of raising the necessary revenue.

.

9. The Chancellor promises that the increases are only temporary, but are needed to establish a critical reserve of high-quality iron. This seems to confirm the rumor (see [1] above).
10. Positive news sweeps the Kingdom as it is announced that the Queen is with child for the first time. Soon, it is to be hoped, the Kingdom will have an heir!
11. The Elvish Ambassador advises the Court that Orcs have overrun the Dwarven stronghold at Kuzad. This blocks the roads between the Elvish and Human Kingdoms, and has displaced 5,000 Dwarves, who are in urgent need of resettlement. The Elves are doing their best despite the long antipathy between the two Kingdoms but if the pressure is not relieved quickly, matters may escalate out of control.
12. King Harold offers places in the Western Mines to the displaced Dwarves. This will take them far enough away from their lost stronghold that they will not throw lives away in a doomed attempt to recapture it, but keep them close enough that a joint expedition can be mounted if an opportunity exists.
13. The Chancellor increases the tax rate by another 5% to cover the cost of resettling the displaced Dwarves.
14. The temples announce a schedule of fees for previously free services. The smaller the service, the cheaper, but it is still going to cost money. It becomes policy to require clerics in the field to charge for the services they provide through faith on behalf of the temples. There is much grumbling.
15. The new Gold Pieces finally enter circulation. They are few and far between, and the rumor soon does the rounds that getting one in change means good luck.
16. Bandits sack the Red-gold Iron Mine. It will be months before it is again productive. A message left in the ruins of the barracks of the miners states that this is in protest at being forced to accommodate the Dwarves, and the taxes that doing so have imposed. Sir Duggan is sent to investigate.
17. Sir Duggan finds evidence that the ‘bandits’ were actually mine workers who over-reacted to a rumor that the Dwarves would take away their jobs.
18. The Temples offer to mediate between Dwarves and Locals, and to negotiate for the surrender of the ‘Bandits’ in return for a lighter sentence.
19. Orcs marching from the Kuzad Stronghold capture the Terrak Pass, blocking access to the Blue Fire Iron Mine. The Kingdom no longer has a source of high-quality iron. Prices of quality steel products immediately rise by 10% and smiths begin hoarding what high-quality steel they have.
20. King Harold announces a Quest to recapture the Terrak Pass, which he will lead personally (Quests are akin to Crusades but need not be religious in orientation). He accepts the offer of Temple mediation in the matter of the Red-gold Iron Mine Bandits.
21. King Harold leads an army of 2,000 men and 2,000 volunteer Dwarves out of the Capital, leaving his cousin Salin in charge. Salin is viewed as a weak ruler by the populace, but he is next in the line of succession and was a playmate of King Harold’s in his youth, so the King trusts him.
22. The Chancellor increases taxes another 10%, with Prince Salin’s blessing.
23. The Temples double the fees they have started to charge. It is made an excommunicatable offense for Clerics to provide faith-based services without charging the full fee demanded.
24. Small Bands of Bandits are reported to have sprung up in the region of the Lefthshares Forest.
25. It is reported that Orcish raiding parties have attacked the mills in four southern Duchies, capturing almost 1/3 of the yearly flour production. The price of flour, bread, and other baked goods doubles overnight.
26. Delegations of commoners complaining to Prince Salin are imprisoned on his orders to prevent the fomenting of unrest.
27. Delegations of commoners who want to protest the turn of events begin seeking audiences with the Queen instead of official channels.
28. There is a pitched battle at the Terrak Pass, costing the lives of 1/4 of the attackers without result. King Harold is wounded, and would have been killed were it not for the timely arrival of Sir Lesley and an additional 500 men.
29. The Temples report mounting unrest over taxes to the court. The leader of the Blacksmith’s Guild supplements the report with a blistering denunciation of the new taxes, and is immediately imprisoned for Treason by Prince Salin.
30. The Queen falls very ill. The Temples begin holding prayer vigils for her recovery, all over the Kingdom. Whatever the malady, it resists all their healing magic.
31. The young Price, hope of the nation, is stillborn. The Queen is also close to death. The Kingdom plunges into mourning without waiting.
32. An Orc Assassin attempts to kill King Roland but only scratches him. In the confusion, the assassin escapes, but a piece of Elvish jewelry is discovered where he was hiding.
33. A second attempt to recapture Terrak Pass costs the lives of 1/3 of the attackers. It came closer to success but still ultimately was unsuccessful. Sir Lesley blockades the roads leading to and from the Pass in an attempt to starve the Orcs out.
34. The King is suffering from a mysterious illness. Whatever the malady, it resists all magic healing. The temples put up a reward of 100,000 GP for anyone who can discover the nature of the illness and a cure in time. Descriptions of the Assassin, his tools and equipment, and the piece of Jewelry, are described in detail as the only clues. Every temple in the kingdom repeats the message, the reward, the symptoms, and the few clues available, every hour on the hour when the sun is up. It is certain that almost everyone in the Kingdom has heard about it after a couple of days.
35. The Queen dies from her illness.
36. Prince Salin, fearing the worst, begins making public plans for his own coronation.
37. In an attempt to make his accession to the throne more popular, Salin announces an amnesty for all crimes short of murder; hundreds will be released from Prison, including the ‘Bandits’ who sacked the Red-gold Iron Mine.
38. Sir Duggan brings one of the released prisoners to the PCs. He wants the PCs to chase down a clue that might lead to the reward being offered by the Temples – if so, then he wants an equal share of it. If the PCs agree, the prisoner reveals that the ‘bandits’ were paid to attack the mine workings by an odd duo – one was very tall and hardly spoke, while the other was shorter and seemed unable to speak louder than a whisper. The tall one dropped a piece of jewelry, but stopped to pick it up; the ‘Bandit’ saw it clearly. It matches the description of the one dropped by the Assassin. But the Red-gold Iron Mine is in the West Northwest, the fighting is all in the South southeast – a long distance apart – and there’s no way that either of the hooded and cloaked figures was an Orc, anyway; he was definitely human.
39. The slight wound at the hands of the assassin suggests some sort of poison. Everyone is tearing up every avenue of research into Orcs and their poisons, without success. The similarity of symptoms to the sickness that killed the Queen suggests a common cause, but she was nowhere near the fighting and there were no observed assassination attempts on her. If it was done at all, it had to be at Court in the Capital. The only humanoids of roughly human size but taller are Elves. There’s an Elvish Ambassador at Court. Maybe the Ambassador, or someone on his staff, are in a conspiracy to put Salin on the throne, and none of what’s happened is a coincidence. In which case, maybe the poison is an Elvish concoction. By sheer coincidence, the PCs are not far from the Kingdom of the Elves at the moment. Maybe if they nose around a bit, ask some careful questions, they might get somewhere.
40. If the PCs choose to investigate the Elves, they will learn (roleplay the investigation) that there is an infamous Drow poison whose symptoms match those described. It’s exceptionally rare, only someone very well connected in the Elvish Kingdom could get their hands on any. There is a reasonably common cure – mash up three seed pods of a Yellowbulb Tree, boil them, add the contents of an egg, mix well, and wait for it to solidify and float to the surface. With a cup, draw off the egg and discard it (and the poisons from the seed pods with it), leaving a clear bluish liquid. Three drops every three hours for a day will cure the poisoning, if the Drow poison was the cause.
41. Make the cure and a mad dash to where the King lies in his camp. Get put in the queue which contains every faith healer, folk healer, and medicine man in the Kingdom, each of whom has their own ‘sure-fire’ cure. By the time the PCs work their way to the front of the line, it may be too late – they have to find some way of jumping the queue.
42. The PCs cure works, but the King will be very weak for months. He might never fully recover, he was so close to death. The implications begin dawning on the PCs if they hadn’t done so already: Rare poison to which the Elvish Ambassador would have access. Same rare poison used by an Orc on the King. The Orcish military action to place the king in a vulnerable position. A mysterious Elf and a human partner stirring up unrest to draw off loyal members of the court. Sir Lesley, another loyal member of the court, exiled on the word of the same Ambassador. This whole situation has been engineered by the Elves for some reason. Perhaps the Assassin escaped because of other gifts of the Elves – cloaks and boots and what-have-you. But the Orcs have to know some of what’s going on – they wouldn’t be part of the conspiracy, just cat’s paws. Negotiating some sort of truce with them might permit details to slip out in conversation; they have suffered as much as the Quest in losses. The same thoughts have also been occurring to Sir Lesley; he can’t leave, he is now Commander in the Field. But he can send the PCs to negotiate a truce.
43. The PCs negotiations are successful, and in the process they learn that the Elves sent an Ambassador to the Orcs and made all sorts of promises if the Orcs would inconvenience the Dwarves and drive them out of the Stronghold at Kuzad. Once they had done so, the Elves reneged on the deal. The Orcs realized that they were vulnerable in the Stronghold unless they also controlled the major pass leading to it – Terrak Pass. They also needed food, being unequipped for a lengthy campaign, so they did what came naturally, and raided. They couldn’t go back home, through the Elvish Kingdom; they couldn’t move through the Human Kingdom; and they didn’t have the manpower to fight their way through the entire Dwarven Kingdom to get back home. They were trapped! If the PCs can guarantee safe passage, they will vacate the pass AND the citadel, handing them over to the Humans until the Dwarves that had been driven out can return. The Orc says that they were all paid in Gold to do what they did and shows a PC a Gold coin – one of the new designs, a design that wasn’t even in circulation when this bribe was paid – and this is the ultra-rare version with the spelling error that was never supposed to be circulated (though a few inevitably were). The only person with access to thousands of those coins was the Chancellor Of The Exchequer. The PCs can buy the gold coin (for two gold coins) to be able to prove their allegations.
44. The deal done, the Orcs vacate the field, watched closely by the army. When they are gone, Sir Lesley detaches a small force to hold the Citadel and the Pass, and instructs one of the men who is good at that sort of thing to draw up some better defensive structures for the Pass. He then takes the rest of the army – and the PCs, who he conscripts – to the Capital to put down the attempted coup and determine whether or not Salin is a figurehead or a conspirator. His plans are to assault the palace from the outside while the PCs sneak inside to discover what they can, and – once they know one way or another – to denounce the guilty in open court. Then fight their way out, if they have to.
45. Unless the PCs have a better idea, they have to attempt to carry out Sir Lesley’s plan. Investigation reveals Silas to be a barely-functioning idiot, in no way capable of this level of scheming, but very good at empty-headed formality. This is something that had been very carefully kept out of public knowledge. Nice dramatic moment at the court denouncing the Ambassador and Chancellor. One of the PCs notices that the head of the Merchant’s Guild looks very upset by these revelations and tries to edge his way out of the court without being noticed. He can choose to intercept him or stop him if he chooses. This draws attention to the attempted escape and prompts the Chancellor to accuse him of masterminding the whole thing. The Guild head counter-accuses the Chancellor and the whole accusation stands proven. Silas proves up to the job at least once – ordering the Defenders of the Castle to stand down and show the flag of surrender, and ordering the conspirators to be arrest for their crimes – including the murder of the Queen and the Heir of the Kingdom.

Observations:
1. Now, that’s more like it! 45 items means at least 45 game sessions, probably more if these events get spaced out. Some adventures will take only a game day, some could take a game week or more, after all.

2. The reputation that the PCs acquire over the early/mid campaign has to be enough that Sir Duggan will go to them at the right time; the fact that there are almost twice as many entries in this story as in the first means that there is plenty of time for such a reputation to be established, but the GM needs to make sure that Duggan’s move is justified, nevertheless.

3. Events start of small and… insignificant is the wrong term, but I can’t think of anything better at the moment. And slowly build in significance. And build, and build, until the PCs get pushed at the big finish to the plot arc – with an option to bail out and hear about the outcome from others. Assume that Sir Lesley assembles his own “spy force” to infiltrate if the PCs aren’t there.

4. Note however that some of those minor events early on become hugely significant by the end. The Ambassador sending his daughter home to get her out of the way, having used her to get Sir Lesley sent into exile; the bungled coin minting (if these had been circulated on schedule, there would be nothing provably significant in the orcs getting paid in them; it’s the delay that makes that damning).

5. Of course, the Elves using the Orcs as cat’s paws to interfere in the internal politics of another Kingdom is an act of War. The King is frail – so much so that he hasn’t even been told of the murder of his wife and son yet. There’s still plenty to unravel from this point – but that would be better handled in a new (and much shorter) plot arc that takes the place of this one, and again puts the narrative back into something to be followed in the ‘news’. There’s also the matter of rewards – I would think that noble titles from the King and the nice hunk of cash from the Temples should be enough, though. But that’s what I would probably build the next arc around – the domain(s) granted to the PCs as rewards, and the unexpected finds within them.

Plot Arc 3: The Rounders – the most reviled team in the sport – come from nowhere in a dominant season.

Roundball: An introduction

Roundball is the most popular sport in the Kingdom by several orders of magnitude. Amateur-league games are a weekly event for most of the year, there are semi-professional regional competitions, and there is an elite league of 64 teams. The sport is a basic get-the-ball-in-the-opposition’s-net game, but it’s the rules wrapped around this that make it distinctly different.

The game is divided into quarters. In one of these quarters, a team must have 5 players on the field, in another, 6, in a third, 8, and in a fourth, 10. Which order these occur in is decided at the start of a quarter by the team’s manager and strategist, but inevitably additional players will change the balance within the team – stronger defense, stronger attack, faster, more mobility in passing the ball, better able to stay upright when tackled and gain precious ground, and so on.

In addition, teams are allowed two substitutions per completed quarter, which they can use at any point in the game, and the number of times a team can be tackled before they have to hand over the ball to the other side changes with the number of players fielded – 8, 6, 5, 4, respectively. Tactics inevitably have to to change as a result – but you have no idea what configuration your opponents are going to use in the next quarter until both teams take the field. There is an instant scramble to adapt your game plan to counter theirs.

The game is fast-paced, tactically diverse, and wildly unpredictable. Better management of what resources you have on the field and using your substitutions strategically are the keys to success, but even well-laid plans still have to be executed successfully by the on-field players. There are lots of other rules, but the above are the heart and core of the game.

Series Structure of the Elite League

The competition is structured a bit like the world cup. Teams are placed by random draw into a series of pools. Each team has to play each other team in their pool twice, once at home and once at their home city or town. Victories earn points, scoring more than a certain threshold earns points, a higher score differential between the teams costs points, so the objectives of the game are for each one to be a tight contest; teams can lose the championship be being too dominant. There are all sorts of ways to earn bonus points (or give bonus points to the other side).

These points are then used to seed a second round and the tally board wiped clean. Again, teams are pooled, with all matches in pool A played first (those with the lowest accumulated points from the first round), then pool B, and so on. The top two teams from each pool get promoted into the next pool, and keep half their accumulated score from the previous pool, giving the worst teams an advantage that the better teams have to overcome. When the outcome of all pools is known, the teams are ranked according to the points earned. It is possible for the lowest-ranked team in pool A to fight its way into the next round of the series and even to go on to win the whole tournament. These games must be played in stadiums belonging to neither of the teams.

For the bottom half of the League, as scored this season, their seasons end here. The top half go into round 3 – which is a sudden death series. Actions which brought championship points in previous rounds now add to the scoreboard instead. Teams are seeded into the contest in order of their ranking in round 2, so the two teams with the lowest scores face off, and then the next two lowest scores, and so on. In rounds 3 and 4, the lower-ranked team gets the home-field advantage. Those who win their matches advance to round four, then round five, at which point the top four teams have survived and the rest culled.

The semifinals pit the weakest team against the second-best team and the second-weakest team against the strongest, with the stronger teams given a points handicap that they have to overcome in order to win the game. These handicaps are the average differential in points scored per game – so being dominant in the knockout rounds only makes it harder for you to win the championship and introduces an uncertainty that makes even one-sided contests exciting. Can the best team overcome their handicap, or will the underdog survive? These matches are always played at stadiums in the capital who have to secretly bid for the rights to host. The revenues from the winning bids fund the competition for the coming year and the administration of the sport. There is a reserve pool of money kept at a fixed 10,000 GP and a separate pool of 1,000 GP per player (cumulative) that is used to support families who lose a player through on-field accident. Any revenues in excess of these three amounts are payed into the prize pool.

The losers of the semifinals then play off for third and fourth place in the series, respectively. Once that outcome has been determined, the grand final pits the two winning teams against each other. But there is a catch: both these teams have to outscore the teams from the playoff match or they will be relegated to below those teams in the final competition result. This forces the teams in the grand final to go all out for a crushing victory. The more successful they are at that, the more they suppress the other team, the more likely that team will be relegated to third or perhaps even fourth place. But both teams are trying to achieve this at the same time, so it’s never that easy.

There are 64 teams in all. These are organized into pools of 8, so each team plays 14 games in round 1, a total of 64/2 x 14 = 448 games. 32 of those games occur on any given restday, so round 1 lasts 14 weeks.

Round 2 sees a new game played daily, There are 8 teams in Pool A, and will be 8+2 teams in Pools B through H. So there are 7 Pool A games and 9 games from each of the other pools for a total of 70 games in 70 days – another 10 weeks of Roundball, for a season length (so far) of 24 weeks.

Round 3 is the top 32 getting paired off, so there are 16 games played over 4 restdays (ie 4 weeks). Round 4 is the top 16 getting paired off, so there are 8 games played over 4 restdays (ie another 4 weeks). Round 5 is the top 8 being paired off so there are 4 games played over 2 restdays (another 2 weeks). So these rounds take a total of 10 more weeks, bringing the season length to 34 weeks.

There is traditionally a 2 week buildup to the semifinals, which are played on the same restday. These are then played on successive restdays, extending the season to 37 weeks.

That’s followed by another 2 week gap to the playoff match and a week later is the grand final, so the whole season is 41 weeks in length.

Prize money

Gambling on games is strongly regulated and restricted. Each registered bookie has a bespoke bookkeeper-accountant assigned to them by the Exchequer who monitors both money in and payouts. They have no control over the odds being set by the bookie, but ensure that the payout matches the odds accepted by the gambler. 5% of all profits made after the winners are paid out goes to the Crown (on top of any tax) to cover the expense of the bookkeeper-accountants, and another 5% is paid to the Roundball League to form the basis of the annual prize pool. 1 SP profit on 25000 gambles a week (kingdom-wide), average, = 25,000 SP; 5% of which is 1250 SP = 125 GP per week. In later parts of the series, the number of gambles gets smaller but the amount increases. The semi-finals and finals see an increase in gambles and a further increase in stakes, so these 4 games bring in 8x the revenue, or 1000 GP.

As a rough estimate, then the prize pool is 34 x 125 + 1000 = 5250 GP per year. The prize pool is divided into 4,447.92 shares.

Every participating team gets paid according to final rankings. The lowest-ranked team gets one share; each team higher up the ladder gets 1 1/10 the payout of the team placed below it. If two or more teams tie, their payouts are totaled and evenly divided so that the next team up the ladder gets the benefit of beating the extra teams. The top team therefore gets a payout 405.27 times that of the lowest ranked team, an average of 478.35 GP a year. Management and owners take 1/2, the rest is divided amongst the 20-30 players on each team; the methods vary from one team to another. So the average player on the top team can expect to earn around 9.56 GP per year.

This is obviously not enough – not when skilled labor earns a GP a week. Team sponsorship and paid-for public appearances provide the bulk of a team’s financing, and they also get 1/2 of the entry fees to the stadiums at which they are playing. The first earns about 10x as much as the prize pool and the latter twenty-five times. It is not uncommon for the wealthier teams to actually own their home stadiums, doubling the revenue the team gets from entry fees – but they then have to pay maintenance on the facility. By and large, these are proportionate to the revenue share from the prize money, because that’s based on the team’s ranking, but this equivalence is vague and approximate.

Theses sources boost the average pay per player per year to around 172 GP – on the top team – or 42 1/2 silver pieces for those on the bottom. But not all players are equal, and an elite player may earn 5-8 times this much – at the expense of their teammates.

Roundball teams are eternally agitating for a bigger share of the gambling revenues, but the League are determined to keep this a minor part of the income stream to the teams fearing corruption. Which brings us to the backstory of the Rounders.

The Rounders

Twenty-four years ago, the Rounders were the team to beat, Stronger, faster, more agile, more tactical – they had it all. And yet, this particular year, they didn’t seem to quite gel on the field, and many victories were far narrower than they should be. Half-way through the season, it was discovered that the three key players in the team, the play-makers, were cheating, deliberately setting the team up to narrowly fail to make the playoffs. This deliberately sacrificed almost 1/3 of what the club could expect to make, but these players had wagered thousands of GP at almost 10 to 1 odds that the team would fail.

One player had a little too much to drink, got rolled in a back alley by a footpad, and complained to the town watch about the theft – despite having spent up bigger than he could justify in anticipation of the payday to come. When the watch investigated, one rotten domino fell after another and the scandal enveloped the series.

The Rounders were treated harshly by the League, forfeiting all fees, fined all revenues earned for the year, and their every remaining game in the season declared a loss. The players involved all went to prison for long terms – the mastermind only being released 4 years ago – and the team became the most hated by fans throughout the Kingdom. Most of the remaining players quit the team at the end of the season; the team were forced to recruit an all-new lineup for the following year’s contest.

Strangely enough, this notoriety has been working in their favor, little by little, as it almost certainly brings the fans of whatever rival team they face out in droves, and this has enabled them to slowly rebuild. But it also means that their rivals go the extra mile to beat them, so year after year, they have struggled to get much beyond the third round.

Over the last five years, then-new manager Ryan Kempler has been strategically investing in up-and-coming players and this year he hopes that it will all come together. He has a master plan to take the series…

The Master Plan

Kembler has recruited and nurtured four players that he thinks are ready to become the best in the League at their own specialized roles – play-maker, scorer, driving fullback, and defender. He has been secretly training them to mesh tactics in combined plays.

He has divided the contest into teams that he thinks are likely to make the third round and teams that aren’t, plus a group in the middle.

Against the weaker teams, he will play 10 in the first quarter, 5, 6, and 8. The goal will be to establish a strong lead early and then defend it until it’s just enough. He will bring on one of his stars (but only one) at some point in the last three periods to control the pace of the game. His goal is to win 2/3 of these games; that alone should be enough to get them into the lower ranks of the 32.

Against the stronger teams and the more uncertain ones, he will adopt a 8, 5, 6/10, 10/6 strategy. One of his stars will play in the first half, and he may replace them with another in the second half. He doesn’t mind losing 2/3 of these games, but would prefer to win 1/2 of them without showing his full hand. If the team are ahead at the end of the first half, he will go with the 6 and then 10 configuration, if not, the 10 and then 6. Star Power will be employed as necessary.

That should be enough to lift the Rounders into the top 16, but not much better than that.

When the knockouts arrive, the strategies will change, and a reassessment of the profile of the opponents be made. You can’t afford to lose ANY of these games, but you also can’t afford to win by too much. So the strategy will be 5, 6, 8, 10, starting with one of his stars and adding a second in the second half. Which stars will depend on the tactics he expects from the other team.

All these strategies will be subject to refinement and change based on their opponents – if they have a habit of fielding their biggest team in the first quarter, for example, or play a really good game with few players early on. At this point, the pool draw has not yet been announced, so he can’t plan more specifically.

The goal will be to advance to the semifinals in 7th position and scrape into the finals in last – without showing off any of the coordinated tactics and combinations he’s been drilling into his star players. In the playoff game, it will be no-holds barred to set a score that will withstand both the more highly-placed teams in the grand final who will tear each other down enough that neither can overcome the benchmark set by the Rounders.

Will it work? That remains to be seen.

Delivering the rules / backstory

None of this will be known to the players at the start of the campaign. It will get broken up and fed to them when it becomes relevant. But it was necessary to get the concepts together in advance.

Final Decision

The final decision to be made is whether or not the Rounders are the team local to where the PCs start play or if they are based elsewhere. There are benefits to both options. If they are based elsewhere, are they part of the same pool as the local team this year?

Being able to introduce the Rounders early on lets their backstory get broken up and delivery of it to the players spread out a little more, so either they are in the local pool or they are the local team.

If they are the local team, the fans will start out supporting every other team out there and willing their team to lose; only as their campaign gathers momentum will they start to rebuild their local fan-base.

An on-field moment of some kind in which the Rounders refuse to take advantage of a rival’s mistake even though the rules say they can, because they don’t want to win in an unsportsmanlike manner will be a pivotal turning point in this respect, finally erasing some of the old taint.

If they aren’t the local team, then there will be lots of opportunity to get the players comfortable with the game itself before the historical element gets presented to the players; if they are, then it will be front and center from mention one. So I think they are not the local team, they are from somewhere some distance away.

Oh, and one more thought: teams should alternate between home games and away games.

With that sorted, I can begin mapping out the sequence of events, starting with the draw and introducing the format to the players.

Then there’s the pre-game 1 buildup as fans discuss their prospects for the coming year, and the other teams in the pool – giving the first hint of the old scandal.

For the next three or four games, the pattern will be the same: the outcome of the game, where it leaves the local team standing within the pool, and who their next game is against, and whether or not it’s a home game. The PCs can vicariously ride the roller-coaster of ups and downs inherent in a contest designed to make easy wins a disadvantage.

Then they will be scheduled to come up against the Rounders. Backstory time, which should build interest in the game. Note that by now, the PCs will have relocated to the regional capital at least temporarily, so ‘the local team’ may have changed.

Outcome of the match – the Rounders lose, but not by much. Celebrations all around, the local heroes having put everybody’s villains ‘in their place’. Next game will be against one of the strongest teams in the entire league.

Complete the round through until it is the Rounders turn to host the local team. This is the time to pull that ‘sportsmanlike’ event out of the hat. From that point on, there will be a slow growth of fans for the Rounders as their ‘second favorite team’ (after the locals, of course).

Finish the round, randomly roll results for the other pools, allowing for the relative strength of the teams, map out Round 2, and so on.

Unfortunately, I’m running out of time to get this article finished and ready for posting – which is why I’ve described what I would do instead of actually doing it – which would take four or five times longer, time that I just don’t have.

But that’s not necessarily a bad thing, as I’ve given readers everything they need to know to be able to do it as practice.

Jumping Into The Middle

While this approach would be at its best if introduced from the very start of a campaign, it’s almost never too late to add it to the mix. You’re just starting stories in the middle, usually with some of the groundwork already established, but if you need to start a new plot thread, so be it. Just make it a shorter one, to match the anticipated length of the campaign.

And The River Rolls On… Continuing Campaigns

Not all campaigns are designed with a predetermined end point. Some are cyclic, with characters coming and going regularly; others just carry on into Epic Levels if and when the players get that far.

This tool – and that’s what it is, a background enhancement tool, a background ‘animator’ if you will – can be just as effective; the second example plot arc shows the way. One plot arc ends, and another begins. That’s all there is to it.

Many authors have tried to explain how vast space, and the universe contained within it, really are, usually with less than total success, though with each attempt, some few are reached. This is both something that Sci-Fi GMs need to understand and yet, often hand-wave. I have thought of another approach, one that is strictly game-oriented. It may not work, but it’s worth a shot.

This is the latest in my series of time-out posts in between the Trade In Fantasy series.

There are three fundamental principles to my approach, and explaining them would be a good way to start. But I suspect that their meaning won’t be fully understood until we get into actual measurements, at which point hopefully it all becomes blindingly obvious.

1. A Nested Hierarchy Of Distance

Space is subdivided into a nested series of scales. Efficiency in transiting these scales requires new technologies each time the scale changes, though it is usually possible to employ a less-efficient transit technology – there is some overlap in principle.

The difficulties and hazards change as a new scale is reached, and these require navigational skills that match the engineering appropriate to that scale. I’m going to do my best to avoid actually spelling out the technologies concerned, leaving the system to be adapted to whatever sub-genre best fits the individual GM’s setting and campaign. This time around, for this particular GM, it might be some sort of interstellar Jump; next time, it might be Warp Drive; and so on.

2. A Fundamental Unit

The minimum distance of a scale is defined by the limit of the scale preceding it. Mastering the principles of this scale may or may not imply as a prerequisite the mastering of the preceding scale; different game systems will support different approaches to the question. Nor is it necessary or appropriate for this to be consistent; the greater the difference in technology required relative to what has gone before, the less transferable skills will be and the more likely a completely different approach required.

Fundamentally, each scale is measured in a new series of units, and the count of such units within the scale resets at ‘1’ each time.

3. Powers Of Five, or Two, or Three

The distances of a scale, measured in Units, require a technological / navigational improvement at regular intervals. each improvement level is known as a tech level or sub-level within the technology required for that particular scale. Each improvement permits maneuvering and transit at an exponential increase over the number of units.

CORRECTION: The following text, which originally followed the above, now needs to be taken with a grain of salt:

My default is going to be powers of five, because that’s what my instincts are telling me should work – but it may be necessary to employ other exponents along the way. I’ll do so as necessary.

In actual fact, i ended up using powers of 2, 3, and 4 a lot more than I did 5 – so much so that 3-exponent is probably best considered the default.

.

I don’t really want there to be more than a couple of handfuls of tech sub-levels within each scale, to keep the numbers manageable. My preference will be to introduce a new scale before ‘sub-level 21’ is reached – but, at the same time, I want each sub-level to achieve a noteworthy increase in the distances that can be transited.

All clear? I didn’t think so, but getting into the scales themselves should make everything fairly clear.

The Planetary Scale

Space starts at the Karman Line, defined as 100 km (62 miles) above sea level. This altitude defines the point at which aerodynamic lift can no longer be the primary means of flight and orbital mechanics takes over.

Anything short of this distance is a distance (vertically) on the Planetary Scale.

The unit at this scale is the Wright. One Wright is an altitude (powered flight) of 6.4m (21 feet).

Public domain image depicting the first flight by the Wright Brothers, courtesy of Wikimedia Commons.

Aircraft 1 = 1 Wright

The Wright Brother’s first flights were about 0.5 Wrights in altitude. The presumption is made that they stayed relatively flat and level to maintain control of the aircraft and could have actually flown higher – with greater risk of control loss.

Aircraft 2 = 5 Wrights = 32m

Aircraft 3 = 25 Wrights = 160m

Between 1906 and 1908, the altitude record was officially just 4m, or 0.625 Wrights. In the latter year, piloting a biplane, Wilbur Wright dramatically raised the record to 110m (17.2 Wrights), and 7 months later, this record was improved again to 150m (23.5 Wrights). It seems likely that at some point in between, a limit of 5 wrights was reached but no-one actually undertook an attempt.

Aircraft 4 = 125 Wrights = 800m

Late in 1909, another dramatic step forward saw the altitude record for powered flight increased to 920m.

Aircraft 5 = 625 Wrights = 4 km (13000 feet)

In 1910 the record increased multiple times, ending the year at 3497m. The next time it was reset was in 1912, to 5610m, another massive step forward.

It’s at this point that air travel becomes commercially viable for both cargo and passengers. The early steps were halting stumbles, but improvements in the technology followed, notably the DC3 and beyond.

After the heady rush of the early flights, and the steady progression of records being set and broken, this sub-scale would hold sway for many years; the technology was improved and refined, becoming more efficient and successful. It also seems likely that interest in altitude records per se declined in favor of speed records.

Aircraft 6 = 3125 Wrights = 20 km (65, 600 feet)

It wasn’t until 1949 that an aircraft exceeded 3125 Wrights in altitude, when an experimental air-launched rocket plane, the Bell X-1, did so, setting an unofficial record. Two years later, another unofficial record extended the window; it was not until 1953 that this limit was officially breached, when an English Electric Canberra B 2 Turbojet got to 20,079m. By now, the unofficial record (set with rocket power) was 27,570m and before the next non-rocket record was set in 1958, at 23, 451m, the rocket-powered or assisted record stood at 38, 491m.

(Aircraft 7 = 15625 Wrights = 100km (62 miles))

Everything in aviation since the early 1950s, in terms of altitude limits, falls into this sub-scale. Records past this time tend to split hairs – horizontal flight, crewed or unmanned, propeller-driven, and so on. What becomes more important at this scale is not the record altitude, but the cruising altitude.



Image by Julian Herzog via Wikimedia Commons. Released under the Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International license.

The Boeing 747 Jumbo cruised at between 35,000 and 40,000 feet. The 767 added another 1,000 feet to the top of that. These are both Aircraft-5 ratings.

The cruising altitude of an airbus A320 is 31,000 to 37,000 feet. It has a service ceiling of 39,100 feet, the absolute maximum altitude that it can achieve. The A380 cruises at 43,000 feet.

Even Concorde only approaches the limits of Aircraft 5 in this respect, with a cruising altitude of 55,000 to 60,000 feet.

Beyond Aircraft 5, greater altitude requires special designs that are not commercially viable. The SR-71 Blackbird cruises at 85,000 feet (25,908m) and is a true Aircraft 6 design. Getting to Aircraft 7 requires rockets, and they operate even more efficiently at even higher altitudes.

If atmospheric pressure were greater, lift could be increased and greater altitudes might become possible, but wind resistance would also increase, and, honestly, you’re looking at a gimmick or marketing exercise or different technology (non-commercial) for most of Aircraft 6.

Aircraft 7 is the upper limit of this scale, as we transition to the Orbital Scale.

The Orbital Scale

From 100km up, we’re talking about the orbital scale, the unit of which is the Oberth. 1 Oberth = 100 km. Oberths use exponential powers of 4, not 5.

There can be other limits used. The US defines the Orbital Scale as starting at 50m (80km), for example.

Orbital 1 = 100 km – 400 km (1-4 Oberths)

Up until 400 km, significant air resistance will cause rapid orbital decay if unchecked. These altitudes are considered “Transatmospheric“. They are of limited practical value because of the air resistance, but may be used as a stepping-stone to higher orbital types.

This sub-level also includes terms such as “Very Low Earth Orbit” and “Suborbital” flight paths. Anything below 160km is generally considered Suborbital; VLEO orbits (160km-400 km) are used for Earth observation, radar, infrared, weather, telecommunications, and rural internet.



Artwork by Russ Arasmith for NASA depicting Project Gemini spacecraft and astronaut, date unknown. Image courtesy of Wikimedia Commons, public domain.

Orbital 2 = 400 km – 1,600 km (4-16 Oberths)

Low Earth Orbit has a very precise definition in terms of period (128 minutes or less) and eccentricity (less than 0.25). Most satellites are in Low Earth Orbit, peaking at around 800km in altitude – but LEO is considered to extend up to 2000 km, putting the outer reaches of LEO into the Orbital 3 sub-level.

Starlink satellites orbit at approximately 550 km, and are amongst the lowest LEO orbits in use.

The inner Van Allen radiation belt starts at around 1000km (10 Oberths) and extends to about 12000km (well into the Orbital 4 sub-level).

Orbital 3 = 1,600 km – 6,400 km (16-64 Oberths)

2000 km marks the entirely arbitrary dividing line between LEO and Medium Earth Orbit. MEOs extend all the way up to Geostationary Orbit (35,786 km). They are defined as having orbital periods of between 2 hours and 24 hours – and yes, that does create a small overlap with LEOs.

This subcategory falls completely within the Van Allen Radiation Belts. Other names for this type of orbit are Mid-Earth Orbit and Intermediate Circular Orbit.

The primary distinction between LEOs and MEOs is that the dominant cause of non-gravitational perturbations of the orbits is solar radiation pressure in an MEO, while atmospheric traces are dominant in an LEO.

This sub-level describes the lower region of MEOs.

When satellites in this sub-level reach the end of their operational life, it is generally cheaper to de-orbit them, permitting them to burn up in the atmosphere. The expectation of this mission terminus plays a critical role in designing those satellites, forbidding such things as nuclear power supplies.

Orbital 4 = 6,400 km – 25,600 km (64-256 Oberths)

The upper region of MEOs is contained almost completely within this sub-level. As such, it is relatively sparsely populated by satellites in comparison to sub-level 3.

The design restrictions on upper MEO satellites are far less restrictive because these are orbits it which it becomes cheaper to put satellites at their end-of-life into a graveyard orbit rather than letting them fall back to earth after a de-orbital maneuver.

Orbital 5 = 25,600 km – 102,400 km (256-1024 Oberths)

Anything aimed at Geostationary orbit that doesn’t quite get there is in the lowest part of this sub-level. Geostationary orbit itself is roughly Orbital 5.133. No orbit above this is considered stable.

A few hundred km further out is a region designated as a Graveyard orbit for defunct satellites; the thrust required to reach these orbits is a lot less than than that required to completely de-orbit a satellite.

Anything with an orbital period of a day or more is defined as being in High Earth Orbit, which are subdivided into a number of complicated designations: Geostationary (GEO), Geosynchronous (GSO), Geostationary Transfer Orbits (GTO), Highly Elliptical Orbits (HEO), and Near-Rectilinear Halo Orbits (NRHO). You don’t have to know what any of these are, really, aside from the obvious and well-known Geostationary and Geosynchronous.

GEOs remain in orbit above a fixed position on the Earth. GSO orbits do not, but they cycle back around to the same fixed point each day.

Satellites in these orbits are used for communications, navigation, scientific research, and of course, military applications.

All Orbits above 357.68 Oberths are eccentric to some degree. That means that they have a significant difference between perihelion and aphelion, the lowest and highest points of their orbit. Which means that periodically, the sun and moon will exert more gravitational force on them at other times because the orbital path will align with those bodies; this creates the instability referred to.

The maximum altitude of High Earth Orbit is another purely-arbitrary number. As the peak aphelion increases, so does the instability – with exceptions resulting from the mass of the orbiting object. There’s no danger of the Moon suddenly wandering off.

Local Interplanetary Scale

I define one unit on this scale as what would be Orbital 6, if such a thing existed, i.e. 102,400 km. I have named the units Lunars.

This scale also uses 4-exponential scale (actually, ideally, it would use exponential-3.5, but that’s too messy and complicated). The midpoint of gravitational attraction between earth and the moon depends on the relative masses – about 80-to-1 in the Earth’s favor, so the midpoint is roughly 1/80th of the distance.

The moon’s orbit has a minimum distance of 363,300 km; 79/80ths of this is 358,758.75 km. And that’s almost exactly 3.5 Lunars.

Oh well.

Local Interplanetary 1: 1 Lunar (102.4 Kkm) – 4 Lunars (409.6 Kkm)

The minimum distance from the earth at which a gravitational field other than that of the planet becomes dominant is, as stated, 358,758.75 km. That happens at 3.5 Lunars.

The moon has a maximum distance from Earth of 405,696 km (3.96 Lunars); the average is 384,400, which is often rounded down to 384,000 or up to 385,000 (because 600km difference at this scale is almost trivial). Call it 3.754 Lunars.

This scale is all about traveling from one planetary body to another, and the entire history of manned spaceflight (so far) is 4 Lunars or less.



Footprint of Buzz Aldrin on the moon. Public domain courtesy of Wikimedia Commons.

Local Interplanetary 2: 4 Lunars (409.6 Kkm) – 16 Lunars (1638.4 Kkm)

Earth-grazing asteroids and dangerous comets.

Local Interplanetary 3: 16 Lunars (1638.4 Kkms) – 64 Lunars (6.5536×10^6 km)

Not very much at all.

Local Interplanetary 4: 64 Lunars (6.5536×10^6 km) – 256 Lunars (2.62144×10^7 km)

Not very much at all.



Image by Wikipedia user Brian0918, Public Domain, courtesy of Wikimedia Commons, rotated & reoriented by Mike

Local Interplanetary 5: 256 Lunars (2.62144×10^7 km) – 1024 Lunars (1.05×10^9 km)

Venus, at its closest to earth, is 390.6 Lunars away.
Mars, at its closest, is 537.1 Lunars away.
Mercury is, at best, 752 Lunars away.

Local Interplanetary 6: 1024 Lunars (1.05×10^9 km) – 4096 Lunars (4.2×10^9 km)

The sun is 1362.3 Lunars away (=1 AU).

The Asteroid Belt sort of fades in and then fades out, without clearly-defined limits. The Core of the belt starts about 2.06 AU out and ends 3.27 AU out, so it straddles the change of scale. 2.06 AU is about 2812.6 Lunars away.

The 4096 Lunars limit of this sub-level is equivalent to 3.0068 AU – call it 3AU.

That’s long enough to reach a counter-earth (if there really was one) without cooking ourselves along the way.

Outer Interplanetary Scale

The boundary between inner and outer solar system is generally considered to be Jupiter. But that doesn’t quite fit our scale, so 1 unit of this scale is 3 AU. I have named these units Bouvards after the mathematician who predicted the planet Neptune from orbital irregularities of Uranus – because I don’t think he gets enough credit for his role in exploring the outer solar system.

From this point on, it becomes less relevant to think of the distance from Earth to an object and more relevant to consider the distance from the sun; by definition, this adds an error rate of ±1 AU, or 0.33 Bouvards, to the measurements.

I have chosen to use 3-exponential for this scale.

Outer Interplanetary 1: 1 Bouvard (3 AU) – 3 Bouvards (9 AU)

The outer edge of the core of the asteroid belt is 3.27 AU from the Sun, or 1.09 Bouvards.



This is an excerpt from a public domain image showing the relative sizes of the planets. Image courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

Outer Interplanetary 2: 3 Bouvards (9 AU) – 9 Bouvards (27 AU)

At its most distant, Jupiter is 3.957 AU or 1.33 Bouvards away from the Earth.

Saturn’s most extreme position is 10.27 AU or 3.42 Bouvards from the Earth.

Uranus is about 20.5 AU, or 6.83 Bouvards away.

That’s three of the four gas giants.

Outer Interplanetary 3: 9 Bouvards (27 AU) – 27 Bouvards (81 AU)

Neptune is about 30.06 AU out, or 10.02 Bouvards.



Image of the Kuiper Belt by the European Southern Observatory released into the Public domain, courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

From that distance and out to 50 AU (16.7 Bouvards) is the Kuiper Belt, and home to comets and dwarf planets like Pluto.

Outer Interplanetary 4: 27 Bouvards (81 AU) – 81 Bouvards (243 AU)

Nothing known.

Outer Interplanetary 5: 81 Bouvards (243 AU) – 243 Bouvards (729 AU)

Nothing known.

Outer Interplanetary 6: 243 Bouvards (729 AU) – 729 Bouvards (2,187 AU)

The inner edge of the Oort Cloud is just barely inside this range at 667 Bouvards.

Outer Interplanetary 7: 729 Bouvards (2,187 AU) – 2,187 Bouvards (6,561 AU)

Oort Cloud.

Outer Interplanetary 8: 2,187 Bouvards (6,561 AU) – 6,561 Bouvards (19,683 AU)

More Oort Cloud.

Outer Interplanetary 9: 6,561 Bouvards (19,683 AU) – 19,683 Bouvards (59,049 AU)

Still more Oort Cloud.

Outer Interplanetary 10: 19, 683 Bouvards (59, 049 AU) – 59,049 Bouvards (177, 147 AU)

The outer edge of the Oort Cloud is roughly thought to be 100,000 AU out (33,333 Bouvards) – but some estimates double that. Nevertheless, the outer limit of this scale is big enough to encompass most, if not all, of it.

The inner limit of this sublevel is 0.9337 light-years from Earth, and the outer is 2.8 light-years from Earth. You may also hear or read the term parsec used from time to time; 2.8 light years is 0.858484 parsecs.

This is the outer edge of our solar system, so far as we know. If Alpha Centauri has an Oort Cloud the size of the Earths (and we have no real reason to assume otherwise), it’s outer edge also falls into this sublevel (just barely) at 2.62 light-years or 55,253 Bouvards. Our Oort Clouds would be only 1.04 light years apart.

Unless the 200,000 AU people are right, in which case our Oort cloud would be partially inside theirs and vice-versa….

Local Interstellar Scale

2.8 light-years is one Romer, named for the first person to calculate the Speed Of Light in a Vacuum; Romer’s value stood for 54 years as the best that science could do. Sub-levels on this scale are 2-exponent.

Local Interstellar 1: 1 Romer (2.8 ly) – 2 Romer (5.6 ly)

Alpha Centauri, the closest significant star to Earth, is 4.2 light years away, right in the sweet spot for this range.

Local Interstellar 2: 2 Romer (5.6 ly) – 4 Romer (11.2 ly)

Barnard’s Star, the second-closest star to Earth, is in this sub-level. But so are 13 other stars, including Wolf 359 (well-known to Star Trek fans), Epsilon Eridani, and Sirius, the brightest star in the night sky. Between them, those 13 stars have 14 known or possible planets – so far.

Local Interstellar 3: 4 Romer (11.2 ly) – 8 Romer (22.4 ly)



A spatial representation of every star within 14 light-years of Sol. Image by Inductiveload, released into the public domain, courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

Alpha Canis Minoris (aka Procyon) – 11.4 ly.
61 Cygni – 11.4 ly.
Epsilon Indi – 11.9 ly.
Tau Ceti – 11.9 ly.
70 Ophiuchi – 16.7 ly.
Altair – 16.7 ly.
Alsafi (Sigma Draconis) – 18.8 ly.
Eta Cassiopeiae – 19.33 ly.
G Eridani – 19.7 ly.
Delta Pavronis – 19.893 ly.

Plus another 68 solar systems within 20 ly of Earth. And another 34 beyond that, the most significant of which are HD219134 and Xi Bootis, at 21.3 and 22 ly, respectively..

Local Interstellar 4: 8 Romer (22.4 ly) – 16 Romer (44.8 ly)

Vega – 25 ly.
Fomalhaut – 25.1 ly.
Pollux – 33.7 ly.
Arcturus – 36.7 ly.
Capella 42.9 ly.
And hundreds more.

Local Interstellar 5: 16 Romer (44.8 ly) – 32 Romer (89.6 ly)

Castor – 51 ly.
Aldebaran – 65 ly.
Regulus – 79 ly.
Mizar – 83 ly.
And thousands more.

Local Interstellar 6: 32 Romer (89.6 ly) – 64 Romer (179.2 ly)

Algol – 93 ly.
K2-18b -120 ly
Markab – 140 ly.
And thousands more.

Radio was invented in 1896, but the power was quite until part of the 1936 Olympics in Berlin were transmitted using an early TV transmitter. That signal has now traveled some 89 light years and has just entered this sub-level. If the earlier signals were detectable (not impossible), they are now 129 light years away and approaching the mid-point of the sub-level.



This is an artist’s impression of the Milky Way Galaxy according to the latest information we have, which I have edited to (a) drop in an enlargement, and (b) mark on that enlargement just how minuscule 129 light years is. Original image by NASA (public domain) courtesy Wikimedia Commons. If you can’t find it, I assure you that it’s there – but that rather proves my point, don’t you think?

K2-18b is significant because, from earth, we have been able to detect gasses in its atmosphere that so far as we know are only produced by simple life forms. That means that from that far away, our equivalents could detect life on earth through its chemistry. They would currently be looking at the earth as it was 120 years ago, in 2025-120=1905, by which time significant pollution would be in the atmosphere; sometime over the next 50 years or so, it would become completely clear that the place was either (a) extraordinarily unlikely, or (b) home to a technological civilization.

And that’s what this scale is all about. I’ve erred on the side of caution by suggesting that the signs of intelligent life might be detectable from even further out – the limits of the scale below are 358.4 ly, which would mean anyone observing earth would now be looking at the year 1666. I think that would be pushing credibility beyond breaking point, but somewhere between that and the 32 Romer lower limit of this sub-level, it becomes possible.

Local Interstellar 7: 64 Romer (179.2 ly) – 128 Romer (358.4 ly)

Izar – 202 ly.
Spica – 250 ly.
Bellatrix – 250 ly.
Canopus – 310 ly.
Acrux – 320 ly.

And probably tens of thousands more.

Regional Interstellar Scale

358.4 light years is one Herschel, named after the astronomer who did more to establish the shape of the galaxy than any other (even if he did get some details wrong).

The major difference between Regional Interstellar distances and Local Interstellar Distances is that we are more interested in noteworthy and unusual stellar phenomena and not so much in ordinary stars.

For the RI scale, I’m going back to 2-exponential because the distances involved here grow really big really fast, but anything larger is too coarse a measurement at low levels..

Regional Interstellar 1: 1 Herschel (358.4 ly) – 2 Herschels (716.8 ly)

The closest known Pulsar to Earth is 398 ly away – a mere 1.11 Herschels. The next closest is just outside this sub-level.

Betelgeuse is 408-548 or maybe 640 light years away. Everything in that distance is securely in this sub-level.

The Pleiades, one of the closest star clusters to Earth, is only 444 light years away.

Polaris is at a distance of 430 light years, while Antares is 550 light years.

At a distance of 610 light years is another cluster, the Beehive Cluster, which contains an astonishing 1000 or so stars, far more than is usual. Other sources place it even closer at 520 light years, but the consensus is currently moving closer to 600 or so.. It’s only about 23 light years in diameter.

Regional Interstellar 2: 2 Herschels (716.8 ly) – 4 Herschels (1,443.6 ly)

At 727 ly from Earth, the second closest pulsar can be found. It is also the most massive discovered to date. Two more pulsars and a Neutron Star also lie within this sub-level.

Rigel is 848±65 light years from Earth. 860 is the usual approximation.

Mintaka, the third of the stars in Orion’s Belt, is a six-star system 1200 light years from Earth. In combination, it’s six stars are around 250,000 times as bright as the sun.

Alnitak, one of the systems that make up Orion’s Belt, is 1260 light years away. It is a triple-star with the more distant member orbiting the other pair once every 1500 years.



Image by Zegery, released under the Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International license, courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

The Orion Nebula, a well-known interstellar nursery, is 1344 light years from Earth. It’s actually an astonishingly small object, only about 25 light-years across.

Regional Interstellar 3: 4 Herschels (1,443.6 ly) – 8 Herschels (2,867.2 ly)

The closest known Black Hole is 1560 light years away, part of a binary star system. Another such pair is 1840 light years from us.

Alnilam, the second star of Orion’s Belt, is 2000 light years away. It’s the 29th brightest star in the Earth sky despite being much farther away than the others in the Belt.

There are two known pulsars in this sub-level, at 2055 and 2316 ly respectively. The latter is also named Lich after the Undead monster.



Image of the Ring Nebula by NASA’s Hubble Space Telescope (public domain), courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

The Ring Nebula in the constellation of Lyra is 2567 light years away.

Deneb, one of the most distant stars visible to the naked eye, is not much further at 2600 light years.

Regional Interstellar 4: 8 Herschels (2,867.2 ly) – 16 Herschels (5,734.4 ly)

3400 light years away is a supernova remnant; the explosion was reported by the Chinese in 393 CE and the remnant is now known as the Wei Asterism – there doesn’t seem to be a great deal left.

There is another pulsar 1060 parsecs (3457 ly) away. Three others also lie within this sub-level, and one more – the black widow pulsar – that might be.

The width of the galactic arm containing the sun, the Orion Arm, is 3500 light-years across. However, the Sun is quite close to the inner rim of the arm. Unfortunately, I couldn’t find an estimate for how close the nearer edge was. Still, since 1 Herschel is only 10.24% of the greater distance, it seems likely that it is one Herschel or less to that near boundary.

3800 light years finds another binary-star black hole, as does 4700 light years. At 5150 light years, there is an isolated black hole, and at 5400 light years, another binary pairing. Right on the edge of this sub-level is one more binary pair which includes a black hole, 5720 light years away..

The distance to the next nearest galactic arm (Carina-Sagittarius) is estimated to be 1400 parsecs or 4566.2 light years.

Some of the closest super-massive stars to Earth can also be found in this sub-level. There’s HD229059 (69 Suns) at 3,000 light years, Trumpler 27-27 (81 Suns) at 3900, Trumpler 27-23 (64 suns) also at 3900, HR6187A (63 suns) at 4300, and 5 more. The most distant of them is 5400 light-years away, and it is considered a Runaway Star from Cygnus OB2, a very young star cluster that is one of the largest known (ten times more massive than the Orion Nebula), which at 5120 light years, is also to be found in this sub-level.

Regional Interstellar 5: 16 Herschels (5,734.4 ly) – 32 Herschels (11,470 ly)

At 5900, 6500, and 7500 light years, there are another 11 supermassive stars. There’s also HD190429A at 7800 ly, HD93160 at 8,000, WR22A at 8300, HD303308 at 9200, two more at 10,000, one at 10,400, and no less than four at 11,000 light-years.



A mosaic of multiple images taken by the Hubble Space Telescope (NASA, public domain) of the Crab Nebula. Image courtesy of Wikimedia Commons.

This sub-level also contains five more Pulsars, including the Crab Nebula Pulsar and Cosmic Cannonball, which is moving away from the supernova remnant at 672±115 km per second, making it one of the fastest-moving stars every found – though initial estimates of its speed were an even higher 1500 km/s. At the moment, our theories don’t explain how it’s possible for a supernova to induce such speed.

The closest galactic arm on the other side of the Orion arm (the Perseus Arm) is about 6400 light years away, down from older estimates of 13,000 light years.

At 7,300 light years, 7,800 light years, 8100 light years, 8800 light years, and 11000 light years there are binary systems with black holes. At 8150 and 9260 light years are isolated Black Holes. The 7,300 light-year system is perhaps the most famous of these, Cygnus X-1.

Regional Interstellar 6: 32 Herschels (11,470 ly) – 64 Herschels (22,940 ly)

The Orion Arm is relatively short at 20,000 light years in length. This distance is enough to go from one end of it to the other.

There are 5 known pulsars and neutron stars within this sub-level.

V762 is the most distant individual star that can be seen from Earth with the naked eye at 16000 light years removed. It’s an absolutely massive variable star that is about 100,000 times as luminous as the sun.

Intergalactic Scale

Even a galaxy or galactic object that is not so far away (as galaxies go) is a LONG way away from Earth. This scale encompasses the entirety of the Milky Way and the nearest such collections of objects. I have decided to name this unit the Messier. Once again, I’ve found it more useful to use 3-exponential for this scale.

I also think it worth quoting the caveats given on the Wikipedia page, List of Nearest Galaxies:

“….aims to reflect current knowledge: not all galaxies within the 3.8 Mpc radius have been discovered. Nearby dwarf galaxies are still being discovered, and galaxies located behind the central plane of the Milky Way are extremely difficult to discern. It is possible for any galaxy to mask another located beyond it. Intergalactic distance measurements are subject to large uncertainties. Figures listed are composites of many measurements, some of which may have had their individual error bars tightened to the point of no longer overlapping with each other.”

In other words, this is the best information we currently have but a lot of it remains uncertain and subject to change. Some galaxies currently thought to be part of the local group may be de-listed, others now thought to be part of a neighboring group may be welcomed to the neighborhood, and distances can be radically altered as better information comes in.

Most of all, the number of galactic objects at a given distance is subject to massive revision. Right now, we haven’t even identified all the phenomena that we should be listing!

It is also worth remembering when perusing the lists that follow that only four galaxies are visible to the naked eye from Earth. Four.

Intergalactic 1: 1 Messier (23K ly) – 3 Messiers (69K ly)

The Galactic Core is 26,000 light years from Earth.

The outer edge of the Milky Way is about 27,000 light years from Earth on the closer side.

Intergalactic 2: 3 Messiers (69K ly) – 9 Messiers (207K ly)

70,100 light years gets you to Draco II, one of the closest and dimmest known galaxies.

75,000 light years away is another close neighbor galaxy, Segue 1.

The outer edge of the far side of the Milky Way is about 77,000 light years away.

The Sagittarius Dwarf Spheroidal Galaxy is 78,000 light years from us.

The Dwarf Galaxy Hydrus I, is 90,000 light-years away. 90,700 light years in a different direction will take you to either the Carina III dwarf.

Travel 98,000 light years and you reach the Ursa Major II Dwarf Galaxy. Or the Triangulum II Dwarf Galaxy, if you go in that direction instead.

102,000 light years away is the Reticulum II Dwarf Galaxy.

The entire Milky Way galaxy is 106,000 light years across.

Between 107,000 light years and 157,000 light years are 9 other galaxies, of which the most notable is Willnan 1 at 124,000 light years, which is an ultra low0-luminosity galaxy – in other words, it’s much darker and dimmer than usual.



Image of the Tarantula Nebula taken by the James Webb Space Telescope (NASA, public domain) courtesy Wikimedia Commons.

The Large Magellanic Cloud is 163,000 light years away. The Tarantula Nebula forms the Southeastern corner of the cloud (from our perspective), and is home to a huge number of supermassive stars, including the largest single star ever discovered at 196 Suns.

Two more galaxies are located at 179K and 186K light years respectively. At 197K light years, you will find Bootes I, which used to be a dwarf galaxy but which appears to have been torn apart – “disrupted” is the official term – by the Milky Way. Intergalactic Road-kill.

The Small Magellanic Cloud is 205,000 light years away, as is the Ursa Minor Dwarf Galaxy.

Intergalactic 3: 9 Messiers (207K ly) – 27 Messiers (621K ly)

At distances ranging from 235K to 258K light years are 7 minor galaxies.

The Pisces Overdensity is a clump of stars of uncertain history – possibly a disrupted dwarf Galaxy, perhaps not. It’s 260,000 light years away.

Between 267K light years and 326 light years are 9 minor galaxies. 330,000 light years takes you to the Carina Dwarf Galaxy.

Between 333 and 466 light years distance are 10 more minor galaxies.

490,000 light years away from us is the Cenes Venatici II Dwarf Galaxy.

You find another 6 minor galaxies between 492K light years and 597K distance from Earth.

Intergalactic 4: 27 Messiers (621K ly) – 81 Messiers (1.863×10^6 ly)

From 682K light years to 820K light years are another 6 minor galaxies.

The Milky Way is surrounded by a dark matter halo at a distance from the galactic center of 952,000 light years.

Beyond that, another 7 minor galaxies can be located within this sub-level.

Intergalactic 5: 81 Messiers (1.863×10^6 ly) – 243 Messiers (5.59×10^6 ly)

This sub-level takes us into the more remote parts of the local group, and a few galaxies which are not part of that group. It was the latter that signaled that it was time to change scales once again.

The nearest such galaxy is Cassiopeia 1, an isolated galaxy located 5.19 M light years from earth. Between us and that distance are 58 other galaxies, including two of the three largest in the local group – the Andromeda Galaxy at 2.5 M light years and the Triangulum at 3.2 M light years.



Everyone’s seen pictures of the Andromeda Galaxy, so I thought I’d do something different. This is an image of the Triangulum Galaxy by Nielander and released to Wikimedia Commons under the Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal Public Domain Dedication.

Beyond Cassiopeia 1 but within this sub-level is one more galaxy, Leo P, a small star-forming irregular galaxy first discovered as an ultra-compact high velocity cloud of Hydrogen Gas.

Transgalactic Scale

While there are still some of the more distant members of the local group in the early sub-levels, increasingly this scale is about larger structures within the universe, which we are only just beginning to understand.

At this distance, we don’t yet know what’s interesting and what’s routine. Rather than populate the individual sub-levels with irrelevancies, I’ll just pop in a few landmarks.

For this scale, the units have been named Hubbles (one Hubble = 5.6 M ly) and 5-exponential is the progression.

Transgalactic 1: 1 Hubble (5.6 M ly) – 5 Hubbles (28 M ly)

97 galaxies lie between 1 and 2.2 Hubbles, which is as far as Wikipedia’s table took me. The most distant member of the Local Group is either Leo P (see above) or possibly IC5152 at 5.68 M light years.

This sub-level therefore contains the entire Local Group, less than 1.0143 Hubbles wide.

Transgalactic 2: 5 Hubbles (28 M ly) – 25 Hubbles (140 M ly)

53.8 M ly takes you to the center of the Virgo Cluster. The Cluster contains 1300+ galaxies, possibly as many as 2000. It is

“…an aggregate of at least three separate subclumps: Virgo A, centered on M87, a second centered on the galaxy M86, and Virgo B, centered on M49, with some authors including a Virgo C subcluster, centered on the galaxy M60 as well as a Low Velocity Cloud (LVC) subclump, centered on the large spiral galaxy NGC 4216.

M87 is a giant elliptical galaxy which contains a supermassive black hole. It’s subclump is the dominant one of the entire Cluster, and it is about ten times the mass of the others. The three subgroups are in the process of merging into a single cluster, and are surrounded by isolated galaxies and galactic groups that are gravitationally bound to (and therefore part of) the Cluster, and which are likely to be absorbed at some point in the future.

Our Local group is neighbors to the Virgo Cluster but not a part of it (and it took a lot of research to discover that, for reasons that will become obvious).

The Formax Cluster is 62 M ly from earth; the Antilia Cluster is 133 ly away.

75 M ly from earth is the possible center of the Local Void, a region that starts at the edge of the Local Group and extends for another 150 M or 490 M or 980 M light years (the far edge is a bit fuzzy in definition)! This region has significantly fewer galaxies than normal.

The Virgo Supercluster, which contains more than 100 galaxy groups including the Virgo Cluster and Earth’s Local Group, has a diameter of 110 M ly. This Supercluster is one of about 10 million in the observable universe.

Transgalactic 3: 25 Hubbles (140 M ly) – 125 Hubbles (700 M ly)

A 2014 study found that the Virgo Supercluster is itself a component of a still larger group, Laniakea, which is centered on the Great Attractor. Laniakea contains about 100,000 galaxies. The lowest estimate for the distance to the Great Attractor is 150 M ly, and the highest is 250, so it is definitely a feature of this sub-level.

In fact, the span of the Laniakea Supercluster is about 500 M ly along it’s longest axis, so it also fits comfortably, in it’s entirety, within this sub-level.

Laniakea is in turn part of a larger structure, the Pisces-Cetus Supercluster Complex, also known as a Galaxy Filament. It is adjacent to the Perseus-Pegasus Filament. The PC Supercluster Complex is about 150 M ly wide.

The Centaurus Cluster is 171 M light years away.

The Hydra Cluster is 190 M light years away.

Transgalactic 4: 125 Hubbles (700 M ly) – 625 Hubbles (3.5 B ly)

The PC Supercluster is long and thin in shape – so much so that you have to go to this entirely new sub-level to contain it. It has an estimated length of 1 B ly, making it one of the largest structures in the observable universe.

The Sloan Great Wall is 1.3 B ly in size and is basically a wall of galaxies. If you think of the universe as a whole heap of soap bubbles (voids) connecting to each other, walls and filaments are the soap of the bubble.

Clowes-Campusano LQG is 2 B ly in size – it’s a group of 34 quasars.

U1-11 LQG, another group of quasars is 2.5 B ly.

Only two structures in the observable universe are known to be larger than these.

Transgalactic 5: 625 Hubbles (3.5 B ly) – 3125 Hubbles (17.5 B ly)

The first of those larger structures is the Huge-LQG, a 4 B ly -across quasar group, with 73 quasars.

But the winner (at least at the moment) is the Hercules-Corona Borealis Great Wall, a Galaxy Filament that is 10 B ly in length, and 9.6-10.5 B light years away.

Transgalactic 6: 3125 Hubbles (17.5 B ly) – 15625 Hubbles (87.5 B ly)

Or maybe it’s 15-17.675 B light years – if you factor out the expansion of the universe.

Transgalactic 7: 15625 Hubbles (87.5 B ly) – 78125 Hubbles (437.5 B ly)

The Observable Universe is about 93 B light years (16,607 Hubbles) in diameter. Beyond that, science claims, it’s impossible to know anything about what’s there – it doesn’t exist so far as we’re concerned.

Summary

So there you have it.

• The Planetary Scale: Aircraft 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 from 1-16525 Wrights.
• The Orbital Scale: Orbital 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, from 1 to 1024 Oberths.
• The Local Interplanetary Scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, from 1 to 4096 Lunars.
• The Outer Interplanetary Scale: 1,2 ,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, from 1 to 59049 Bouvards.
• The Local Interstellar Scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7; from 1 to 128 Romer.
• The Regional Interstellar Scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6; from 1 to 64 Herschels.
• The Intergalactic Scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, from 1 to 243 Messiers.
• The Transgalactic Scale: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7; from 1 to 78125 Hubbles.

6(+1)+5(+1)+6(+1)+10(+1)+7(+1)+6(+1)+5(+1)+7 = 59 exponential increases to define the observable universe and the distance to anything and everything within it.

If I had used 2-exponential throughout, that would be 2^59 = 576,460,752,303,423,488 times the original 1 Wright.

If I had used 3-exponential throughout, that would be 3^59 = 14,130,386,091,738,734,504,764,811,067 times 1 Wright.

But, in fact, I used 2 sometimes and 4 or 5 sometimes. Nevertheless, it’s a totally preposterous number that I refuse to have anything more to do with.

59 Skill or Tech levels to define the ability to navigate anywhere in space.

The universe is thought to be 4.35 x 10^17 seconds old. If I divide that by 2^59, the matching precision for time travel would be 0.7546 seconds being the equivalent of 1 wright. But that’s only the past – what about the totality?

27.0 seconds – based on the most pessimistic estimate of the remaining lifetime of the universe. It well could be longer.

Models of Skill

I would contend that navigating at the planetary scale is a completely different problem to navigating in space, and that navigating interstellar distances in any practical way is also a fundamentally different practice. You might disagree, but play along for a minute until you see where I’m going with this.

If your current technology is measured, say, in Romer – which is what I would consider to be the case in Traveler, to name one game system – then you have Interstellar Navigation and Interstellar Engineering as the basic skills. The next smallest scale, Bouvards, is considered a freebie, a simpler subset of the Romer skills.

Local Interplanetary Navigation and Engineering is a separate skill, and gives you the next smaller one – Orbital – as a freebie.

That takes you down to basic aerial navigation at the planetary scale.

Okay, but what if you’re more advanced than that? Let’s talk Star Wars, and Herschel-scale skills.

Regional Interstellar Engineering (better known in this case as Hyperspace Drive Engineering) and Navigation covers Herschels.

You get the next smaller scale, Romers, free. They are considered a subset of the skills already listed.

You have to Buy Bouvard-scale Engineering and Navigation, probably described as Planetary-system Navigation and Sub-light Drive engineering.

That gives you both Inner and Outer system skills, because you get the next smaller scale for free, as usual.

Orbital is the next one that’s not covered, so you have Thrusters Engineering and Orbital Astrogation skills. But they give you the next scale down for free, and that’s the planetary scale, and ordinary Navigation.

This basic methodology means that most campaigns will define two or three engineering skills (to cover the maintenance and repair of wildly differing technologies) and two or three navigational skills to let you plot a course to where you are going.

Throw in the following:

The tech level within a Scale defines how far you can safely transit without incurring systems damage. Experimental systems may permit one additional step or may act to increase the reliability of the existing systems. Navigational skills cannot exceed the tech level; any additional skill levels beyond this limit provide a +1 to skill checks without increasing the skill description that you have. So Warp Drive Engineering (for a Star Trek campaign) 3+3 means that you can navigate up to 8 Herschels, and get +3 on your chances to do so. Smaller trips also add bonuses – so if you’re only going 4 Herschels, you’re only using skill 2, leaving an extra +1 for your rolls.

…and what you have is a universally-adaptable skill subsystem for the maintenance and navigation of any distance throughout the universe. If a trip is longer than you can navigate, you have to break that trip into smaller chunks and plot new courses when you reach the end of each stage of the journey.

The exponential increases in distance mean that it isn’t and should not be easy to go from one tech sub-level to the next. It will take time and technological improvements. Going from one scale to another may involve whole new technologies, even if you’re measuring them on the same old scale – being able to go from Warp Factor 3 to Warp Factor 5 as a top speed, for example.

So let’s end with this: the defined units (not all of which will be used in every campaign).

1 Wright = 6.4 m (21 feet).
1 Oberth = 15625 Wrights= 100km.
1 Lunar = 1024 Oberths = 102,400 km.
1 Bouvard = 4096 Lunars = 3 AU
1 Romer = 59049 Bouvards = 177,147 AU = 2.8 ly.
1 Herschel = 128 Romer = 358.4 ly
1 Messier = 64 Herschels = 22, 940 ly
1 Hubble = 243 Messiers = 5.59 M ly
16,607 Hubbles = the observable universe.

9 units – ten, if you count the meter or the foot – to define reality. My work is done.

Weather At Sea can be considered to comprise several of the unluckiest things that can and will happen to a ship, so it’s somewhat appropriate that this is the dominant subject of the thirteenth part of this series!

Believe it or not, the entire weather system presented in the post was designed on a single sheet of notepaper…

Table Of Contents: In part one of Chapter 4: Modes Of Transport

4.0 A Word about Routes

4.0.1 Baseline Model
4.0.2 Relative Sizes
4.0.3 Competitors
4.0.4 Terrain I
4.0.5 Terrain II
4.0.6 Multi-paths and Choke Points

4.0.6.1 Sidebar: Projection Of Military Force

4.0.7 Mode Of Transport

4.1 Backpack / Litters / Shanks Pony

4.1.1 Capacity
4.1.2 Personalities / Roleplay

4.2 Horseback

4.2.1 Capacity
4.2.2 Requirements
4.2.3 Personalities / Roleplay

4.3 Mule Train

4.3.1 Capacity
4.3.2 Requirements
4.3.3 Personalities / Roleplay

4.4 Wagons

4.4.1 Capacity
4.4.2 Requirements
4.4.3 Other Exceptions – Animal Size

4.4.3.1 Sidebar: Road Trains

4.4.4 Fodder / Food & Water Needs

4.4.4.1 People
4.4.4.2 Horses
4.4.4.3 Mules
4.4.4.4 Oxen / Cattle
4.4.4.5 Elephants
4.4.4.6 Other

4.4.5 Personalities / Roleplay

In Part 2:

4.5 River Boats & Barges

4.5.0 A Splice Of Maritime History

4.5.0.1 Dugouts & Canoes
4.5.0.2 Rafts
4.5.0.3 Boats
4.5.0.4 Poled Rafts & Barges
4.5.0.5 Oars
4.5.0.6 Land-based motive power
4.5.0.7 Sail
4.5.0.8 Better Sails
4.5.0.9 Trading Ships
4.5.0.10 Warships & Pirates
4.5.0.11 Beyond the age of sail
4.5.0.12 Riverboats
4.5.0.13 Sources

4.5.1 Riverboat Capacity
4.5.2 Favorable Winds

4.5.2.1 The Beaufort Wind Scale

4.5.3 Favorable Currents
4.5.4 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Oarsmen Requirements
4.5.5 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Sail Solutions
4.5.6 Extreme Weather Events
4.5.7 The Tempest Scale
4.5.8 Vessel Rating
4.5.9 Weather Cataclysms

In Part 3:

4.6 Rafts

4.6.1 Rowing Time & Exhaustion
4.6.2 The basics of vector sums

4.6.2.1 An Example
4.6.2.2 A better example
4.6.2.3 With Maths
4.6.2.4 Simplified Vector Sums
4.6.2.5 Multi-hour Vector Sums

4.6.3 Raft Design & Operation

4.6.3.1 Buoyancy
4.6.3.2 Raft Calculation Process
4.6.3.3 Why all this matters
4.6.3.4 Category 1 Raft Table
4.6.3.5 Category 2 Raft Table
4.6.3.6 Category 3 Raft Table
4.6.3.7 Category 4 Raft Tables
4.6.3.8 Category 5 Raft Tables
4.6.3.9 Category 6 Raft Tables

4.6.4 Overloaded Rafts
4.6.5 Raft Breakup
4.6.6 Construction Time
4.6.7 A final word on Overloading Capacities

4.7 Canoes etc

4.7.1 Proportions
4.7.2 Frontal Dimension
4.7.3 Base Speed

In Part 4:

4.8 Seagoing Vessels

4.8.0 Logistics At Sea and In Space

4.8.0.1 “But I don’t need to know this stuff, my PCs aren’t Space Traders…”
4.8.0.2 Using the analogy
4.8.0.3 A Word on Historical Accuracy

4.8.1 Capacity
4.8.2 Ships As Monsters
4.8.3 Ship Specifications

4.8.3.1 Physical Dimensions
4.8.3.2 Movement Parameters
4.8.3.3 Functionality
4.8.3.4 Combat
4.8.3.5 Data Sources
4.8.3.6 Ship Specifications

4.8.4 Some Thoughts About Cannon

4.8.4.1 Having Your Cannon And Your Flavor, Too
4.8.4.2 Crippled Land-Cannon
4.8.4.3 Personal Firearms
4.8.4.4 Bombs and other explosive devices

4.8.5 Exotic Crews

4.8.5.1 Human Height Adjustments
4.8.5.2 Non-human Height
4.8.5.3 Non-human Proportions
4.8.5.4 Crew Strength
4.8.5.5 Handling and other parameters

4.8.6 Mixed Crews

Today’s post:

4.8.7 Weather At Sea

4.8.7.1 An Introduction to Weather (oversimplified)
4.8.7.2 Accumulated Potential and Threshold
4.8.7.3 Process Overview
4.8.7.4 Climate Baselines
4.8.7.5 Seasonal Weather Trends
4.8.7.6 Long and Short Base Thresholds
4.8.7.7 Daily Temperature Variation
4.8.7.8 Weather Change Threshold
4.8.7.9 Trend
4.8.7.10 Result Totals
4.8.7.11 Interpretation
4.8.7.12 Severity

     4.8.7.12.1 Extending The Example

4.8.7.13 Clouds & Rain
4.8.7.14 Winds

     4.8.7.14.1 Wind Speed
     4.8.7.14.2 Ship Speed vs Wind Speed
     4.8.7.14.3 Wind Direction
     4.8.7.14.4 Wind Duration
     4.8.7.14.5 Favorable Winds
     4.8.7.14.6 Becalmed
     4.8.7.14.7 Unfavorable Winds
     4.8.7.14.8 Violent Winds
     4.8.7.14.9 Extreme Winds: Hurricanes etc

4.8.7.15 Currents

     4.8.7.15.1 Favorable Currents
     4.8.7.15.2 Still Currents
     4.8.7.15.3 Unfavorable Currents
     4.8.7.15.4 Violent Waves
     4.8.7.15.5 Extreme Waves: Tsunamis & Walls Of Water
     4.8.7.15.6 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Oarsmen Requirements
     4.8.7.15.7 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Sail Solutions

4.8.8 Currents & Waves

4.8.8.1 A brief note on Sea Anchors
4.8.8.2 Favorable Currents
4.8.8.3 Still Currents
4.8.8.4 Unfavorable Currents
4.8.8.5 Violent Waves
4.8.8.6 Extreme Waves: Tsunamis & Walls Of Water

4.8.9 Other Applications of the Weather System

4.9 Exotic Modes Of Transport

4.9.1 Flight
4.9.2 Teleport
4.9.3 Magic Gates & Portals

And, In future chapters (most of them much shorter):

5. Land Transport
6. Waterborne Transport
7. Spoilage
8. Key Personnel
9. The Journey
10. Arrival
11. Journey’s End
12. Adventures En Route

4.8.7 Weather At Sea

Weather at sea is a lot more stable than weather over land. You see, on land there is uneven heating of the surface, there are obstacles to shape and redirect wind, there’s a much greater potential for dust to be carried into the air where is catalyzes rain or thunderstorms or hail.

At sea, weather gets pushed around a bit and generally finds nothing but more water. Weather systems build and build until one of three things happens: high-level winds carry dust from land, triggering whatever has built up, or the weather system makes landfall, triggering whatever has built up, or the buildup finally exceeds the capacity of the local atmosphere and everything that has built up takes effect.

Weather phenomena are all interconnected directly as well as indirectly. One of those interconnections is the movement of weather fronts and changes in barometric pressure that accompany them. The greater the pressure differential, the stronger the airflow from high pressure into low.

Another way of thinking about weather is as the movement of air – be it hot or cold. Hot air can hold a lot of moisture, cold air not so much.

I think I was about four years old when I became aware that there are semi-predictable patterns to the weather. Those patterns seemed so simple and clear at the time – and everything that I (and mankind) have learned since have only complicated the situation.

Nevertheless, I hope to dumb it down, simplify it to the point where a workable game mechanic can be extracted, just for use at sea.

4.8.7.1 An introduction to Weather (oversimplified)



Take a look at the 8-panel illustration above.

★ In panel one I have quickly generated two landmasses, some islands, a volcano, and a lot of ocean. There’s also a ship in the middle of the panel, about 1/3 up, for no particular reason.

★ In panel two, I have added an equator (solid line), a couple of tropics, and an arctic region.

★ Panel 3 shows what most people expect to happen weather-wise – hot air rises in the tropics and moves north and south of the equator. Sorry to anyone who thought that – you have half of the story backwards. Hot air rises, true enough, but that lowers the air pressure, so cool air rushes in to the tropics from the cooler regions. Assuming that the planetary rotation is in the right direction, the arrows at the top of the panel should be at the bottom and vice-versa.

Is the planetary motion in the right direction? Well, the winds are moving west to east, so the planet is moving east to west, and if you picture that by rotating anything round, you’ll find that it means that the sun rises in the West and sets in the East.

Uh-oh. Either this planet rotates in the opposite direction to the Earth, or the top of the map is South and not North for some reason. The second choice is the simpler explanation, so some reason for the inversion has to be invented; I can think of several, but that’s neither here nor there.

★ In the daytime, both the land and the water heat up, as shown by panel 4. Convection currents carry some of the heated water down, replacing it with cooler water. The only places that don’t warm much at all are the snow-capped mountain peaks, which reflect more of the heat away.

That means that all day on a warm day, the air pressure over land is going down; when the sun dips low enough, the expansion of the air stops being enough to hold back the cooler air that wants to fill that partial vacuum, and you get a (relatively) cool sea breeze, something that I have enjoyed on many an occasion.

★ Panel 5 offers a heat-map of what then happens at night. The heat of the land and shallow waters is quickly radiated away (unless there’s significant cloud cover to reflect it back down). So the land cools off relatively quickly. But the oceans have been sequestering heat all day, becoming an enormous heat bank, but now the tables have turned and that heat is being given off, and taking evaporated water vapor with it.

When that water vapor hits land, it will condense into clouds. For that reason, most coastal cities experience early morning cloud cover most days; the sky doesn’t become clear until this burns off. How long this takes is a complicated question I don’t pretend to have an answer to; Here in Sydney, cloud cover burns off somewhere between 8AM and 10AM, but I once visited Los Angeles after they had their smog problems in hand, and the cloud cover still didn’t burn off until about 3PM local time!

My only hint is that I think local wind patterns have something to do with it, because I have read of this aspect of the weather being affected by Heat Islands. What’s a heat island, you may ask? Concrete and bitumen and asphalt absorb more heat than grass-covered natural areas, so every city absorbs more heat than the lands around it, which creates an island of high heat in a sea of moderate temperatures. This heat then impacts the local weather.

This is an extremely complicated field of study; another building blocking the light can have significant ramifications that aren’t recognized until it gets knocked down. And that’s without factoring in the concrete-canyon wind-tunnel effects!

But we still have the planetary rotation to take into account. The heat from a land mass will bloom outward to the West (that’s to the right on our map), and that will create low pressure systems off the western coast. As a general rule, though, there’s a lot of room out there for them to dissipate – unless they strike another landmass in the meantime.

Sometime overnight, then, the sea breeze will dissipate and be replaced with a breeze blowing from on-shore.

★ Panel 6 shows how complicated weather can get as a result of these simple contributors. Air flows(with moisture) from the middle of the ocean each night, carried along by sea breezes that head for the nearest land – but which are then twisted around by the planetary rotation, and pulled this way and that by other factors.

Who here remembers Biorhythms? This pseudo-science idea was popular in the late 70s because a computer was really good at calculating them and putting the results up on the screen. Ultimately, this was all about the simultaneous charting of three sin waves with different periods (23, 28, and 33, respectively), and summing them to produce a compound curve which can exhibit considerable complexity, like this:



Created using Desmos Tools and licensed under the Creative Commons “Attribution-ShareAlike” License (CC-BY-SA-4.0)

Well, weather is a bit like that – but the period (length of a cycle) and the amplitude of that cycle are both semi-randomly variable. Make a note of that point, it will become important when I get to the game mechanics.

The last thing to note before I move on is that there are already (unstable) indications of a circular airflow forming. If enough energy (in the form of heat) builds up in such a system – something that typically only happens in summer – and if there is enough moisture in the air to absorb and retain that energy, then you can end up with a hurricane or tornado or whatever you want to call it.

★ Panel 7 illustrates the complex compounding of movements of air masses that can result. It’s basically a Vector Sum but you don’t move in a straight line to the result, you move in a curve that touches the constituent vectors. The first one is the wind speed, the second one is the rotation of the world, and the resulting rotation of the air mass, and the third is the attractive properties of the nearest piece of land to the sum of the first two.

★ Finally, Panel 8 shows what happens as a result. A cold front – a mass of moist air in a low-pressure environment – has formed. It gets moved around by the wind along the path indicated. If more cold air joins the existing mass, the cold front gets bigger; if not, it gets smaller. And it’s motion is such that the direction of the wind Vector Sum is always at right angles to the cold-front – in this case, the bottom of the front doesn’t have to move as fast as the top, which causes the cold front to become more curved and to head back towards the source of the cold air, where it will have every chance of hooking up with more cold air.

But there is a landmass in the way, and that will cause it to lose a lot of the moisture (and the energy contained within it) as rain, hail, thunder, and lightning. The time of day and time of year are obviously critical – you don’t normally get offshore winds in the head of the day; if anything, you get the opposite, and that means that the cold front ‘stalls’ out to sea. That could be a bother to a ship, but it’s a desirable outcome for anyone living near the coast of the landmass in question. When the winds shift, the front will start to move very quickly toward land.

It’s not unreasonable to take the basic winds of panel 3 and add in the complications of other winds and pressure systems to get the basic track that a front will follow.

4.8.7.2 Accumulated Potential and Threshold

There are two variables at the heart of the Weather Mechanics that I am going to propose. The first is the Accumulated Potential for a change in the weather, and the second is the threshold that this potential has to reach before that change actually happens.

Potential will keep accumulating until something happens to discharge it. Once it starts, a random roll resets both potential and threshold.

Any weather event can be thought of as ‘the absence of the opposite condition’, at least in general terms. If a forecast indicates no cloud, there is no chance of rain, and the result is a sunny day. If a forecast is for heavy cloud cover, there is every chance of rain, and the result is a pronounced absence of sunshine. Any given day can either be ‘stable’ in it’s forecast or ‘transitional’ / changeable / unstable.

Some seasons are more prone to instability than others – the patterns depend on where you are but as a general rule, winter is more stable than spring and autumn, both of which are more stable than summer, because one of the key drivers of instability is energy, which is more plentiful in summer. However, this generally means that most weather events in summer are short and transitory; only a few will last more than a day, and most will last only a few hours (temperature trends excepted). However, summer is also prone to these disruptions being short and sharp – in winter, the miserable weather can be consistent for many days.

The situation is a bit different in tropical regions. They only really have two seasons – the wet season (which is Summer everywhere else, plus half of autumn and half of spring) and the dry season (the rest of the time). In the rainy season, the normal pattern is hot, humid, and sunny until sometime in the afternoon – the times will vary – when it will absolutely teem down for one or two hours. The earlier in the day this happens, the bigger the downpour will be the next day, simply because there’s been more time for the humidity to accumulate.

Disruptions to this norm still happen – you might get the rain event in the late morning instead of the afternoon, or the early evening, or even not get one at all for a day or two. Or it might rain all day for a day or two – not teeming down as heavily but still solidly wet weather. In the mountains, even in the tropics, in winter, you might get still snow or hail.

4.8.7.3 Process Overview
In writing this section, I came up with a completely new weather generation system. I’ve never used this in play, so it’s all theoretical at this stage but it promises to be more accurate and realistic without being a huge amount of work.

Here’s how it’s supposed to work – overview only, I’ll go into more detail afterwards:

     1. GM sets the climate baselines (once per general location).
     2. GM determines the seasonal weather trends (once per general location).
     3. GM rolls for the daily temperature variation.
     4. GM rolls for the change in Weather Threshold Change.
     5. Apply change to long or short threshold, whichever is operative..
     6. GM rolls d6 and d20 for the daily humidity variation.
     7. GM determines the Trend.
     8. GM totals Trend + Rolled Adjustment for both temperature and humidity.
     9. GM compares both temperature and humidity to the change threshold.
     10. GM interprets the weather forecast, adding the baseline and seasonal weather trends to the temperature and humidity to get daily peak values..

Even this makes it sound a lot more complicated than I think it is.



Red Sky In The Morning, Sailor Take Warning….
Imageby Joe from Pixabay

4.8.7.4 Climate Baselines

A year is divided into 4 seasons, each of which is divided into 2 parts, giving 8 baseline slots in a year. These are used to describe the climate, which is used – as the name suggests – as a baseline for the system.

If you can identify a real-life location with similar weather, you may be able to get climate information about the specific location – Wikipedia is often very useful for this. But, if not, this section will show you how to do it from scratch with total imagination.

Weather at Sea is actually more predictable than weather over land, because there’s not as much to complicate and confuse it – it’s all empty ocean except along the coasts. The dominant factors are therefore general location (the Atlantic has different patterns to the Pacific) and latitude. Longitude only really comes into it if you are near a continental coastline – the one to the east will have a different impact to the one on the western side of the ocean.

I mentioned the differences between the Atlantic and Pacific – water temperature is a big part of that. The pacific is comparatively warm, the Atlantic comparatively cool, for reasons far too involved to get into here. The Med is generally warm, the North Sea not. Without looking it up, from latitude alone, I would expect the Black Sea to be fairly Mediterranean in climate.

Start with Midsummer – what’s the average temperature and what’s the average humidity?

Next, Midwinter – same questions.





Mid-Spring and Mid-Autumn are next, and where things can get interesting. Put a ruler down between the midsummer and midwinter points. You can either be on that line (a), above it (b), or below it (c) – you get to choose.

Next, we do the start of each season in exactly the same way, Draw a line connecting the points and hey presto! Job done!

I’ve done a blank chart that you can open in a new tab by clicking the thumbnail to the right. Because once you’ve done this once, you can use it again and again for that general location.



Here’s a fully worked example giving my perceptions of Sydney Weather after 40-odd years of living here.

     ★ Average Max Temp, Midsummer: 40 degrees Centigrade.

     ★ Average Daytime max, Midwinter: 18 degrees Centigrade.

     ★ Mid-autumn: Cooler than the average by a bit (nothing so extreme as the first example, which was deliberately exaggerated – a bit). 24°C.

     ★ Mid-spring: Both Spring and Winter seem to come early these days, and this is the turning point, so it’s right on the average between Midsummer and Midwinter.

     ★ Both Spring and Summer are a little warmer than the average, 24° and 32°, respectively.

     ★ The start of Autumn is even warmer at 36°C and the start of winter is noticeably cooler than the average at 20°C.

Note that it doesn’t matter whether you prefer °C, °F, or even Kelvins! You get to label the scale whatever you want (so long as your entire temperature range fits in the 40-division scale).

     ★ Humidity: typically fairly high in Sydney, midsummer peak of 40%, midwinter 24%, mid-spring and mid-autumn both way above the average of those two points at 36%.

     ★ Spring, also above the average of the points on either side of it at 33%; the start of summer is slightly down on the straight average, at 37%; the start of autumn is a very summery 39%; and the start of winter is well below the straight average at 26%.

4.8.7.5 Seasonal Weather Trends

Next, we need to count the differences and get a simple number for the change each N days, or the N days for a convenient rate of change. These are the seasonal weather trends.

     ★ Sydney Midsummer 40°C; Start of Autumn, 33°C; difference 7°C.

365 days in a year, / 8 = 45.625 days.

Always divide the bigger by the smaller. That will usually mean days / difference, but might not always do so when it comes to humidity or Fahrenheit temperature differences.

     ★ 45.625 / 7 = -1° every 6.5 days.

     ★ Start of autumn, 33°; mid-autumn, 24°; difference of 9°; 45.625 / 9 = -1° every 5 days.

One more:

     ★ Winter 20°; midwinter 18° – but just for the heck of it, let’s put both into Fahrenheit: 68°F to 64.4° (call it 64 1/2) – difference of 3.5°F. 45.625 / 3.5 = -1°F every 13 days.

But with a half-degree there, I’m tempted to take both of them to the half-degree mark.

To do this, I simply halve the time-span for a whole degree.

     ★ -1°F every 13 days becomes -0.5°F every 6.5 days.

Write these down on or below your weather chart. And leave a little room to write two more numbers underneath.

You don’t have to calculate them all right now, but you may as well.

Do the same thing for humidity and move on.

4.8.7.6 Long and Short Base Thresholds

The Long Threshold is how much buildup there has to be before there is a change in the weather.

Start by thinking about the length of the weather cycle – here in Sydney, it’s typically 7-and-a-bit days, at least in summer. If it rains Monday this week, it will probably rain on Monday next week, and the one after that – and then it will be Tuesday, and Tuesday again, and so on.

This pattern gets reset by the occasional more extreme weather event, but that’s the basic gist of it. And it means that the long threshold and short threshold will total 7-and-a-bit.

     ★ Maybe 7.3.

Important: For °F all thresholds should be doubled. This is because a °F is smaller than a °C, so you need more of them for the same change in weather. For high humidity locations, use the °F tables and double the threshold (for humidity) regardless of the temperature units being employed.

     ★ Again in midsummer, the typical short threshold is 1.5 days – sometimes it’s one day, sometimes 2, sometimes something in between.

     ★ 7.3 – 1.5 = 5.8. So that’s my base long threshold for midsummer and the 45.625 days that follow it.

     ★ In winter, the two are a lot closer. We’re still talking a 7-day cycle, but the short is more like 2.6 days (sometimes 2, occasionally 3 or 4), and the long is 7.5 – 2.6 = 4.9.

The higher the long threshold, the more stable and predictable the weather is. The longer the short threshold, the longer it takes to go back to that stable and predictable ‘normal weather’ after a disruption.

So go ahead and do all of these as well.

So, if I was using °F: the values I should use are cycle 14.6, long thresholds (summer) 11.6 and (winter) 9.8, short thresholds 3 (summer) and 5.2 (winter).

4.8.7.7 Daily Temperature Variation

With that prep out of the way, the system is now ready for use, believe it or not.

Let’s say that we’re doing a forecast for Sydney for 22 days into Autumn.

The relevant numbers from the chart, i.e. the work already done::

     ★ Autumn base temp = 33°C; Mid-autumn = 24°C; difference = 9; so -1 degree every 5 days.

     ★ 22 / 5 × -1 = -4.4°, so right now the long-tern average would be about 28.6°C.

     ★ Autumn base humidity = 39%; mid-autumn = 36%; difference = 3; so -1% every 15.2 days, or -0.5% every 7.6 days.

     ★ 22 / 7.6 × -0.5 = -1.447%, call it -1.4%, so the long term average is now about 37.6%.

     ★ Long Threshold: Midsummer + Midwinter = 5.8 + 4.9 = 10.7; average = 5.35.
     ★ Short Threshold: Midsummer + Midwinter = 1.5 + 2.6 = 4.1; average = 2.05.
     ★ But, given the season, long should be a little shorter and short a little longer. Use 5.2 and 2.5.


Roll a d6:
     1-2 = minus
     3-4 = same as yesterday
     5-6 = plus

But we don’t know what yesterday was, so if a 3 or 4 comes up, we may have to roll that, too. In fact, we may have to regress a number of days before a valid answer pops out.

The next part is a little trickier.

Roll a d6 for the adjustment column and a d20 for the adjustment amount on the table below:

	°C / Low Humidity
	d6	1	2	3	4	5	6
d20	1	0.1	0.2	0.3	0.4	<0.5	0.6
	2	0.2	0.3	0.5	0.6	0.7	0.8
	3	0.3	0.4	0.6	0.7	0.9	1
	4	0.4	0.5	0.7	0.8	1	1.2
	5	0.5	0.6	0.8	1	1.2	1.4
	6	0.6	0.7	0.9	1.1	1.3	1.5
	7	0.7	0.8	1	1.2	1.4	1.6
	8	0.8	0.9	1.1	1.3	1.5	1.7
	9	0.9	1	1.2	1.4	1.6	1.8
	10	1	1.1	1.3	1.5	1.7	1.9
	11	1.1	1.2	1.4	1.6	1.8	2
	12	1.2	1.3	1.5	1.7	1.9	2.1
	13	1.3	1.4	1.6	1.8	2	2.2
	14	1.4	1.5	1.7	1.9	2.1	2.3
	15	1.5	1.6	1.8	2	2.2	2.4
	16	1.6	1.7	1.9	2.2	2.3	2.5
	17	1.7	1.8	2	2.4	2.5	2.6
	18	1.8	1.9	2.2	2.5	2.6	2.7
	19	1.9	2	2.4	2.6	2.7	2.8
	20	2	2.2	2.5	2.7	2.8	3

 

	°F / High Humidity
	d6	1	2	3	4	5	6
d20	1	0.2	0.4	0.5	0.7	0.9	1.1
	2	0.4	0.5	0.9	1.1	1.3	1.4
	3	0.5	0.7	1.1	1.3	1.6	1.8
	4	0.7	0.9	1.3	1.4	1.8	2.2
	5	0.9	1.1	1.4	1.8	2.2	2.5
	6	1.1	1.3	1.6	2	2.3	2.7
	7	1.3	1.4	1.8	2.2	2.5	2.9
	8	1.4	1.6	2	2.3	2.7	3.1
	9	1.6	1.8	2.2	2.5	2.9	3.2
	10	1.8	2	2.3	2.7	3.1	3.4
	11	2	2.2	2.5	2.9	3.2	3.6
	12	2.2	2.3	2.7	3.1	3.4	3.8
	13	2.3	2.5	2.9	3.2	3.6	4
	14	2.5	2.7	3.1	3.4	3.8	4.1
	15	2.7	2.9	3.2	3.6	4	4.3
	16	2.9	3.1	3.4	4	4.1	4.5
	17	3.1	3.2	3.6	4.3	4.5	4.7
	18	3.2	3.4	4	4.5	4.7	4.9
	19	3.4	3.6	4.3	4.7	4.9	5
	20	3.6	4	4.5	4.9	5	5.4

NB>: Humidity cannot exceed 100%. Any excess: /10 and add to the conditions adjustment. That’s because humidity doesn’t drive changes in the weather in this system, temperature does.



I’ve put all 5 tables into a Free PDF for reader’s convenience. This includes the tables below for Threshold adjustment. NB: This includes a slightly older version of the above tables – the numbers are the same but some of the labels are incorrect.

Continuing the Sydney example:
     ★ d6 roll: 2 so “minus”.

     ★ d6 roll 4, d20 roll 14.
     ★ °C change = minus 1.9.

     ★ d6 roll 4, so “same as yesterday”
     ★ roll again for yesterday: 5 so “plus”

     ★ Yesterday’s change: d6 roll 6, d20 roll 10. % Humidity change = plus 1.9.
     ★ Today’s change: d6 roll 2, d20 roll 12. % humidity change today = plus 1.3.
     ★ 1.3 + 1.9 = 3.2. So, overall, the humidity is 3.2% higher than the average for this time of year.



…Red Sky At Night, Sailor’s Delight!
Well, it might not be 100% reliable, but it’s better than nothing!
Image by Jody Davis from Pixabay

4.8.7.8 Weather Change Threshold

Since we’re assumed to be starting a cycle (now in it’s second day because I had to re-roll once for ‘yesterday’) we’re adjusting the long threshold, which is usually the case.

Same as above except that the original d6 roll remains – it said “minus” so the threshold change is a minus.:

	°C / Low Humidity
	d6	1	2	3	4	5	6
d20	1	0.025	0.07	0.15	0.3	0.425	0.72
	2	0.05	0.105	0.25	0.45	0.595	0.96
	3	0.075	0.14	0.3	0.525	0.765	1.2
	4	0.1	0.175	0.35	0.6	0.85	1.44
	5	0.125	0.21	0.4	0.75	1.02	1.68
	6	0.15	0.245	0.45	0.825	1.105	1.8
	7	0.175	0.28	0.5	0.9	1.19	1.92
	8	0.2	0.315	0.55	0.975	1.275	2.04
	9	0.225	0.35	0.6	1.05	1.36	2.16
	10	0.25	0.385	0.65	1.125	1.445	2.28
	11	0.275	0.42	0.7	1.2	1.53	2.4
	12	0.3	0.455	0.75	1.275	1.615	2.52
	13	0.325	0.49	0.8	1.35	1.7	2.64
	14	0.35	0.525	0.85	1.425	1.785	2.76
	15	0.375	0.56	0.9	1.5	1.87	2.88
	16	0.4	0.595	0.95	1.65	1.955	3
	17	0.425	0.63	1	1.8	2.125	3.12
	18	0.45	0.665	1.1	1.875	2.21	3.24
	19	0.475	0.7	1.2	1.95	2.295	3.36
	20	0.5	0.77	1.25	2.025	2.38	3.6

 

	°F / High Humidity
	d6	1	2	3	4	5	6
d20	1	0	0.1	0.3	0.5	0.8	1.3
	2	0.1	0.2	0.5	0.8	1.1	1.7
	3	0.1	0.3	0.5	0.9	1.4	2.2
	4	0.2	0.3	0.6	1.1	1.5	2.6
	5	0.2	0.4	0.7	1.4	1.8	3
	6	0.3	0.4	0.8	1.5	2	3.2
	7	0.3	0.5	0.9	1.6	2.1	3.5
	8	0.4	0.6	1	1.8	2.3	3.7
	9	0.4	0.6	1.1	1.9	2.4	3.9
	10	0.5	0.7	1.2	2	2.6	4.1
	11	0.5	0.8	1.3	2.2	2.8	4.3
	12	0.5	0.8	1.4	2.3	2.9	4.5
	13	0.6	0.9	1.4	2.4	3.1	4.8
	14	0.6	0.9	1.5	2.6	3.2	5
	15	0.7	1	1.6	2.7	3.4	5.2
	16	0.7	1.1	1.7	3	3.5	5.4
	17	0.8	1.1	1.8	3.2	3.8	5.6
	18	0.8	1.2	2	3.4	4	5.8
	19	0.9	1.3	2.2	3.5	4.1	6
	20	0.9	1.4	2.3	3.6	4.3	6.5

Continuing the Sydney example:
     ★ d6 roll: still “minus”, as noted above.

     ★ d6 roll 3, d20 roll 2. Threshold change = minus 0.25.

4.8.7.9 Trend

“Trend” only impacts accumulated change, not threshold. It is equal to 1/2 of yesterday’s change if any was recorded, or 0 otherwise.

Continuing the Sydney example:
No change was documented yesterday for temperature, which is what drives changes in the weather, so the trend is 0 at the moment.

4.8.7.10 Result Totals:

This is easier demonstrated than explained, so Continuing the Sydney example:

     ★ Temperature: Time-of-year average 28.6°C minus 1.9 = 26.7°C.
     ★ Humidity: Time-of-year average 37.6% plus 1.9 (yesterday) plus 1.3 (today) = 40.8%.
     ★ Change: Trend 0 em>plus 1.9 = 1.9
     ★ Long Threshold = 5.2 minus 0.25 = 4.95.
     ★ Short Threshold = 2.5, unchanged because it is not the active threshold at the moment.
     ★ Is the Change greater than the operative threshold? 1.9 is not greater than 4.95. Therefore, no change in the weather.

Write these down, and save yourself a bit of time by calculating the Trend for tomorrow while you’re about it:

     ★ Tomorrow’s Trend = -1.9 / 2 = -0.95

It should be recognized that the time-of-year correction and the Trend are both deliberate biases built into the system. One tracks with the flow of she seasons and is in the direction that seasonal averages would expect; the other tracks with previous changes so that they can accumulate until a change in the weather is triggered..

4.8.7.11 Interpretation




If the sea looks like this, I would interpret it to mean we’re in trouble! Image of the Naruta Whirlpools taken from a boat that cruises directly to them by Hellbuny and used under the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license, courtesy Wikimedia Commons

How these factors come together into a weather report / forecast is up to the GM, but generally follows logic.

Take the Sydney example: temperature dropping (but still high), humidity rising (but still relatively low) – what can account for that? There are only two things: cloud cover and winds.

Well, winds are a whole separate deal, given how important they are to a sailing ship. But it’s fair to say that if they aren’t enough to justify that drop in temperature, the only remaining option is cloud cover. This could be partial, broken clouds, or it could be threatening rain – except that we’re nowhere near the threshold, and the humidity isn’t really high enough, so it’s more likely to be the first than the second.

4.8.7.12 Severity

A further tool at your disposal is the change total itself – this can be looked at as the fraction of a cycle or as the intensity of the change. They are both the same thing in this context.

     ★ 1.9 / 7.3 is a bit under two sevenths. Maybe three fourteenths. That says that the weather on this particular day is going to be appreciably mild – strong winds being a possible exception, but they aren’t very likely.

     ★ Today’s forecast: Warm with broken cloud and light winds. There is a remote chance of a brief thunderstorm in the later afternoon which will have no significant weather consequences. Similar conditions are likely to persist for several days to come.

4.8.7.12.1 Extending The Example

Just to show readers how it works, and because it provides a lead-in to the next sections, let’s extend that forecast for a while.

Day 2:

     ★ Time-of-year average Temperature: 28.6°C – (1 / 5) = 28.6 – 0.2 = 28.4.
     ★ Time-of-year average Humidity: 37.6% – (0.5 / 7.6) = 37.6 – 0.066 = 37.6 – 0.07 = 37.53%.

     ★ Change Direction Temperature (d6): 1, so minus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) = (2, 9) = 1 degree.
     ★ Change Direction Humidity (d6): 5, so plus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) – (4, 6) = 1.1%

     ★ Temperature: Time-of-year average 28.4°C minus 1 = 27.4°C (actually slightly warmer).
     ★ Humidity: Time-of-year average 37.53% plus 1.1 = 38.63%.
     ★ Change: Trend 0.95 + Change 1.9 (yesterday) + 1 (today)= 3.85.

     ★ Threshold Change Direction (d6): 6, so plus for the first time
     ★ Threshold Change Rolled (d6, d20) = (4, 14) = 1.42
     ★ Long Threshold = 4.67 plus 1.42 = 6.09.
     ★ Short Threshold = 2.5, unchanged
     ★ Is the Change greater than the operative threshold? 3.85 is not greater than 6.09. Therefore, no change in the weather.

     ★ Tomorrow’s Trend = 3.85 / 2 = 1.925, round to 1.93.

Interpretation: Slightly warmer but with increasing cloud cover. Light winds.

Day 3:

     ★ Time-of-year average Temperature: 28.4°C – (1 / 5) = 28.4 – 0.2 = 28.2.
     ★ Time-of-year average Humidity: 37.53% – (0.5 / 7.6) = 37.6 – 0.066 = 37.6 – 0.07 = 37.46%.

     ★ Change Direction Temperature (d6): 2, so minus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) = (5, 8) = 1.5 degrees.
     ★ Change Direction Humidity (d6): 5, so plus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) – (1, 18) = 1.8%

     ★ Temperature: Time-of-year average 28.2°C minus 1.5 = 26.7°C
     ★ Humidity: Time-of-year average 37.46% plus 1.8 = 39.26%.
     ★ Change: Trend 1.93 + Change 1.5 + 3.85 (previous change) = 6.28

     ★ Threshold Change Direction (d6): 1, so minus
     ★ Threshold Change Rolled (d6, d20) = (6, 16) = 0.28
     ★ Long Threshold = 6.09 minus 0.28 = 5.81.
     ★ Short Threshold = 2.5, unchanged
     ★ Is the Change greater than the operative threshold? 6.28 is greater than 6.09. The weather changes – from sunny to rain.

     ★ Tomorrow’s Trend = 0 because the weather has turned.

Interpretation: Cloudy & cooler, showers becoming likely in the evening.

Day 4:

     ★ Time-of-year average Temperature: 28.2°C – 0.2 = 28.0.
     ★ Time-of-year average Humidity: 37.46% – 0.07 = 37.39%.

     ★ Change Direction Temperature (d6): 5, so plus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) = (6, 12) = 2.1 degrees.
     ★ Change Direction Humidity (d6): 6, so plus.
     ★ Change rolled (d6, d20) – (2, 5) = 0.6%

     ★ Temperature: Time-of-year average 28.0°C plus 2.1 = 30.1°C
     ★ Humidity: Time-of-year average 37.39% plus 0.6 = 39.86%.
     ★ Change: Trend 0 + Change 2.1= 2.1

     ★ Threshold Change Direction (d6): 2, so minus
     ★ Threshold Change Rolled (d6, d20) = (2, 17) = 0.63
     ★ Long Threshold resets to base value of 5.2
     ★ Short Threshold = 2.5 minus 0.63 = 1.87
     ★ Is the Change greater than the operative threshold? 2.1 is greater than 1.87. The weather changes – from rain to sunny.

     ★ Tomorrow’s Trend = 0 because the weather has turned again.

Interpretation: Very warm, showers clearing.

Before I can continue with the example, I need to explain how rain affects humidity.

4.8.7.13 Clouds & Rain

If humidity goes over 70%, cloud cover is pretty close to inevitable. The daily base weather changes to include this without the weather pattern itself changing (unless the threshold for such a change is exceeded).

Rain events can be savage downpours or constant precipitation or a thunderous deluge or a continuous drizzle or passing showers.

     ★ Calculate the difference between 4 x the humidity before the event and half the time of year average for the day.

     ★ Divide by the number of days that this event is going to last, as determined in previous sections.

     ★ Roll a d8 and consult the tables below (these have also been included in the free PDF):

Precipitation Event Type
Humidity Ratio		d8
		1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8
<0	25	1	1	1	1	1	2	2	3
26	50	1	1	1	1	2	2	3	3
51	75	1	1	2	2	2	3	3	3
76	100	1	2	2	2	3	3	3	4
101	125	2	2	3	3	3	4	4	5
> 125		3	3	3	4	4	4	5	5

 

Precipitation Event Type		Description (and alternative)							Daily Loss
1		One or more light showers, passing				Snow Flurry			33%
2		Continuous Drizzle for multiple hours				Snow			40%
3		One or more (brief) thunderstorms				Snow &/or Hail			50%
4		Constant, steady, soaking rain				Heavy Snow or Sleet			60%
5		Massive Downpour lasting 1-3 hours				Blizzard			75%

EG1: Base 40% humidity, currently 30%, Duration 1 day

     ★ 4 × 30 – (40 / 2) = 120-20=100; 100 / 1 = 100
     ★ d8 roll = 5
     ★ Type 3 weather event
     ★ one or more thunderstorms, snow & possible hail if cold enough

EG2: Base 25% humidity currently 35%, Duration 2 days

     ★ 4 × 35 – (25/2) = 140 – 12.5 = 127.5 / 2 = 63.75
     ★ d8 roll = 4
     ★ Type 2 weather event
     ★ Continuous Drizzle or Snow for several hours

EG3: Base 25% humidity, currently 45%, Duration 2 days

     ★ 4 × 45 – (25 / 2) = 180 – 12.5 = 167.5; 167.5 / 2 = 83.75
     ★ d8 roll = 8
     ★ Type 4 weather event
     ★ Constant soaking rain or heavy snow (possible sleet) if cold enough

EG 4: Base 25% humidity, currently 45%, Duration 3 days

     ★ 4 × 45 – (25 / 2) = 180 – 12.5 = 167.5; 167.5 / 2 = 55.8
     ★ d8 roll = 8
     ★ Type 3 weather event again
     ★ As above

EG5: Base 25% humidity, currently 45%, Duration 1 day

     ★ 4 × 45 – (25 / 2) = 180 – 12.5 = 167.5; 167.5 / 1 = 167.5
     ★ d8 roll = 8
     ★ Type 5 weather event
     ★ Massive downpour lasting 1-3 hours

EG6: Base 40% humidity, currently 55%, Duration 4 days

     ★ 4 × 55 – (40/2) = 220-20 = 200; 200/4 = 50
     ★ die roll = 3
     ★ Type 1 weather event
     ★ One or more light showers each day, passing

EG7: Base 40% humidity, currently 55%, Duration 2 days

     ★ 4 × 55 – (40/2) = 220-20 = 200; 200/2 = 100
     ★ die roll = 3
     ★ Type 2 weather event
     ★ Continuous Drizzle most of the day

On the table, note the “Daily Loss”. That’s how much of the current humidity gets lost in the course of 1 day of this weather event.

If this takes the total below the Base for this time of year, all humidity adjustments are +5%/day until this is no longer true. Long Thresholds increase by 2 while this is taking place.

Let’s look at those 7 examples again:

EG1: 1-day Type 3 event starting at 30% humidity vs a Base of 40%:

     ★ 50% daily loss
     ★ 50% of 30% is 15%
     ★ Humidity after event = 30 – 15 = 15%
     ★ 15% is less than 40% so +5%/day for next 5 days, maybe more.

EG2: 2-day Type 2 event starting at 35% vs a base of 25%

     ★ 40% daily loss
     ★ 40% of 35% is 14%
     ★ Humidity after event = 35 – 14 = 21% after day 1
     ★ 40% of 21% is 8.4%
     ★ Humidity after event = 21 – 8.4 = 12.6% after day 2
     ★ 12.6% is less than 25% so +5%/day for next 3 days or so.

EG3: 2-day Type 4 event starting at 45% vs a base of 25%

     ★ 60% daily loss
     ★ 60% of 45% is 27%
     ★ Humidity after event = 45 – 27 = 18% after day 1
     ★ 60% of 18% is 10.8%
     ★ Humidity after event = 18 – 10.8 = 7.2% after day 2
     ★ 7.2% is less than 25% so +5%/day for next 4-5 days.

EG4: 3-day Type 3 event starting at 45% vs a base of 25%

     ★ 60% daily loss
     ★ 60% of 45% is 27%
     ★ Humidity after event = 45 – 27 = 18% after day 1
     ★ 60% of 18% is 10.8%
     ★ Humidity after event = 18 – 10.8 = 7.2% after day 2
     ★ 60% of 7.2% is 4.32%, round to 4.3%
     ★ Humidity after event = 7.2 – 4.3 = 2.9% after day 3
     ★ 2.9% is less than 25% so +5%/day for next 5-6 days.

EG5: 1-day Type 5 event starting at 45% humidity vs a Base of 25%:

     ★ 75% daily loss
     ★ 75% of 45% is 33.75%, round to 33.8
     ★ Humidity after event = 45 – 33.8 = 11.2%
     ★ 11.2% is less than 25% so +5%/day for next 3 days or so.

EG6: 4-day Type 1 event starting at 55% humidity vs a Base of 40%

     ★ 33% daily loss
     ★ 33% of 55% is 18.3%
     ★ Humidity after event = 55 – 18.3 = 36.7% after day 1
     ★ 33% of 36.7% is 12.2%
     ★ Humidity after event = 36.7 – 12.2 = 24.5% after day 2
     ★ 33% of 24.5% is 8.167%, round to 8.2%
     ★ Humidity after event = 24.5 – 8.2 = 16.3% after day 3
     ★ 33% of 16.3% is 5.433%, round to 5.4%
     ★ Humidity after event = 16.3 – 5.4 = 10.9% after day 4
     ★ 10.9% is less than 40% so +5%/day for next 6 days, give-or-take.

EG7: 2-day Type 2 event starting a 55% humidity vs a base of 40%

     ★ 40% daily loss
     ★ 40% of 55% is 22%
     ★ Humidity after event = 55 – 22 = 33% after day 1
     ★ 40% of 33% is 13.2%
     ★ Humidity after event = 33 – 13.2 = 19.8% after day 2
     ★ 19.8% is less than 40% so +5%/day for approximately the next 5 days.

Tropics add 2 to the Event Type in the rainy season and +10% per day recovered.

4.8.7.14 Winds

Given that we’re talking about sailing ships, winds are pretty close to all-important. For that reason, I’ve gone more deeply into the subject than I otherwise would have.

4.8.7.14.1 Wind Speed

This is based on a divided die roll. These are useful because they permit extreme but improbable results while maintaining a low that is bunched up toward the low end of the results.

     ★ Step 1: 5d10 =
     ★ Step 2: + 1/2 × d% =
     ★ Step 3: × 4.84 / 4d6, round down =
     ★ Step 4: + 2d6

This has a minimum of 0, an average of 22.5, and a maximum of 133. The lowest result with a significant chance of occurring is 11 (0.58%) and the highest is 44 (0.51%). So it’s far to say the result is usually 11-44, with 22-23 the most likely, but with a slim chance of results outside of this.

I’ve done a graph using AnyDice, my favorite tool for this sort of thing, and am presenting it below in two ways. First, the usual orientation of these things:



And now, turned on it’s side (so that I can make it far bigger):



These show the two constituents. Note the way the “+2d6” smooths the probability curve out!

The results are significant. Once again: Usually 11-44, with 22-23 the most likely, but with a slim chance of results outside of this, down to 0 or up to 133:

Beaufort Scale Table 1
km/h		mph		knots		ft/sec		m/sec		Beaufort Number
low	high	low	high	low	high	low	high	low	high
0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
2	5	1	3	1	3	1	4	0.4	1.3	1
6	11	4	7	3	6	6	10	1.8	3.1	2
13	19	8	12	7	10	12	18	3.6	5.4	3
21	29	13	18	11	16	19	26	5.8	8	4
31	39	19	24	17	21	28	35	8.5	10.7	5
40	50	25	31	22	27	37	45	11.2	13.9	6
51	61	32	38	28	33	47	56	14.3	17	7
63	74	39	46	34	40	57	67	17.4	20.6	8
76	87	47	54	41	47	69	79	21	24.1	9
89	101	55	63	48	55	81	92	24.6	28.2	10
103	121	64	75	56	65	94	110	28.6	33.5	11
122+		76+		66+		111+		34+		12

…they can be used directly on the km/h column.

Conversions: 100 km/h = 62.1371 mph = 53.9957 knots = 27.7778 m/s = 91.1344 f/s

but, it’s usually close enough to say:

100 km/h = 62 mph = 54 knots = 28 m/s = 91 f/s

Okay, so what does the “Beaufort Number” mean, in real terms? I’ve more or less covered this before, but we’re talking events at sea, and that requires additional information.



Ship on Stormy Seas by Ivan Aivazovsky, Public Domain, courtesy Wikimedia Commons

Beaufort Scale Table 2
Beaufort Number	Unofficial Label	Description
0	Calm	No Wind, Sea is like a mirror. Sails useless.
1	Light Air	Barely moves tree leaves. Water ripples but no foam crests. Waves under 0.5 ft.
2	Light Breeze	Wind felt, leaves & weather-vanes Move. Small wavelets with glassy tops crests that do not break, 0.5-1 foot height. Light flags fully extended. Insufficient wind for anything larger than a Sloop.
3	Gentle Breeze	Leaves in constant motion, Wavelets 2-3 ft in height, crests begin to break, foam of glassy appearance, occasional whitecap.
4	Moderate Winds	Small Branches move, dust and light objects blown about. No noticeable sound from the rigging. Flags extended, heavy flags flap limply. Waves 3-5 ft high, frequent whitecaps. Slack halyards curve and sway.
5	Fresh Winds	Wind felt strongly. Large Branches & small trees sway, Crested wavelets on inland lakes & rivers. Waves tending to be long 6-8 ft tall at sea, some spray. Slack halyards whip while bending continuously to leeward, taut ones maintain slightly bent positions. Heavy flags do not extend but flap over entire length.
6	Strong Winds	Large Branches in continuous motion, Umbrellas used with difficulty. Large Waves 9-12 ft in height begin to form, some spray likely, white caps extensive. Below 35°F (22°C), wind stings face. Slight effort to maintain balance against the wind. All halyards whip slightly. Low moaning from the rigging. Heavy flags extend fully and flap more vigorously.
7	Dangerous Winds	Whole trees in motion, hard to walk Against the wind and you have to lean into the wind to stand up. Waves 13-19 ft, white foam from breaking waves begins to be blown in streaks along direction of wind. Low whistling from rigging. Oilskins & loose clothing catch the wind and puff out. Heavy flags fully extended and only flap at the ends.
8	Gale	Wind breaks twigs & small branches, and impedes walking. At sea, creates waves 18-25 ft tall. The edges of crests begins to break, blown in clear streaks following the line of wind. Loose clothing blows out strongly, loose limbs/head blown back if resistance is relaxed. Loud whistle from the rigging, Heavy flag flies straight out fully extended. Masts noticeably bend and creak and sail must be reduced to 50%.
9	Strong Gale	Structural damage to buildings, tree branches downed. Waves 23-32 ft with dense streaks along direction of wind. Crests of waves begin to topple. tumble, and roll over. Spray may affect visibility. Sails must be reduced to 25% or less and masts are still at risk. Wind cannot be safely quartered without risk of capsizing.
10	Extreme Gale	Considerable structural damage, weak roofs torn apart, small trees uprooted. Large tree limbs may break. Glass windows may shatter from wind alone. Waves 29-41 ft high with long overhanging crests. Foam in great patches is blown in dense patches in the line of the wind. Sea is overall whitish from foam and tumbling becomes heavy. Visibility down to approx 15-25m. Sails must be taken/cut down or masts will break. Wooden vessels can be felt flexing underfoot, must be anchored or will be turned sideways and then capsized. Anchor chains taught and may break Impossible to walk into the wind without ropes or similar assistance.
11	Weak Hurricane	Widespread damage, roofs may be completely torn away and large trees uprooted. Masts break even without sails. Waves 37-52 ft tall, small & medium ships completely lost to view behind waves. Sea completely covered with long patches of foam along the direction of the wind. Edges of wave crests are blown into froth. Visibility of 5-15m. Anchor chains at risk, ships assume extreme angles, turning to broadside the wind; chains may have to be cut / released. Impossible to stay upright in the wind and even crawling is difficult.
12	Hurricane	Severe and extensive damage, Vehicles overturned, timber houses leveled. The air at sea is filled with foam and spray. The sea is completely white. Visibility is 2-5m only. Cannot crawl into the wind. Small buildings may be leveled or torn away whole. Anchor chains snap, ships capsize unless steered directly away from or into the wind and most can’t respond to slight variations in wind direction quickly enough. Masts lost / broken, and it is often safer to chop them down. Ships may break in two. People are lifted up / blown away.

We’re not quite done yet – there are a couple of biases to throw in.

Step 5: If there is a significant change in temperature, add 4.
Step 6a: If there is an actual change in conditions, add 2d6+5 when moving to short threshold; or
Step 6b: divide by 2 and add 2d6+5 if moving to or in long threshold.
Step 7: (optional): divide by 2 and add half of yesterday’s result.

Personally, I wouldn’t go with the Step 7 option; one day doesn’t have to look like another and there’s enough variability built into the system that it’s probably a wasted effort, anyway.

EG1: 2.5° drop in temp, long threshold conditions. Yesterday’s wind at this time of day was 26 km/h..

     ★ 5d10 roll = 25
     ★ + 1/2 d% roll = +46 / 2 = +23; total 48
     ★ x 4.84 / 4d6 = × 4.84 / 7 = 33
     ★ + 2d6 roll = +9, total 42.
     ★ 42 is Beaufort Scale 6, strong winds.

Commentary: because the 4d6 roll was well below average, the result is right at the top of the results spread that should be expected, most of the time. If the 5d10 had been higher, the wind speed would be well outside the normal range.

     ★ 2.5°C is not a huge temp drop, but it is noteworthy. The GM rules it significant.
     ★ 42 + 4 = 46.
     ★ Step 6a does not apply.
     ★ Divide by 2 = 23
     ★ add 2d6++5 rolled =+8 = 31.

     ★ 31 is right at the bottom limit of Beaufort Scale 5, Fresh Winds.

Steps 5 and 6 definitely make a difference.

     ★ Optional: 31/2 = 15.5; + 1/2 of 26 = +13, total 28.5.
Commentary This would be enough to drop to Beaufort Scale 4, Moderate Winds – for no better reason than there were Moderate Winds yesterday, too. I don’t think shifting from one Beaufort Number to one higher is too big a step for a day. But it does make changes more gradual and progressive, less abrupt.

I could even see GMs deciding that Step 7 applies in some specific waters and not others. The Mediterranean is fairly sheltered by land; step 7 might apply. The Atlantic is notoriously more changeable than the Pacific; step 7 might also apply to the latter. Heck, there’s nothing stopping anyone who wants to from working out what the impact of Step 7 will be on any particular day and then deciding whether or not it’s in effect!

EG2: 1.2°C temperature change, weather becoming unsettled; yesterday at this time was 15 km/h.

     ★ 5d10 roll = 29
     ★ + 1/2 d% roll = +53 / 2 = +26.5; total 55.5
     ★ x 4.84 / 4d6 = × 4.84 / 23 = 11.68, round to 11.
     ★ + 2d6 roll = +7, total 18.
     ★ 1.2°C is a significant change.
     ★ Step 6a: +2d6+5 = +14; total 32.
     ★ Step 6b does not apply.
     ★ 32 is Beaufort Scale 5, Fresh Winds.

If ever there was a time to ignore Step 7, it’s when the weather changes.

One more: EG3: 2.5° Temperature Change, weather already unsettled becoming stable, yesterday at this time =28 km/h.

     ★ 5d10 roll = 30
     ★ + 1/2 d% roll = +72 / 2 = +36; total 66
     ★ x 4.84 / 4d6 = × 4.84 / 16 = 19.965, round to 19.
     ★ + 2d6 roll = +5, total 24.
     ★ 2.5°C is a significant change, so +4 = 28.
     ★ Step 6a: +2d6+5 = +7; total 35.
     ★ Step 6b: / 2 = 17.5, + d6+5 again = +7 (as already rolled) = 24.5.
     ★ 24 is Beaufort Scale 4, Moderate Winds.

I’ve added a worksheet for these calculations to the free PDF. It has room for 9 calculations on a page (I wanted 10 but couldn’t quite fit them in).

4.8.7.14.2 Ship Speed vs Wind Speed

The trigonometry is fairly obvious – the speed of the ship is the amount of wind that is pushing the ship forward. By changing the angle of the ship relative to the wind, you can change the proportion of the wind that’s pushing you in the forward direction.

That’s far too complicated for a game. So, instead, I’ve employed the concept of Favorable Winds. I’ll go into this in much more detail in 4.8.7.14.5 below, but, in a nutshell:

Wind from directly behind is 70% efficient. Every ship has a defined angle of Favorable Winds – the base angle is ± 30° to either side.

Beyond that is a ‘near favorable’ wind, usually another 30° arc. Winds from this direction are 50% efficient.

After that comes ‘tolerable wind’, usually another 30° arc. Winds from this direction are 30% efficient.

‘Intolerable wind’ is blowing in completely the wrong direction. Some vessel types can nevertheless make forward progress at 10% efficiency. The rest need to rely on rowers.

Adding extra masts adds 5% efficiency to favorable winds, 7.5% to near-favorable and 3% to tolerable wind efficiencies. Extra masts also increase the ranges of Favorable Winds and Tolerable Winds by 10° for the first and 5° each after that. Note that all this is a simplification of a much more complex situation, and generalized, and even a bit exaggerated.

If the resulting speed is greater than the vessel’s limit, there is a risk of the wind uprooting the masts, which could break a ship in two. Find/estimate the % over maximum and add 35 – that’s the percentage chance per 30 minutes of this happening. If the % is over 100, halve both the % and the time scale between checks. Round % up and time down.

EG: 260% of safe speed: 35+260=295% every 30 minutes; becomes 147.5% every 15 minutes, becomes 73.75% every 7.5 minutes, becomes 74% every 7 minutes.

To avoid this, it is normal practice to ‘trim the sails’ until the speed is the maximum safe plus whatever margin the captain wants (just in case of a gust of greater force).

Another way to look at all this: divide the ship’s maximum rates speed by the % shown and you will find out at what wind speed you need to start trimming sail for safety.



Wind-driven waves like this can hide dangerous rocks even as they push a vessel toward them. Image credit: A stormy sea at Yellow Craig by Walter Baxte, available under the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 2.0 Generic license.

4.8.7.14.3 Wind Direction

There are two ways of specifying wind direction: Wind From and Wind To. And endless confusion awaits unless you are clear which one you are talking about. Unless stated otherwise, or obviously otherwise (as in Favored Winds), I will consistently try to use Wind To.

Clearly, wind direction is just as important as wind speed. The base direction is always away from (day) or towards (night) the nearest significant land mass.

The GM decides what’s a significant land mass, and what’s not, but in general, peninsulas and small islands won’t cut it. A small island with a 10,000 foot mountain, on the other hand…



I threw the above image together to illustrate this point. Essentially, I put a whole heap of possible locations on the map and then guesstimated by eye where the closest land would be. There’s even one rogue point (bottom row, third from the right) that in retrospect should probably be a little more westerly, like those on either side of it.

There’s actually a lot to unpack in the image. The coast curves southwest from the start of the peninsula. This has a significant effect if you are trying to head north. From just below the point of the peninsula, the indicated nearest land-mass is north of most positions until you get to the right-hand side of the map – where the headlands between beaches bulge outward, causing more westerly deviations. That headland would be a great place for a trading port, with the beaches to either side for wharves.

A brief mention of scale: the map doesn’t have one. All that can be said is that there is no comparable landmass closer than the one shown. If that means that the map is 100 km to a side, or 1000, it doesn’t matter.

Significant (there’s that word again) levels of overgrowth can reduce the significance of the landmass. This is all about how hot the ground gets.

More than 50% cloud cover can also impact significance.

If there are no significant land masses in reasonable proximity, then the base direction is directly away from the equator and opposing the direction of motion of the planetary body. The closer to either equator or poles you are, the less significant the equatorial contribution and the more significant the rotational contribution:



But even this is sporting more precision than we really want. N,NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW – those eight directions are almost good enough. Throw in one more subdivision – NNW, etc – and we’re good to go. This divides the circle into 16 pieces of 22.5° each. That’s convenient, too, because the tropics are almost exactly 22.5° from the equator (the correct figure is 23.5°, but this is close enough).

Next, we have the familiar d6 roll:

d6
     1-2 minus angle (counterclockwise)
     3-4 as yesterday
     5-6 plus angle (clockwise)

And then a d20 (included in the Free PDF):

d20	Interpretation
1-6	0 steps from base direction
7-11	1 step from base direction
12-14	2 steps from base direction
15-16	3 steps from base direction
17-18	4 steps from base direction
19	5 steps from base direction
20	6 steps from base direction

There are two adjustments to the resulting direction:

     +1 step away from next greatest heat source
     +1 step towards west (if normal planetary rotation).

…. and that’s it. The hardest part is visualizing the environment and determining the base wind direction.

I realize that almost everyone will be completely familiar with it, but on the off chance that someone is not:



I had some room left, so I threw in figure 2 (actually, it ended up taking 4x as long as figure 1 to complete, but it seemed like a good idea at the time). This illustrates the probability of wind coming from a given direction relative to the base direction.

If the wind has a base direction from the Southwest, i.e, to the Northeast, then almost all of the time it will be 1-2 steps away at most, i.e. blowing to the North, North-North East, North-East, East-Northeast, or East. 70% of the time, one of those directions will be the wind direction, and 57% of the time it will NOT be the indicated Northeast, but off to one side or the other – but that’s before the adjustments above are taken into account.



This is what can easily result: A Shipwreck In Stormy Seas by Claude-Joseph Vernet, Public Domain, courtesy Wikimedia Commons

4.8.7.14.4 Wind Duration

Another critical question is how long the wind will blow before it shifts. Note that the strength usually doesn’t change from such a wind shift, it will stay steady – unless you are in short threshold mode.

This is a straight d% roll. As usual, also in the PDF.

d%	Wind Duration			d%	Wind Duration
01-06	(6%)	1 hour		75-84	(10%)	8 hours
07-14	(8%)	2 hours		85-87	(3%)	9 hours
15-26	(12%)	3 hours		88-93	(6%)	10 hours
27-40	(14%)	4 hours		94-95	(2%)	11 hours
41-54	(14%)	5 hours		96-99	(4%)	12 hours
55-66	(12%)	6 hours		0 0	(1%)	12 hours + roll again
67-74	(8%)	7 hours		Odd Numbers:		– 1/2 hour

     ★ The first Wind event of the day has a rolled duration threshold. It generally starts at around 4AM.

     ★ The second wind event lasts from the end of the first until 4 PM or for a new duration roll, whichever is later.

     ★ The third starts at 4PM+ and has a rolled duration.

     ★ The 4th starts at the end of the third and has a rolled duration or until 4AM, whichever is sooner.

     ★ The 5th event, if any, lasts until 4AM.

Let’s do an example or two.

EG1:
     ▪ Wind 1: 25 km/h North. d% roll = 74. Rolled duration 7 hrs. Starts approx 4AM, lasts until approx 11AM.

     ▪ Wind 2: still 25 km/h, now to the North-north-west. d% roll = 58, duration = 6 hrs i.e. to 5PM. This is later than the 4PM cutoff but it still applies.

     ▪ Wind 3: base direction has changed from NNW to SSE. Wind is 18 km/h and to the South. d% roll = 96. Duration = 11 hours. Starts at 5PM so that’s until 3AM.

     ▪ Wind 4: At 3AM, there is a wind shift to the ESE. Wind remains 18 km/h. It doesn’t matter what the d% roll is because at 4AM it will be the start of a new day with a new wind roll – according to the RAW.

       But if I were the DM, I’d rule that the day started an hour early (in terms of wind), just as the night started an hour late, and roll a duration starting from 3AM: d% = 49. Duration 5 hours, less 1/2 hour for the odd number result. Starting at 3 AM so lasting until 7:30 AM. And I would list this as Wind 1 of the next day.

EG2:
     ▪ Wind 1: 11 km/h ESE. Started at 4AM. d% roll = 77, duration 7.5 hrs, until 11:30 AM.

     ▪ Wind 2: still 11 km/h, shifted clockwise 0 steps relative to the adjusted base direction (East) – so wind shifts to the East. d% roll 40, duration of 4 hrs, from 11:30 AM to 3:30 PM.

     ▪ Wind 3:
still 11 km/h, shifted clockwise 5 steps from the base – so a big shift to the SSW! d% roll = 16, so Duration is 3 hrs, from 3:30PM to 6:30 PM. This is past the 4 PM wind change, which is delayed accordingly.

     ▪ Wind 4:
31 km/h. Baseline shifts from East to West. Wind direction is 2 steps counter-clockwise of that, to the Southwest. In effect, this is a 1-step change in wind direction. d% roll =53, so duration is 4 1/2 hrs from 6:30 PM to 11 PM.

     ▪ Wind 5: From 11 PM until 4AM, when the next baseline shift takes place, the wind is from the South, i.e. at right angles to what would normally be expected. It continues to be pretty strong at 31 km/h – officially “Fresh”. This is fast enough to cause considerable windchill, but that’s a subject for another day.

4.8.7.14.5 Favorable Winds

Favorable Winds are winds that move a vessel in the direction it wants to go. They don’t have to be perfect; just good enough for the sails to function properly.



Above are 5 panels. The first one illustrates what was described earlier – the favorability of the wind and the impact of extra masts on those values.

Once you get into the red / dark colors, you are (at least in part) trying to sail into the wind. That… doesn’t really work (see 4.8.7.14.7 unfavorable winds, below).

Again, the ratings are:
     Favorable 30°+ (70%+)
     Near Favorable 30°+ (50%+)
     Tolerable 30°+ (30%+)
     Intolerable 90°- (0 or 10%).

Extra Masts (each):
     +5% Favorable efficiency
     +7.5% Near-favorable
     +3% Tolerable efficiency

     +10° Favorable (to either side), first additional mast
     +5° Favorable (to either side), other additional masts
     +0° Near-favorable
     +10° Tolerable (to either side), first additional mast
     +5° Tolerable (to either side), other additional masts

The figure depicts a two-masted ship, so let’s work some numbers:
     ▪ Favorable: 70%+5% = 75% efficiency, Arc 30°+10°=40° to either side.
     ▪ Near Favorable: from 40° to 70° on either side, efficiency 57.5%
     ▪ Tolerable: 30+10=40° arc from 70° to 110° on either side; efficiency 30%+3%=33%.
     ▪ Intolerable: forward 70° to either side.

Here’s a quick comparison between 1 and 2 masts, showing exactly how much a vessel gains:



Here’s the fun part: Our wind direction system uses increments of 22.5° – or, more accurately, ±11.25°. The ship operations subsystem does not – people might consider that an oversight, or a mistake. This paragraph is here to correct any such impression – this is a deliberate choice because it makes the results a bit rubbery and flexible. The GM decides where in that ±11.25° the wind is actually blowing – and hence, at times, how favorable the winds are.

Some things are covered automatically – 22.5° to either side is less than 30°, but 33.75° is not – but unless the GM is deliberately nasty, players would reasonably expect both winds from directly behind the ship and any from one step to either side to be “Favorable”. It’s when winds stop being Favorable that this flexibility comes into its’ own.

Getting back to the main illustration, panel 2 shows a ship attempting to reach a port along line A1. The problem is that – as shown by line B1 – the closest significant land is West of the ship, and not in the desired direction of travel. And that means that the base winds are from the direction arcs shown.

Now, with 2 masts, there’s a 50-50 chance that these will still be at least Tolerable, and possibly even Near-Favorable, though that’s unlikely. So progress would be slow, but possible.

But time is money, and there is a faster approach. Note the dashed line – that’s the dividing line between the land to the North being the nearest significant landmass, and the land to the West. If the captain knows what he’s doing, he will try to position his vessel on the right-hand side of that dashed line, as shown in the third panel.

A2 is a shorter distance to land than B2, so the base winds are now oriented north and south. During the daytime winds, no progress might be possible, but when the wind shifts in the later afternoon, the captain can ride them all the way into harbor.

But time is money, and a smart captain will realize the situation shown in panel 4, in which the zone of maximum efficiency of his particular vessel has been mapped onto the harbor entrance, creating a zone between that and the dashed line. So long as he ends up anywhere in that zone when the winds shift, he can reasonably expect them to be favorable.

Panel 5 shows the results of what can be done by a captain who is smart enough – even starting from the user-unfriendly initial position. Starting the previous night, the captain steers Northwest. If he can manage a 45-degree course, half his movement is in the direction he wants to go in Leg 1.

When the wind shifts, the captain turns 90° to port, so that he is now heading North-east. Again, about half his movement is in the direction he wants to go, and so far, everything has been at maximum efficiency, i.e. the best speed possible.

That stops being the case when the ship crosses the dashed line, because the winds shift to a base north-south configuration, and the daytime is in the wrong direction. If he has enough masts, though, he can continue going a little bit north of east. or he can turn to head due East until the afternoon change in base wind direction. The whole purpose of the day’s maneuvers is to ensure that when this happens, the ship is within that shaded zone – and favorable winds will then generally put the ship into port in short order.

If you can predict the wind, however vaguely and uncertainly, you can manipulate the situation to your advantage.

4.8.7.14.6 Becalmed

Beaufort Scale 0 and 1 is not enough wind to get any ship moving. You are Becalmed, and the only thing you can do is wait and hope.

Beaufort Scale 2 is enough for Pinnaces and Sloops. Everything else is still Becalmed, and not going anywhere.

Beaufort Scale 3 is enough to get most vessels moving, however slowly – but ‘most’ is not all. Vessels of significant inherent weight, or that are fully laden with cargo, may not quite get going – that’s up to the GM. They have to wait for at least Scale 4 winds.

4.8.7.14.7 Unfavorable Winds

The only thing worse than being becalmed is having the wind come from completely the wrong direction. With Barques and Pinnaces, they have sail configurations that can overcome this problem (see 4.8.7.15.7 below) – everything else has a choice: drop anchor and furl sails and wait it out, or furl sails and deploy oars. Lots of oars – see 4.8.7.15.6.

Sometimes (but not always) it is possible to position the ship so that the winds are at least Tolerable, enabling you to keep moving, even if only slowly. If the winds are strong enough, you might even get a decent rate of speed up. If even a little of the motion is in the desired direction, you can tack back and forth, zigzagging your way to where you want to go.

Some vessels are better at this than others – sloops and Light Frigates and Extreme Clippers, for example, are very good. Beyond those three, it’s all about turn mode – if you ship is not very maneuverable, you can’t tack very well. As a general rule, the Turn Mode doubles the number of lengths of the ship that it takes to execute a 90-degree turn (1/3 this for a 30 degree turn, 1/10th for a 9-degree turn – you get the idea).

So a turn mode of 5 is twice as bad as a turn mode of 4, which is twice as bad as a turn mode of 3, and so on.

On top of that, the GM can add penalties for a ship being large / over-sized, or for a ship being fully laden (+1 turn mode for either), and for any sail damage. (A 50% damaged sail has only half the usual efficiency).

4.8.7.14.8 Violent Winds

Did I really say that the only thing worse than being becalmed was Unfavorable Winds? Well, from a plain English point of view, that’s a valid statement – but ‘Unfavorable’ has been given a specific, restricted, meaning within the system, and by that usage, even worse than winds coming from the wrong direction are winds strong enough to damage the vessel.

This is where being big helps instead of hindering; the presumption is made that heavy ships are stronger. This alone can be enough to drop the effective Beaufort number by 1 for the purposes of dealing with the effects of violent winds.

     ★ Square the Beaufort Number, multiply by the number of masts, then divide by the ship class number to get the number of dice of damage that the wind inflicts every 30 minutes.

     ★ Ships can ignore 1.5 points of damage for each class number.

EG1: Beaufort 5, three masts, Class 23: 5^2 = 25, × 3 = 75, / 23 = 3.26 d6, round down to 3. Maximum result of 18, vs Resistance of 23 × 1.5 = 34.5 (round down to 34). This is not going to damage the ship.

EG2: Same ship, Beaufort Number 7. 7^2 = 49, × 3 = 147, / 23 = 6.39, round down to 6. Maximum result of 36, so there is a possibility of slight damage.

EG3: Same ship, Beaufort Number 9: 9^2 = 81, × 3 = 243, / 23 = 10.56 d6, round down to 10. Maximum result of 60, average result of 35; vs resistance of 34 – the ship will take damage, and enough damage can sink it.

Furling sails reduces damage to sails and masts to 10%.

4.8.7.14.9 Extreme Winds: Hurricanes etc

Beaufort Number 10 Winds are when the trouble really starts.

Instead of squaring the Beaufort Number, Square double it (or simply multiply the number of dice by 4).

EG Same Merchantman, Beaufort Number 10: 10^2=100, x4 = 400, x3 = 1200; / 23 = 52.1 d6, round down to 52. Minimum result 52 vs resistance of 34 – ever 30 minutes, the ship will take damage. Average result, 148 pts over resistance. Maximum result 278 points over resistance. Furling sails reduces actual damage to 27.8 points, maximum – so no damage. Don’t expect that to be the case at Beaufort numbers 11 and 12, however.


4.8.7.15.6 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Oarsmen Requirements

     ▪ Divide the total weight of the ship and cargo by the number of oarsmen.
     ▪ Divide their average Carrying Capacity by the result and multiply by 264 to get it in feet / minute.

     ▪ Divide that by 3.281 to get m / min.
     ▪ Divide m / min by 26.82 to get mph.
     ▪ Divide mph by 1.609 to get km/h.

Stop whenever you have a unit of speed that is appropriate to the scale of your maps.

Another way of looking at it: Total Carry Capacity of the Oarsmen has to exceed the total weight of the ship and cargo or it’s not going anywhere under oar power.

4.8.7.15.7 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Sail Solutions

As mentioned, Pinnaces and Barques have a sail configuration that lets them sail straight into the wind – albeit slowly.

But I did once hear about an enterprising if desperate crew in a pirates game who cut down two of their three masts on a merchantman so that they could sew the sails into an over-sized version of this solution, improvising the rigging required. I forget what the GM in question rules, but in my book the inconvenience and loss of efficiency caused by the loss of the two masts was quite enough to make up for permitting this solution to work. But, given that the ship now had less than the usual minimum number of sails, efficiency would have been compromised accordingly.

Still, desperate times…

4.8.8 Currents & Waves

Being becalmed may not be the end of the world. Currents alone can provide motive power, although far less speedily than wind power.



This satellite photo released into the public domain by NASA has been edited to show the major currents of the world’s oceans and seas by Ingwik and released as a derivative work under the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

Currents flow not only horizontally but vertically, cycling up and down as they travel. To a ship on the surface, this effectively means that they wax and wane.

The Wikipedia page on Ocean Currents has a long list of currents that you can draw upon for further information, and there are more detailed maps available, too.

I’m not going to go into all the effects that they have; all I’m concerned with here is their direction and speed.

It’s important to note that there can be different currents at different depths, just as there can be different winds at different altitudes at the same time.

Surface currents are predominantly caused by wind, and – where possible – will be in the same direction. However, they have to turn away from that direction if there is land in the way, and the direction they turn is away from the equator – unless there’s a land mass between the wave and that geographic feature. But the shape of the land and all sorts of other factors can complicate this simple principle.

     ★ Look for the largest, strongest current in the vicinity, even if it’s not directly affecting the vessel’s location.

     ★ If it IS affecting the vessel, job done.

     ★ if it isn’t, one of two things will happen: a side current, or a reverse current.

A Side Current is basically a smaller curve looping off a larger one. They are a LOT smaller and weaker than the main current.



A Reverse Current interacts like two gears, with one gear being a side current:



Well, actually what happens is that variations in the major current creates a short-lived low pressure zone which gets filled with water from surrounding layers – but more tries to rush in than will fit, and this movement of water has momentum, and as the variation travels around the main current, additional water pushes against the water already moving in the other direction, and you end up with a much weaker current going in the reverse direction of the main current.

You can also get side-currents within a reverse current:



And, anywhere where the land varies greatly in its proximity to the main current, you can also get reverse currents:



… so it’s complicated.

The strongest current on earth is the Antarctic Circumpolar Current, which averages 10m / second (600m / min = 36 km/h), 5 times the strength of the far better-known Gulf Stream. Lesser currents range down to a couple of knots – refer to the Beaufort Scale tables to see just how low that is. The Gulf Stream and the Kuoshio Current are fast currents, moving about 2m per second (120 m / min or 7.2 km/h).

Tidal currents are caused by the positions of Earth and Moon and vary greatly in strength, even from one hour to another. Some locations experience much stronger / greater tides than others and stronger tidal currents are one of the results. Strong Tidal Currents can reach 8 knots or more.

Deep water currents are driven by density differences, and variations in water temperature and salinity (both of which trigger density differences in water). They move much slower than Tidal and Surface currents (but I couldn’t find an exact number, so I’m going to assume from the “much” that we’re talking about more than the Gulf Stream to Antarctic Current ratio and assume a factor of 10).

     ★ Using the above as a guide, estimate the strength of the major current in whatever units are most convenient.

     ★ A side-current will have about 1/4 the speed / power.

     ★ A reverse current will have about 1/10th the speed/power.

     ★ A side-current of a reverse current will have about 1/25th the speed/power.

     ★ A reverse current powered directly from the main current will have about 1/4 the speed/power of the main current.

     ★ A tidal current can add to another current, subtract from it (possibly overwhelming it), or be off at an angle to it, producing a compound current:



The diagram above demonstrates 12 different compound currents.

Figure 1 shows a Tidal Current adding to a Surface Current in the simplest possible configuration, exactly the same line.

Figure 2 shows the opposite, with the tidal current opposing the surface current. In this case, the tidal current is not enough to completely cancel out the surface current.

Figure 3 makes the Surface Current weaker and the tidal current stronger – now the tidal current is diminished but not overcome by the surface current.

Figure 4 shows a slightly more realistic situation in that the two currents are now in different directions. The results are our old friends vector sums.

Figure 5 uses a stronger tidal current for comparison to figure 4.

Figure 6 shows a slightly weaker surface current and a tidal current of the same strength but at an acute angle.

Figure 7 has the same configuration but a much stronger tidal current – so much so that the compound current is more than at right angles to the surface current.

Figure 8 has the same surface current but this time the small tide is at an oblique angle. The compound current is stronger as a result.

And Figure 9 shows an increased Tidal Current but is otherwise unchanged. The compound current shifts direction but only by a little, but it becomes much stronger.

Figure 10 is the first of three multi-hour compound charts. In this example, I’ve kept the surface current the same and varied the tidal current – again at right angles to the surface current. It starts strong, weakens, then the tide starts to go out, and finally, it becomes stronger again.

Figure 11 has the same configuration but with a surface current that is also varying – probably a bit more than normal, to be honest.

Finally, Figure 12 varies the angle of the surface current as well as it’s strength, and is the most realistic demonstration of the compound current that results.

     ★ Use the information provided to estimate the average strength of the respective surface and tidal currents.

     ★ Select the next smallest die size and roll it; subtract the result from the current’s strength. EG 7 knots minus 1d6 because 6 is the next smallest result from 7.

     ★ Using the diagrams, visualize the resulting compound tide’s direction and strength. Don’t worry too much about accuracy.

     ★ The longer the ship, the greater the effect side-on to the current, maybe as high as 25% efficiency. The wider the ship, the greater the effect when running with the current, maybe as high as 10% efficiency. In both cases, it can dip to as little as 3% going the other way.

     ★ The faster the ship, the more sleek and narrow it is. The larger its cargo capacity relative to its length, the broader it is. Using this information, guesstimate the proportions of the ship, and from them, the amount of speed that the currents will impart to it.



Image by Brian Kingston from Pixabay

I’ve saved the above image until close to the end of this article for a very good reason: take a look at the surface of the sea depicted, and you can tell that the current and wind are operating in different directions from the shape of the foam caused by the breaking waves ahead of the storm. Initially, you can’t tell which one is from the left and which one is coming rear-to-front or vice-versa, but look at the sails and the way they have billowed out and it becomes clear – the ship is running with the wind and across the current, exposing the broad side of the ship to that current, which will be pushing it just a bit left-to-right.

4.8.8.1 A brief note on Sea Anchors

A lot of people think that sea anchors work by digging into the sea floor. Such people have no appreciation for the depth of the sea, and how much chain would be required to lower the anchor that far, and how long that would take, and how much it would weigh.

Nope, not happening. It’s the weight of anchor and chain dangling in the water that slows a ship’s movement (it doesn’t stop it) – because the subsurface currents are so much weaker, and potentially in a completely different direction to the surface currents.

That means that the anchor can’t move as fast as the surface current tries to move the ship, and so it holds the ship more-or-less in place, the chain snapping taut. If the surface current is too strong – which can happen in a hurricane, say, or anytime wind and currents combine – it can even snap the anchor rope.

Anchors can and do drag ships, and if there’s a hazard close by in that direction, and the current in which the ship is anchored is strong enough, captains may be forced to cut away the anchor and let it – and most of the chain – fall to the bottom in a bid to save his vessel.

4.8.8.2 Favorable Currents

As with winds, favorable currents are currents that push the ship in the desired direction. Currents are often best viewed as a modifier to the direction of wind – the stronger the push on the ship, the stronger the impact, but it all has to be relative to the wind speed.

More accurately, the speed that the current imparts to the ship has to be assessed relative to the speed that the winds impart to the ship, so both are a question of the efficiency of this conversion. The effective force of the wind depends on the amount of sail being presented to the wind and the relative angle of the wind to the ship; the more unfavorable the wind, the more scope there is for currents to have an effect.

4.8.8.3 Still Currents

Still currents – the equivalent of being becalmed – are fairly rare, but they do happen – especially if a ship finds itself in a situation of current shear, where two currents ‘rub shoulders’ but flow in opposite directions. Take another look at the illustrations of side currents, and you can see that where two side currents exist side to side, this can be the case. However, it requires that the main current also be weak (because it moves those side currents with it).

Unless you are also becalmed, this won’t bother captains too much. When the winds have also dropped, though, it’s time to think about which of the maritime gods you may have offended, and what you can do about it.

4.8.8.4 Unfavorable Currents

Obviously, UNfavorable currents are those that push the ship into danger, or that oppose the winds, in whole or in part. A ten-knot current – very strong – can (if it’s in the wrong direction) slow your forward speed by… a couple of knots. Keep things in perspective – currents are a minor influence compared to winds, unless and until you become becalmed or furl the sails.

4.8.8.5 Violent Waves

Big waves, on the other hand, can pose an existential threat to the ship. The density of sea water varies from 1020 to 1029 kg / m^3. So, a wave 20m long and 1m high is essentially a shape like one of those below:



Wave shape #1 is low-velocity, gentle, rolling. It has a volume of 1 × 20 × 1/2 × 2, 3, 4, or 5m – so 20-50 m^3. It weighs 20500-51250 kg. Perhaps tonnes? 20.5- 51.25 of them. Or short tons? 22 – 56.5 is the number.

But the heavier the wave, the slower it’s moving, so the less damage it will do. We’re talking nothing more than Beaufort Scale 3, and probably less. That’s a wind speed of 5.4 m/s, tops, and 1/2 m v^2 gives kinetic energy of 1/2 × (20.5-51.25) × 5.4^2 = 10.25-25.625 × 29.16 = 299-747 whatevers – I’ve mixed units terribly for convenience, but that doesn’t matter so long as I use the same ones for the other shapes.

Wave shape #2 shows a wave not yet breaking but being pushed by the wind. It has a volume of 1/2 × 1 × (2.5-3.5) × 20 = 25-35m^3 and a weight of 25625 – 35875 kg or 25.625-35.875 Tonnes. These are the waves you get from Beaufort scale 5 winds, maybe 6, so 13.9 m/s. Kinetic energy = 1/2 × (25.625-35.875) × 13.9^2 = (12.8125-17.9375) × 193.21 = 2475.5 – 3465.7 whatevers – so the wave weighs about as much as the middle value for wave 1, but hits with 5-8 times as much energy.

Wave shape #3 shows breaking waves, and 1m tall is rather on the small side for them. It is presumed that the two shaded areas are roughly equal in size, so this is still (effectively) a simple triangle. So the volume is about the same as shape #2 and so is the mass. Here, we’re talking Beaufort Scale 7 or maybe 8, and 17 m/s winds. Kinetic Energy is 1/2 × (25.625-35.875) × 17^2 = (12.8125-17.9375) × 289 = 3702.8 – 5184 whatevers – almost 1 1/2 times as much force as wave #2 and 7.5 – 12 times what the gentle waves were doing.

But if I scale that up to what the wind speed says the waves should be, in height: 13-19′ waves = 3.9624 – 5.7912 m in height = 4 – 5.8 times as much volume = 4 – 5.8 times as much mass (102.5 -208 Tonnes) = 4 – 5.8 times as much kinetic energy, or 6 – 8.7 tomes as much as Wave #2 – and 30 – 70 times as much as the gentle waves.

That’s a Blue Whale at 38 mph hitting the side of the ship – every 2 or 3 seconds.

And that’s just the edge of the dangerous winds part of the Beaufort Scale. A full-scale hurricane, with 34 m/s winds, would be 4 times as bad even if the waves were no larger, which they would be, by a factor of almost 2.75. Between them, around 11 × the striking power of Wave #3.

And such waves would almost certainly be longer than the 20m used here – potentially as long as the ship, which is as long as it gets.



Some pictures have been included for purely decorative, evocative, reasons!
This image is by Elias from Pixabay

4.8.8.6 Extreme Waves: Tsunamis & Walls Of Water

But the dangers at sea don’t end there. Tsunamis are really only a problem at port – the wave as it travels across the ocean is really quite gentle but extremely fast moving and containing a LOT of displaced water, which (in turn) is being pushed by the water behind it, and so on.

Once it hits shallows, though, there is nowhere for all that water to go but up into the air, and that’s when you get an appreciation of how much power it has. Whatever isn’t nailed down – including apartment blocks – is up for grabs. Ships will find themselves bottoming out on the sea floor as the normal water retreats out to see, and then being crushed beneath thousands of tons of water, being carted miles inland if they manage to survive it – before being swept back out to sea as the water retreats.

But Tsunamis don’t frighten most sea captains.

Rogue Waves are a whole different story.

These are like two sets of percentiles and getting 00 on all of them. Every little thing adds up to create a wall of water more than twice as tall as the waves around them. Like Tsunamis, they can also move at ferocious speed and in directions other than the prevailing winds and currents.

The biggest one ever recorded was 58 feet tall.

In most parts of the world, rogue waves are roughly 3 in 10,000 – but in some places, they can be 3 in every 1,000, because the shape of the land controls the shape of the water and focuses the energy of the waves.

They travel at 500 mph (800 km/h). At that speed, they can strike a wooden vessel and leave nothing but kindling without even noticing. They do slow down when approaching land – which only makes the water coming behind the wave front pile up on top of it, producing an even bigger wave.

It’s often speculated that, like several other weather phenomena, there is a wind equivalent of a rogue wave. Anyone who has seen footage of an Australian Dust storm hundreds of kilometers long, a wall of brown in the sky, has plenty of reason to believe it’s true.

Rogue Weather can and does scare any captain that knows about them.

4.8.9 Other Applications of the Weather System

The main weather system – thresholds and change accumulators – can be used to simulate a vast range of other phenomena, both natural and unnatural. Everything from meteor strikes to stock markets to the price of coconuts.

In fact, anything that has a cyclic nature of some kind, where trends accumulate until something has to give or a tipping point is reached, can be modeled in this way.

That’s because it’s built on the concept of variable length cycles operating concurrently – sooner or later, you’ll ht the jackpot.

Most of these phenomena are ferociously difficult to simulate, so if you need to track one, you could do a lot worse than carving out a variation of the base system offered here.

4.9 Exotic Modes Of Transport

In a fantasy world, these mundane methods might not be the only ways to get around. And that means that someone will think about using them for a business edge. I don’t intend to go into them in any depth, but it would be criminally negligent not to at least mention them.

4.9.1 Flight

Ah, flight. The dream of man ever since he first clapped eyes on a bird – which, since they predate our evolution, was measured in seconds from the time our species was born.

There are three ways to fly.

You can ride a flying creature, in which case the cargo capacity is whatever it can carry and stay airborne, less your weight.

You can ride a flying contrivance, like a magic carpet or a hot air balloon, in which case area covered is a big deal – no part of the load can exceed the edges of the contrivance in question or you risk losing it. On top of that, there will be weight restrictions. But these are often poorly defined, so it’s going to be up to the GM to overcome any gaps or shortcomings.

Or you can cast a spell on someone, in which case they are restricted to whatever load they can carry.

Flight is great for getting something somewhere, fast – but until the wright brothers and several generations of aircraft follow them, cargo capacity is infinitesimal.

Duration of Flight is another hugely limiting factor. You may be able to travel five times as fast as a horse – but you’ll almost certainly be on the ground again a long time before that horse runs out of oomph for the day.

4.9.2 Teleport

Teleport spells also usually affect an area, or the individuals within an area. So they are restricted, in terms of travel, in much the same way that flying is – but with far greater range.

4.9.3 Magic Gates & Portals

This is where things get more interesting. Essentially, these abolish the distance between points A and B – anything that can physically fit through the portal is fair game.

If it can fit into a caravan, and that caravan can fit through the portal or gate, you’re in business.

Some GMs impose additional restrictions on teleporting and gate / portal travel to keep things from getting out of hand, for example having portable holes and magic bags turn inside-out. This effectively restricts traders to what they can carry, either personally, or in a wagon of some sort.

It’s important to recognize that gates and portals are strategically-important targets. If you conquer a Kingdom that sports one, you can find enemy forces in your back pocket at any time. That makes capturing them a very high priority.

Some will decide that having such things around is a lot more vulnerability than they are worth, and may seek to destroy them. That’s a problem if you’ve built a business around them still being there.

As a general rule, exotic modes of transport can’t compete with the bulk carrying capacities of more mundane choices. But they can add a lot of color.

Finally, chapter 4 is complete! It has thrown tentacles out in various unexpected directions along the way, but I got there! This is going to posted late – it’s 40 minutes past deadline as I speak and it still needs to be spellchecked and formatted and so on – but it is done!

Next week is scheduled to be a time-out post, and I’m not sure what’s doing the week after because I know I’ll be away for part of the weekend at a family gathering. If I can get a post done in time, it will be something short – another timeout, almost certainly.

Until then, have fun at the table!

Finally! After the diversions caused by Rafts and boats, today the series focuses on Ships at sea, with a bonus sci-fi section or two on the side.

The original plan was to also include Weather at Sea and Exotic Transportation Modes but the former has quickly grown to the point where the post would not be ready to publish if I insisted on including it.

So, even though I’ve put 1900 words into it already, those sections have been excerpted from this post and relegated to part 13, soon to follow – I have some original game mechanics for weather that I want to get down on ‘paper’ before I forget them, so I will be trying to strike while the iron is hot!

Unfortunately, there also wasn’t time to convert my quick-and-dirty spreadsheet into a fully-functional version to give away as a bonus freebie. Besides, if I did one for rafts – a minor side-note within the bigger topic – I would then have to ask why I hadn’t done one for more important parts of the system, and the answer of “too complicated, too little time” would have sounded rather hollow. The process is there and clear, and that will have to do, I’m afraid.

Table Of Contents: In part one of Chapter 4: Modes Of Transport

4.0 A Word about Routes

4.0.1 Baseline Model
4.0.2 Relative Sizes
4.0.3 Competitors
4.0.4 Terrain I
4.0.5 Terrain II
4.0.6 Multi-paths and Choke Points

4.0.6.1 Sidebar: Projection Of Military Force

4.0.7 Mode Of Transport

4.1 Backpack / Litters / Shanks Pony

4.1.1 Capacity
4.1.2 Personalities / Roleplay

4.2 Horseback

4.2.1 Capacity
4.2.2 Requirements
4.2.3 Personalities / Roleplay

4.3 Mule Train

4.3.1 Capacity
4.3.2 Requirements
4.3.3 Personalities / Roleplay

4.4 Wagons

4.4.1 Capacity
4.4.2 Requirements
4.4.3 Other Exceptions – Animal Size

4.4.3.1 Sidebar: Road Trains

4.4.4 Fodder / Food & Water Needs

4.4.4.1 People
4.4.4.2 Horses
4.4.4.3 Mules
4.4.4.4 Oxen / Cattle
4.4.4.5 Elephants
4.4.4.6 Other

4.4.5 Personalities / Roleplay

In Part 2:

4.5 River Boats & Barges

4.5.0 A Splice Of Maritime History

4.5.0.1 Dugouts & Canoes
4.5.0.2 Rafts
4.5.0.3 Boats
4.5.0.4 Poled Rafts & Barges
4.5.0.5 Oars
4.5.0.6 Land-based motive power
4.5.0.7 Sail
4.5.0.8 Better Sails
4.5.0.9 Trading Ships
4.5.0.10 Warships & Pirates
4.5.0.11 Beyond the age of sail
4.5.0.12 Riverboats
4.5.0.13 Sources

4.5.1 Riverboat Capacity
4.5.2 Favorable Winds

4.5.2.1 The Beaufort Wind Scale

4.5.3 Favorable Currents
4.5.4 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Oarsmen Requirements
4.5.5 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Sail Solutions
4.5.6 Extreme Weather Events
4.5.7 The Tempest Scale
4.5.8 Vessel Rating
4.5.9 Weather Cataclysms

In Part 3:

4.6 Rafts

4.6.1 Rowing Time & Exhaustion
4.6.2 The basics of vector sums

4.6.2.1 An Example
4.6.2.2 A better example
4.6.2.3 With Maths
4.6.2.4 Simplified Vector Sums
4.6.2.5 Multi-hour Vector Sums

4.6.3 Raft Design & Operation

4.6.3.1 Buoyancy
4.6.3.2 Raft Calculation Process
4.6.3.3 Why all this matters
4.6.3.4 Category 1 Raft Table
4.6.3.5 Category 2 Raft Table
4.6.3.6 Category 3 Raft Table
4.6.3.7 Category 4 Raft Tables
4.6.3.8 Category 5 Raft Tables
4.6.3.9 Category 6 Raft Tables

4.6.4 Overloaded Rafts
4.6.5 Raft Breakup
4.6.6 Construction Time
4.6.7 A final word on Overloading Capacities

4.7 Canoes etc

4.7.1 Proportions
4.7.2 Frontal Dimension
4.7.3 Base Speed

In today’s post:

4.8 Seagoing Vessels

4.8.0 Logistics At Sea and In Space

4.8.0.1 “But I don’t need to know this stuff, my PCs aren’t Space Traders…”
4.8.0.2 Using the analogy
4.8.0.3 A Word on Historical Accuracy

4.8.1 Capacity
4.8.2 Ships As Monsters
4.8.3 Ship Specifications

4.8.3.1 Physical Dimensions
4.8.3.2 Movement Parameters
4.8.3.3 Functionality
4.8.3.4 Combat
4.8.3.5 Data Sources
4.8.3.6 Ship Specifications

4.8.4 Some Thoughts About Cannon

4.8.4.1 Having Your Cannon And Your Flavor, Too
4.8.4.2 Crippled Land-Cannon
4.8.4.3 Personal Firearms
4.8.4.4 Bombs and other explosive devices

4.8.5 Exotic Crews

4.8.5.1 Human Height Adjustments
4.8.5.2 Non-human Height
4.8.5.3 Non-human Proportions
4.8.5.4 Crew Strength
4.8.5.5 Handling and other parameters

4.8.6 Mixed Crews

In the next post:

4.8.7 Weather At Sea

4.8.7.1 An Introduction to Weather (oversimplified)
4.8.7.2 Accumulated Potential and Threshold
4.8.7.3 Seasonal Weather Averages
4.8.7.4 Seasonal Weather Trends
4.8.7.5 Daily Temperature Variation
4.8.7.6 Weather Change Threshold
4.8.7.7 Humidity
4.8.7.8 Clouds & Rain
4.8.7.9 Winds

     4.8.7.9.1 Favorable Winds
     4.8.7.9.2 Becalmed
     4.8.7.9.3 Unfavorable Winds
     4.8.7.9.4 Violent Winds
     4.8.7.9.5 Extreme Winds: Hurricanes etc

4.8.7.10 Currents

     4.8.7.10.1 Favorable Currents
     4.8.7.10.2 Still Currents
     4.8.7.10.3 Unfavorable Currents
     4.8.7.10.4 Violent Waves
     4.8.7.10.5 Extreme Waves: Tsunamis & Walls Of Water

4.8.7.11 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Oarsmen Requirements
4.8.7.12 Unfavorable Winds / Currents – Sail Solutions

4.9 Exotic Modes Of Transport

4.9.1 Flight
4.9.2 Teleport
4.9.3 Magic Gates & Portals
4.9.4 Capacities

And, In future chapters (most of them much shorter):

5. Land Transport
6. Waterborne Transport
7. Spoilage
8. Key Personnel
9. The Journey
10. Arrival
11. Journey’s End
12. Adventures En Route

4.8 Seagoing Vessels

The defining trait of ships is that anything other than sails or mechanical power is a secondary or backup form of motive energy. Seagoing vessels are an order of magnitude more complicated than river trade, but potentially an order of magnitude more profitable as well.

In many ways, deep-water sailing vessels are the nearest thing in Fantasy to Interstellar Trade in a Sci-Fi game, for exactly the same reasons: You are a long way from anywhere, so if you need something, you had better have taken it with you.

When you’re miles (or light years) – perhaps a dozen, perhaps hundreds – away from an established port, you can’t exactly nip on down to the corner store any time you feel like it.

That means that a lot of planning has to go into these expeditions; they have far more stringent personnel needs, and far more rigorous preparations that have to be made, or they might never leave port.

Those needs have been in the back of my mind throughout this project, and have had considerable influence over the Key Personnel chapter, for example.

Before I get into the broad mechanics of sea travel, though, I want to talk a little more about the logistics of these voyages.

4.8.0 Logistics At Sea and In Space

Over time, people will have learned from successful trading voyages and a few unsuccessful ones, too, I would imagine. They would have learned that there are certain risks involved which could lead to catastrophic failure, but that if you have this, and someone on the crew knows how to do that, there is at least a chance (if not a certainty) of staving off that disaster.

Having the right resources and personnel is a form of insurance; not having them is something that you might get away with, time and again – but sooner or later, it would come back to bite you.

If you could carry everything you might possibly need, there would be no problem, but you can’t. Some things are too big or too expensive to justify, given the relatively low risk that they will be needed. That alone makes for competing imperatives and interesting choices, but there is a third factor: every kilogram or pound of resources that you carry will occupy space that is therefore not available to be used to carry cargo, and its’ cargo that pays the bills.

You would never carry a spare keel, for example – if the one you have happens to break in a storm, well that’s just tough luck, that vessel is probably headed for the bottom (unless you manage to limp into port somewhere or make landfall, and can then craft and install a replacement or repair – a singularly difficult and improbable task).

You wouldn’t carry a replacement mainmast – if yours gets blown away, you have to make your way to land and again see about constructing or buying a replacement. But you might be able to save the one you already have just by cutting the ropes attaching your mainsails and letting them blow away – and storms happen often enough that it would be worth carrying one or perhaps even two spares.

Anchors are essential, but large and heavy – they are probably a borderline spare. More likely, you would carry a smaller, lighter, emergency anchor with which to make do, temporarily.

Ships need a certain level of crew, but people die at sea all the time (especially in a fantasy environment), so anyone who doesn’t carry spares has rocks in their head. But those people need food and water, and you have to carry that, too – so getting the numbers right is another vital decision. And carrying someone who can keep them healthy is definitely desirable. And someone who can prepare that food.

In fact, it’s in the food-and-water department that the greatest differences between space trading and sea traders can be found – because those who travel the oceans are surrounded by water, and that water contains food, in the form of fish.

The problem is that you can’t stop to fish – who knows what the winds will be like tomorrow? If the wind is even half reasonable, you have to take advantage of it while you can. And as for sea water, you can’t drink it.

It’s possible, were the ship to be becalmed, that you could set the crew to fishing and purifying sea water, but you will never produce enough of either commodity in that way, and you’re often better off putting the crew to work rowing toward someplace where the winds are more likely to be useful and reliable.

In space, it might be possible to find a source of potable water in the form of ice – it would need to be melted and filtered, but that’s a relatively easy operation. But there is no likelihood of food, so that side of things is worse.

All of which means that navigation is vital – in both instances. And so it goes, on down the line.

4.8.0.1 “But I don’t need to know this stuff, my PCs aren’t Space Traders…”

Someone actually said this to me at one point. To anyone thinking that way, I would ask, Do your PCs ever need to buy anything not made locally? Do they ever need to use a service provided ‘on the side’ by traders? Do they ever interact with any NPCs who do trade, or who try to protect traders from pirates? Do you ever need to take trade patterns into consideration when assessing the viability of outposts and colonies?

If the answer to any one of these questions is ever even just a little bit “yes,” then you need to have a grasp of the basics and of what a trader needs to know in order to be prosperous.

You might not need to take every trade exchange into detailed consideration, but you need to know the basics, just so that you can do a reasonable job of integrating them into your campaign environments.

Use sea trade, then, as an analogy to your situation when thinking about interstellar trade, and you will have everything you need to succeed at at least this minimal level.

Okay, so where was I? Oh, yes….

4.8.0.2 Using the analogy
The principle is, then, that anything that can be encountered by a ship at sea will have some analogous encounter for a ship in space, and vice-versa. These encounters won’t just affect trading vessels, of course; any ship that journeys from Port A to Port B, for any reason, can have one.

Let’s say the PCs have undertaken some task with a firm deadline, but one that they should be able to meet easily. That doesn’t suit the GM; he wants them to be under some time pressure so that when real problems arise later in the adventure, the PCs can’t make the lazy decisions, they will have to take a few risks. But how to delay them long enough to make time more critical?

How to delay them? is therefore the question, and to answer it, the GM deploys this analogy and thinks of all the things that could delay a merchant ship going to sea.

     ▪ A paperwork snafu delays departure.

     ▪ While at sea, encounter a Beholder.

     ▪ Becalmed.

     ▪ Pirates.

     ▪ A military vessel hunting pirates who is suspicious of the PCs ship.

First question: one delay, or several smaller ones? The GM decides to have an each-way bet: one longer delay, Becalmed, and several smaller ones that can be dropped in or left out as needed to achieve the total delay desired.

Second question: How much delay does he want? Somewhere between 1 and 2 weeks, he decides. That’s not enough to make time a critical factor, but it is enough to make the timetable uncomfortably tight.

Third through seventh questions: what are the equivalents of the maritime problems that he has listed?

     ▪ A paperwork snafu delays departure. Unchanged, really, it just needs a bit of fleshing out.

     ▪ Beholder. Some equivalent creature might reside in an Asteroid belt that the PCs have to traverse on their way out of the system. Give it powers useful to a space-going creature – beams from some of its eyes that are adept at locking onto and destroying incoming missiles; some sort of x-ray vision; something that penetrates hull armor; something that ablates or drains shields. Have it live on something in the engine compartment (details depend on game background); it uses it’s x-ray vision to search for it and its powers to go after it. Once driven off / defeated, the ship will need temporary repairs to be space-worthy. Or they can return to their departure point and get the repairs done properly – at the cost of even more time.

     ▪ Becalmed. A ship jumps into hyperspace just as the PCs are arriving, and it’s evident that it was not properly configured, causing it to misjump. If the game system uses jump gates, maybe this causes the gate to malfunction, and the PCs can’t go anywhere until it’s repaired. If the ships generate their own jumps, as in Travelor, maybe a misjump ‘curdles’ space making misjumps more likely even if the ship is properly configured. All the PCs can do is wait for space to ‘calm down’. Or maybe an Asteroid has impacted a nearby gas giant and kicked up a super-storm of gas-giant proportions, and it’s the radiation and electrical discharges that make FTL travel unsafe. Lots of options, pick an appropriate one.

     ▪ Pirates. Self-explanatory, but largely done to death. The focus should be on making this pirate encounter distinctive. Maybe they have heard rumors of an incredibly valuable shipment coming through and won’t believe the PCs when they say ‘it’s not us’? Rare, 20th century comic books perhaps, or something else equally attention-getting? I remember the outrage amongst my players when the original Kermit The Frog puppet was listed amongst some recovered stolen property… After the battle, the ship might need repairs. Again.

     ▪ A military vessel hunting pirates who is suspicious of the PCs ship. Again, fairly self-explanatory. They would insist on boarding, would search the ship and demand proof of purchase for anything and everything that might, or might conceal, cargo. Which might be especially problematic if the mission is to smuggle something somewhere.

Each problem (other than “Becalmed”) might be resolved in 1 or 2 days with a successful check of the appropriate skill, or 2-3 days with an unsuccessful one. The PCs can be “Becalmed” for 4, 6, 9 days, that’s up to the GM. There should probably be some sort of instrument that would warn the crew it’s unsafe to jump, and someone should be monitoring this and reporting back to the captain on a regular basis. This is a chance to delve into how the world works, don’t waste it! That means that if the PCs succeed in every check, 4-8+6 = 10-14 days elapse; a failed check simply takes one of the subsequent encounters off the list.

I would also rank the encounters in terms of game world / storytelling strength. As mentioned, Pirates are a bit of a cliche; so they would rank fairly low. The “Beholder” is a bit better, but stretches credibility a little thin. It’s next best. The Pirate hunter is pretty good, and might be encountered even in systems where there is little or no pirate activity. And the different FTL problems (“Becalmed”) are gold in terms of throwing the occasional spanner into the predictability that is often a feature of these games.

That gives a good idea of which encounter to drop, if need be. Logically, the pirate hunter should be at the destination, not in the departure system – but if you change them to be hunting smugglers, that can work, too. So the sequence can be tweaked as well.

I would be careful about putting the two weakest encounters after the “Becalmed” sequence, though; one weak encounter and one stronger one are a better mix in terms of sustaining interest and entertainment throughout.

I have seen travel to a jump point, jump, arrive, and travel to destination hand-waved down to three minutes game time and a skill check; I’ve seen it take an hour or so, game time; and I’ve seen it occupy a full game session. This 1-2 week delay is closer to the latter.

And, to state what should be obvious: No, you don’t do this every time. You save it for when it adds story value to the game – like shortening a deadline to the point of discomfort.

4.8.0.3 A Word on Historical Accuracy

Don’t expect more than a bit of lip service to this concept herein. Trying to compress the entire maritime history through to the end of the age of sail into a coherent and cohesive system requires massive generalization and more than a little romanticization, even before allowance gets made for any Fantasy element.

Functionality and a superficial credibility were far higher priorities than accuracy or realism.

4.8.1 Capacity

Seagoing vessels tend to be fairly big, and that generally means that the size of a Trade Unit tends to be larger as well. As a general rule, 1/2, or 1, 2, or 4 tons (or tonnes) are probably the most practical sizes for this kind of cargo transportation. That increases the size of a Labor Unit as well, because there is more to be handled – loaded or unloaded – in a given time frame.

All ships are NOT alike. There are huge variations in design and capacity. Some trade capacity for speed, the better to run away; others bulk up on defenses, the better to survive; and some aim for the maximum cargo.

Not all ports are able to handle ships of every size. The larger the vessel, the deeper the water that it needs (as a general rule of thumb).

So cargo capacities are specific to each ship design and limited by what the ports can handle on a trade route. Or, more properly said, cargo capacities are specific to each ship design and trade routes are restricted by the size of the ship.

And don’t forget that supplies and operational reserves eat into the cargo capacity.

Crew sizes are also generally proportional to the cargo capacity, because each increase represents an increase in the size of the ship.

There are 14 sizes that are reasonably common. Below, in a table, I set these out and cross-reference them with the listed ‘optimum Trade Unit’ sizes to get total cargo capacity in conventional units. After that, there are some modifiers for different optimizations.

But you should work backwards – select a vessel of appropriate size and type, reverse the adjustments to get cargo capacity, and then find that capacity listing in the column of your chosen Trade Unit size.

Cargo Capacity (Trade Units)	1/2 T = 1 TU	1 T = 1 TU	2 T = 1 TU	4 T = 1 TU
1	1/2 T	1 T	2 T	4 T
2	1 T	2 T	4 T	8 T
4	2 T	4 T	8 T	16 T
5	2.5 T	5 T	10 T	20 T
8	4 T	8 T	16 T	32 T
10	5 T	10 T	20 T	40 T
15	7.5 T	15 T	30 T	60 T
20	10 T	20 T	40 T	60 T
25	12.5 T	25 T	50 T	75 T
35	17.5 T	35 T	70 T	(140 T)
50	25 T	50 T	100 T	(200 T)
60	30 T	60 T	(120 T)	(240 T)
65	32.5 T	65 T	(130 T)	(260 T)
75	37.5 T	75 T	(150 T)	(300 T)
100	50 T	100 T	(200 T)	(400 T)

Notes:
() signifies vessels that did not exist in the historical periods commonly used as a basis for Fantasy games, even at a stretch – but that might exist in a Fantasy reality, nevertheless.

Units:
     1 Tonne = 1000 kg = 1.102 short tons = 2205 lb
     1 short ton = 2000 lb = 907.2 kg = 0.9072 tonnes
     1 long ton = 2240 lb = 1.12 short tons = approx 1.016 tonnes = 1016 kg

Long tons are used for the displacement (weight) of vessels.

Cargo is supposed to be recorded in short tons, but this only generates confusion and opportunities for fraud (using long tons for cargo to reduce mooring fees and sound tolls [a toll for using the strait separating Denmark and Sweden that for 200 years generated up to 2/3 of Denmark’s state income], for example).

It’s also useful to notice that, to two significant digits, the difference between tonnes and long tons is a rounding error.

4.8.2 Ships As Monsters

It can often be useful to use standard combat as an analogy for naval battles – hit points, armor class, etc. While not going fully down this path, there have been any number of tips of the hat to the idea in the content that follows.

If you decide to commit to this more fully, just remember that – unlike monsters – (1) there is no flanking advantage; (2) ships will keep going – unlike monsters, they won’t stop on a dime – and collisions between ships can easily sink both; (3) it takes time to furl or open sails. How long depends on all sorts of factors, and is better left up to the GM;.and (4) ships tend to be big and heavy, and even though there isn’t a lot of friction to overcome, they are still going to be slow to get moving even when sails have been hoisted or engines engaged.

4.8.3 Ship Specifications

4.8.3.1 Physical Dimensions

Ship sizes may include Small / Light*, Medium, Heavy / Large, and Over-sized.
     * These are also sometimes called “Pocket” ships
Ship Sub-types may include Fast (optimized for speed at the expense of other attributes) and War (optimized for offensive capacity at the expense of other attributes)

Length: typical length in feet, but every ship will be a little different

Weight (empty):typical weight in long tons, but every ship will be a little different

Masts (normally): 0, 1, 2, 3. 4+ was possible but rare, and assumed to be ‘fantasy’ in nature.

4.8.3.2 Movement Parameters:

Turning Circle: 1 Very Tight, 2 Tight, 3 Moderate, 4 Wide, 5 Very Wide, 6 Incredibly Wide.

This is usually measured as a multiple of fudge* × length × speed / 4.

The actual meaning of these turning circles depends on the map scale, wind conditions, and too many other factors to go into here. GMs should decide what they mean on the day and under the current in-game conditions – while noting that each is worse / wider than the one before. GMs aiming for realism should note that the extra speed from a wind at the stern actually permits a tighter turn, while any wind from square of the hull forward increases turning circle by 1 class to the worse.

Any ship with <1/4 max crew also adds 1 to the turning circle.

* Fudge is an adjustment that is consistent over a class of ship (usually) and is used to scale the turning circle designated by the GM to the scale of the ship. It’s what is commonly known as a ‘technical term’.

Speed: 8 = Incredibly Fast, 7 = Very Fast, 6 = Fast, 5 = Medium, 4 = Slow, 3 = Very Slow, 2 = Incredibly Slow, 1 = 1/2 Slow, 0 = 1/10 Slow

     Incredibly Fast (8)= 2 × Very Fast (typically), available only to vessels with “Fast” in the descriptor
     Very Fast (7) = 3 × Medium (typically)
     Fast (6) = 2 × Medium (typically)
     Slow (4) = 1/2 Medium
     Very Slow (3) = 1/3 Medium
     Incredibly Slow (2) = 1/4 Medium
     1/4 Slow (1) = 1/8 Medium = 1/2 Incredibly Slow
     1/10 Slow (0) = 1/20 Medium – only when sailed/rowed into the wind (otherwise,s speed 0 in those conditions)

4.8.3.3 Functionality:

Draft:
There are 5 categories of Draft value. All come with both benefits and liabilities in terms of what a particular vessel is capable of.

In sci-fi terms, think of gravity wells as reefs, shoals, and distances to the coast – the stronger the local gravity well, the lower the “draft equivalent” that is needed. Having way-stations in orbit or on nearby planets / moons is the equivalent of deeper harbors, obviating the need to go into the deep, nasty, gravity well.

     1 Shallow (can use coastal waters, cross shoals & some reefs without danger)
     2 Near Shallow (can use coastal waters, cross most shoals & reefs without danger)
     3 Medium (can use coastal waters, cross deep shoals and reefs with little danger but shallow ones are a threat)
     4 Deep (can only use bays, cannot cross shoals or reefs without extreme risk)
     5 Very Deep (can only use ‘deep water’ bays at any time, needs high tide to use other bays, all shoals and reefs pose extreme risk)

Crew:
Crew numbers are specified as a range, minimum to maximum. Another significant value is 2x minimum. The numbers given are a base value that has to be adjusted for the number of officers and high-value passengers.

     Officers count as 3 crew but increase max crew by 1 each.

     Passengers in steerage / low-berths count as crew but NOT as minimum crew (Passengers who are in cold-sleep or something similar consume no rations and count only as dead weight, obviously).

     Passengers in high-berths count as officers but NOT as minimum crew.

There is also a “virtual crew count” used for the consumption of rations. For this purpose, officers may count as 1, 2, 3, 4, or even 5 crewmen. That doesn’t mean that they eat five times as much – but they may eat five times as well. Nor is this necessarily consistent amongst the entire officer corps – the captain, first mate, and high-berth passengers will often have one value while other officers are 1/2 or 1 less.

Crew Provisions

As per 3.1.1.13 & 3.1.1.14, the minimum requirement in food and water totals 5.25 kg/person per day. When you do the math, you get to a value of 0.0402 long tons × crew, per week. This number includes increased mess and galley size, which is one reason why Officers count as more extra crew than just their numbers. It does NOT include crew quarters, locker space, etc.

But it’s not that simple. When you’re crossing a desert, an arctic tundra, or out at sea, you can’t simply replace food that has spoiled – so you have to carry extra supplies just in case. How much in extra supplies is a function of paranoia and climate (things go bad more slowly in cold environments). I consider values of +10%, +25%, +33%, +50%, +75%, and +100%.

But that’s feeding people the minimum they need to survive – one minimal meal a day. Unless you had no choice but to impose such a regimen, crews would revolt at the imposition of such a regimen. So you also need to decide how many meals a day, and of what relative size (where that essential minimum =100%). I consider values of +10%, +25%, +33%, +50%, +75%, +100%, +150%, +200%, and +250%.

100%+250% means 350% total each day. How this gets broken up is irrelevant – there could be three light snacks and a feast, or one light snack and three solid meals, or whatever – so long as the grand total adds up to 350%.

When you correlate all these factors, you get the following table:

	spoilage allowance	+0%	+10%	+25%	+35%	+50%	+75%	+100%
better than minimum	+0%	0.04	0.044	0.05	0.054	0.06	0.07	0.08
	+10%	0.044	0.049	0.055	0.06	0.066	0.077	0.088
	+25%	0.05	0.055	0.063	0.068	0.075	0.088	0.101
	+33%	0.053	0.059	0.067	0.072	0.08	0.094	0.107
	+50%	0.06	0.066	0.075	0.081	0.09	0.106	0.121
	+100%	0.08	0.088	0.101	0.109	0.121	0.141	0.161
	+150%	0.101	0.111	0.126	0.136	0.151	0.176	0.201
	+200%	0.121	0.133	0.151	0.163	0.181	0.211	0.241
	+250%	0.141	0.155	0.176	0.19	0.211	0.246	0.281

For example: +35% spoilage allowance, +150% better than minimum, 16 crew: 0.136 × 16 per week = 2.176 long tons = 2.43712 short tons. If your ship has 50 long tons cargo capacity, you could carry provisions for those 16 and nothing else and have 20.5 weeks’ capacity. If you want to provision for a 6 week voyage, plus 2 weeks’ margin, it would reduce cargo capacity by 19.5 long tons. Note that for a journey of this short length, 35% spoilage is being really paranoid.

Ships owners will always look to cut unprofitable corners. Six weeks is short enough that even if there was 80% spoilage of the food, the crew could make it all the way to their destination without starving to death, and go even further if rations were cut in response to the emergency. What’s more, the crew can progressively eat their way through that extra two week’s worth, so you can cut the ‘better than minimum’ to +50% and still be feeding the crew reasonably well. That reduces the requirement from 0.136 per crew per week to just 0.06. This returns (0.136 – 0.06) × 16 × 8 = 9.728 long tons of cargo capacity to the pursuit of making profits – nearly 20% of the 50-ton capacity.

Cargo Capacity (short tons)
The numbers given are base values that need to be adjusted as follows:

     -1 cargo / 6 crew (or part thereof) over 2x min

     -0.5 cargo / cannon

At first glance, you might think that actual crew numbers should be used for these adjustments, but no, no, no – all crew and high-level officers have the capacity for personal baggage / comforts, and the highest ranking have even more of it. So use x3 for most crew & high-berth passengers and x5 for the cream – certainly that Captain, maybe the navigator, maybe the first mate, and maybe the doctor. Larger ships may further differentiate.

So total up the ‘effective’ crew numbers. If the result is less than double the minimum, they have not intruded into the cargo capacity; if the result is more than double that, but less than the maximum, then cargo capacity is reduced as shown; and if the total is more than the maximum, the ship is effectively overloaded and has NO spare cargo capacity.

If you cut rations, you cut the ‘effective crew’. I’ve made the assumption that we’re allocating 1016 kg / 5.25 kg per day × 3 = 580.6 meals per ton of capacity – and then applied a fudge factor to lift that to a neat 600, because a small overload will quickly disappear. Dividing that by 6 means that we’re effectively working in units of 100 meals – a nice, convenient number.

Some crew may require more or less nourishment than others. A Halfling would count as 1½ crew, for example. A Giant may count as 10 or more! Don’t forget to take such things into account.

Ships carry enough provisions for 2 × the minimum number of crew without intruding on the cargo space. But if your crew numbers exceed that quantity, you need to add extra provisions that won’t fit into the holds designated for the purpose.

Total Food Reserves

With the above information, you can quickly determine 2 × Min crew / 100 + the excess cargo calculated above to get a total provisions weight. Multiply the result by 100 meals in a long ton and divide by the number of crew determined previously (the count that factors in how well various people eat). The result is the number of days that the ship has provisions for – both food and water – if fully laden. This is often a useful number to know, to say the least, but because it varies according to so many factors, it’s not something that can be specified in advance – it needs to be recalculated for every trip, or sometimes for every leg of a trip.

4.8.3.4 Combat

Hit Dice / Hit Points:
     Potential HD = Class #

     Class 1-6 rafts = d2
     Class 1-6 Boats = d6
     Class 7-8 = -1 die, size to d8
     Class 9-20 = -2 die, size to d10
     Class 21-30 = -4 die, size to d12
     Class 31+ = -4 die, / 1.6 die, size to d20

     Reinforcement = – 2^(x-1) cargo where × is +1 defense & +1 HD.

     Actual HP = (Potential HP + Reinforcement) × Crew / Max Crew

Again, a note: If you only have 1/2 the maximum crew, you only have 1/2 the capacity for taking damage. That’s because you have fewer crew to replace the injured or killed, and fewer crew to work as damage control parties.

Damage
It doesn’t matter how damage is inflicted – it could be a cannon, a whole bunch of cannon, a fireball spell, a laser cutter, a beam weapon, or a whole bunch of rowdies with axes. This combat analogue measures Ship HP on the human scale, so all these things to whatever damage they would normally do.

Instead of rolling for each individual, if there are a lot of them, determine the roll required with all modifiers taken into account and translate that into a % successful.

Next, we need to apply a fudge factor. Divide the number of attackers by 6 (counting cannons as 6 attackers, fireballs as the number of d6 in the fireball, and so on). Roll that many dice and add the result to the % successful, then roll it again re-rolling all sixes and subtract the result from the adjusted % successful.

The more attackers there are, the less likely it is that there will be a significant variance. The ‘re-roll sixes’ is a deliberate abstraction to allow for the fact that sometimes a near miss is good enough.

Multiply the net % successful by the number of attackers, broken down by size of damage die if necessary, to get the number that actually hit – and them multiply by the average damage result, no need to roll it unless you want to do so for dramatic effect.

My Technique would be to actually roll the first wave of damage,. then apply average damage until the target vessel has less than 3 ‘salvos’ capacity remaining, then go back to rolling. This maximizes dramatic effect while minimizing inconvenience and inefficiency. Of course, if no PCs are involved, it’s average damage all the way – the ‘fudge factor’ provides enough randomness to seem realistically variable.

Damage Distribution:
     (3d20+40)% of damage is applied to crew. The rest is applied to the ship.

Crew Damage: Use half the indicated total damage to kill crew, based on average hit points etc. Apply the remainder as evenly as possible over the surviving crew (and note that this will reduce their average hit points for the next salvo).

Ship damage includes sail damage that slows the ship but doesn’t actually sink it, offensive damage that reduces a target’s ability to attack back, defensive damage that reduces a ship’s ability to stay intact, and hull damage that reduces it’s ability to stay afloat. So you may need to further break it down.

That breakdown depends on where the attackers were aiming which depends on what they were trying to accomplish. The attacker should nominate one of the four damage types indicated; this choice will persist until changed, and it takes 8 × minimum crew / surviving crew foregone attacks, round up, to make such a change (officers count as 3 as usual, due to their greater experience).

Example: Minimum crew is 20, current surviving crew is 65; it takes 8 × 20 / 65 = 2.46, rounds up to 3, attacks foregone to change targets.

The GM needs d6 in 4 different colors. One color represents sail damage, one offensive damage, one damages the targets’ defenses, and one hull damage. The GM needs 3 dice of the color that matches the chosen target of the attacker and 1 dice each of the other three, for a total of 6 dice (yes, there are ways of doing this will dice of only a single color – roll 1d6 three times and 3d6 once, recording the totals).

Divide the damage done by the total of the six dice (rounding off to the nearest 1/2) and then for each type of damage, multiply the result by the total of that colored dice. Round results in the opposite direction to any rounding that too place following the division.

Example: 1 red die (6), 1 green die (2), one black die (3), and 3 blue dice (10), total of 19. Damage done to the ship = 45. So, 45/19 = 2.368, which rounds to 2.5. Multiply the three dice total (10) by 2.5 to get 25 – that’s the number of dice of damage to whatever the attacker was targeting. Multiply the red die result (6) by 2.5 to get 15 – that’s the damage done to whatever the red die represented. The green die gives 5 points, the black die gives 7.5 – which gets rounded down to 7 because we rounded up to get to the 2.5.

Damage Effects
Divide the damage done to each area of effect (except hull damage) by 6, but record remainders as fractions of 6 – these can accumulate over multiple salvos / rounds.

Sail / Speed damage: it takes 6 points to drop from the vessels top speed rating by 1, then 5 to drop by another one, then 4, and so on, until the vessel reaches 0 and is dead in the water.

Defensive Damage: the result is the bonus that the attacker inflicting the damage will be at for their next attack. If the target vessel has enough excess crew to perform damage control, this will reduce by 1 on the attack after that, by another 1 on the attack after that, and so on. Damage control is limited to HALF the defensive damage done – the rest needs more time / resources than can be accommodated during battle. Furthermore, every -6 or part thereof has a 1 in 6 chance of becoming 1 worse during combat maneuvers.

Offensive Damage: this reduces the number of dice of damage that the attacked vessel can inflict on their next attack by the indicated number. If they have sufficient excess crew to work damage control, this will reduce by 1 on the attack after that, then by 1 more, and so on. Offensive damage repairs are limited to HALF the inflicted offensive damage, the rest can’t be fixed on the fly. Furthermore, for every -6 or part thereof, there is a 1 in 6 chance of doing an additional d6 damage to one of the other areas of the ship (roll a d3 to choose).

Hull Damage: The damage done comes off the ships hit points. If there are sufficient crew to work damage control, they can restore 1d6 points of hull damage in a combat round, and if they roll a six, they roll again and repair +6 points. Hull repairs are limited to HALF the inflicted damage, the rest can’t be repaired so easily. Furthermore, for every 6 points of hull damage done in a single attack after the first 6, there is a 1 in 6 chance of an extra d6 of hull damage resulting from combat maneuvers. Do enough hull damage to a target and it can literally tear itself apart, sending it to the bottom.

Furthermore, ships that lose 1/2 their HP in hull damage are slowed one additional Speed, and another when they lose 1/2 of what’s left, and a third when they reach 0.

Zero HP means that a ship is sinking. How long this takes is up to the GM but it’s usually measured in minutes for small ships and potentially hours for large ships. Or should that be seconds and minutes, respectively? The first is more historically accurate, the second ups the ante considerably. Ongoing Repairs / damage control may stem this. Each Ship-Class additional HP inflicted thereafter reduces this by 1 of the larger time units. So a class 9 vessel needs 9 additional HP of hull damage to hasten its’ sinking, a class 15 vessel needs 15, and so on.

Cannon
Cannon are divided into two classes for ‘ship vs ship’ battles: Light and Heavy.

‘Light’ means that each counts for only half the standard weight, but the cannonballs are lighter and smaller and do 1d6 per cannon per shot. Heavy means that each counts fully for the weight, the cannon have greater range, and they do d10 per cannon per shot.

Remember that cannon are usually arranged in pairs, one to each side of the ship, so at most half can fire in a given round.

An additional weight class, “Gargantuan”, is occasionally trotted out because they look really mean, but the cannon weigh twice as much as normal and only do d12, take twice as long to reload, and have no significant range advantage, so they actually have less effect than regular cannon.

4.8.3.5 Data Sources

A lot of research went into the above rules and the tables given below. Credit where it’s due:

Sid Meier’s Pirates! (Video Game, various incarnations)

★ Link 1

★ Link 2

★ Link 3

Wikipedia

★ Pinnace (ship’s boat)

★ Full-Rigged Pinnace

★ Sloop

★ Schooner

★ Lugger

★ Fluyt

★ East Indiaman

★ Brigantine

★ Brig

★ Frigate

★ Galleon

★ Clipper

★ Ship Of The Line

★ Spanish ship Nuestra Señora de la Santísima Trinidad

★ Ottoman ship Mahmudiye

Other (was actually used for the previous post):

★ Gouth AI a raft of 8 logs

4.8.3.6 Ship Specifications

This was originally one big table. At the last minute, I’ve broken it into three similarly-sized tables so that the headings are never too far away, and I’ve repeated the heading at the end of the third table for good measure. When this gets edited into an e-book, they might get rejoined or split into two, depending on how they fit on the page.

Class	Class Name	Len (ft)	Wt (lt)	Masts	Turn	Speed	Draft	Cargo Cap (st)	Crew	Cannon (Tot)
7	Pinnace*	28-40	100	1	1	5	Shallow	20	6-50	8
8	Small Sloop	45	140	1	2	5	Shallow	30	8-55	6
9	Medium Sloop	50	160	1	2	6	Near Shallow	40	10-65	10
10	Large Sloop	55	180	1	2	6	Near Shallow	50	12-75	12
11	Small Schooner	60	160	2	2	6	Medium	40	10-80	12
12	Medium Schooner	65	180	2	2	7	Medium	50	11-90	14
13	Large Schooner	70	220	3	2	7	Medium	60	14-100	18
(14)	Over-sized Schooner	75	240	4-6	3	6	Medium	70	18-140	22
15	Small Barque†	45	160	1	2	5	Medium	60	10-90	12
16	Medium Barque†	50	180	2-3	2	5	Deep	70	12-100	16
17	Large Barque†	60	200	3	4	4	Deep	85	16-120	20
18	Small Cargo Fluyt	50	160	2	4	3	Shallow	65	10-60	10
19	Medium Cargo Fluyt	80	200	2	4	3	Shallow	100	12-75	12
20	Large Cargo Fluyt	90	250	2	4	3	Shallow	140	16-85	14
(21)	Over-sized Cargo Fluyt	100	300	3	5	2	Near Shallow	180	20-100	16

 

Class	Class Name	Len (ft)	Wt (lt)	Masts	Turn	Speed	Draft	Cargo Cap (st)	Crew	Cannon (Tot)
22	Small Merchantman (East Indiaman)	150	185	3	5	5	Medium	90	12-90	14
23	Typical Merchantman (East Indiaman)	170	210	3	5	4	Deep	100	16-100	16
24	Large Merchantman (East Indiaman)	175	230	3	5	3	Deep	120	16-125	20
(25)	Over-Sized Merchantman (East Indiaman)‡	190	260	(4)	5	3	Very Deep	140	20-140	22
26	Small Brigantine†	50	50	2	4	5	Medium	60	12-110	20
27	Medium Brigantine†	110	110	2	4	5	Medium	65	14-115	22
28	Large Brigantine†	250	250	2	5	4	Medium	70	16-125	24
29	Large Brigantine (Brig)†	480	480	2	5	4	Medium	70	16-125	28
30	Light Frigate‡	120	800	3	6	3	Deep	60	12-140	28
31	Fast Frigate‡	150	1000	3	7	4	Deep	50	20-160	24
32	Frigate‡	135	1200	3	6	4	Deep	90	28-200	32
33	Heavy Frigate‡	140	1500	(4)	5	4-5	Very Deep	120	32-200	36

 

Class	Class Name	Len (ft)	Wt (lt)	Masts	Turn	Speed	Draft	Cargo Cap (st)	Crew	Cannon (Tot)
34	Light Galleon	100	500	4	4	3	Medium	70	12-140	20
35	Fast Galleon	120	1100	4	5	4	Deep	80	16-160	24
36	Medium Galleon	140	1000	5	4	3-4	Deep	120	16-100	20
37	Heavy Galleon	145	1600	5	3	4	Very Deep	140	16-200	32
38	War Galleon	150	2000	5	3	4	Very Deep	90	16-200	40
(39)	Over-sized Galleon	165	2500	5	3	4-5	Very Deep	120	24-250	44
(40)	Extreme Clipper‡	220	825	3	5	6	Medium	100	20-140	36
41	Standard Clipper‡	180-250	1080	3-(4)	5	6	Medium	100	20-140	38
42	Large Clipper‡	250-300	1410	3	4	6	Medium	120	20-140	44-60
43		(301-350)	1600	3-(4)	4	6	Medium	(125)	30-160	(50-70)
44		(351-400)	2000	(4)-(5)	4	6	Medium	(135)	40-180	(60-80)
43	Ship Of The Line (4th rate)‡	150	830	3-(4)-(5)	5	5	Very Deep	110	30-500	50-60
44	Ship Of The Line (3rd rate)‡	170	1440	3-(4)-(5)	6	5	Very Deep	115	40-600	62-74
45	Ship Of The Line (2nd rate)‡	200	2500	3-(4)-(5)	5	6	Very Deep	120	40-700	90-98
46	Ship Of The Line (1st rate)‡	250	4300	3-(4)-(5)	5	6	Very Deep	140	40-800	100-140
(47)	Imperial Ship Of The Line‡	200	5000	3-(4)-(5)	6	6	Very Deep	160	50-1050	116-148
(48)	Other??	GM’s Choice – see Exotic Crews, Below
Class	Class Name	Len (ft)	Wt (lt)	Masts	Turn	Speed	Draft	Cargo Cap (st)	Crew	Cannon (Tot)

* The term Pinnace was used for two entirely different but very similar vessels – the full-rigged Pinnace is the one used in the table as a vessel in it’s own right, while the Pinnace (Ship’s Boat) is only used in conjunction with a larger vessel (see ‡ below).

† There are two different types of ship that have been referred to as “Barques”. I have based these numbers on the “Lugger” class of vessel. Similarly, a “Brig” is a related vessel class to the normal “Brigantine” but is larger and heavier. This sort of nonsense makes researching vessel classes and their characteristics a real nightmare…

‡ Includes a ship’s boat; for an Imperial Ship Of The Line, this is a (medium) Sloop, for anything else it is either a Pinnace or, for ships >2000 long tons, a small Sloop. Note that Galleons had nothing but rowboats for service in this capacity, usually 16-man.

() denotes a configuration or vessel that did not exist in real life. For example, under “Masts”, you might see an entry 3-4-(5). This means that the real life versions had 3 or 4 masts but in a fantasy world, you might have 5.

4.8.4 Some Thoughts About Cannon

Maritime vessels place the GM in something of a quandary that these rules cannot avoid or evade looking at: Without cannon, an essential flavor of the swashbuckling expectations that come with these vessels is lost, causing dissatisfaction all round (no matter that it’s more ‘realistic’ and ‘historically accurate’).

But let them in, and you also let in everything else that gunpowder and cannonballs can do, and that can be an even higher price to pay. Cannon can pulverize castle walls. Grapeshot can wipe out whole battalions with a single salvo – from a handful of the devices. And some bright spark PC will want to create muskets and flintlocks, either personally or by paying someone else to do it. And then, there’s the issue of bombs, and of other explosive substances like nitrocellulose – once you’ve opened the door, everything from det cord to white phosphorous can crawl through it.

Some GMs are fine with all that, pointing out that in a world with Umpteen-d6 Fireballs and Meteor Swarms, a few cannon are really quite small potatoes, and that may be true – but again, some of the essential flavor is lost.

Some draw the line and say “this works, anything further doesn’t” – but they will sooner or later be met with the eternal challenge of the small child, “Why not?” – and he’d better have a good answer at the ready.

Others (including me, for a very long time), simply ban gunpowder and explosives outright. If you want a fusillade of cannon raking an enemy vessel, the equivalent in-game-world is an arcane spellcaster lobbing fireballs (etc) – you hire a bunch of them and they stand on the (lower) deck, casting through a ‘gunport’ (usually called something else, because you can’t use the word ‘gun’ before the gun exists). That’s just rubbing players noses in it.

But some of the research linked to above suggested that there may be a way….

4.8.4.1 Having Your Cannon And Your Flavor, Too

Specifically, it was mentioned somewhere that what is called a Cannon on land, and what is called a Cannon on board a seagoing vessel, are two completely different things. The land-going version is much smaller and lighter and uses a much smaller and lighter cannonball. They also use much less explosive propellant to launch those cannonballs. As a result of all this, they had about half the range of their larger seagoing versions. The basic reason for these differences is two-fold.

First, if your cannon is insufficiently-strongly anchored, a large part of your propellant force is simply going to launch it backwards, through your own troops.

And second, by the time you include frame and cannon and ammunition and black powder and everything else, it becomes too much to transport overland except on the very best roads. And a cannon without portability / mobility is worse than useless, 90% of the time.

Let us suppose, then, for the sake of argument, that Gunpowder works a little differently in the game world. In sufficient quantities, and ignited by sufficient heat, it will explode, right enough – but that requires either a mage or a fire elemental.

That means that your shipboard cannon are still perfectly fine, because it has long been established in most fantasy canon that arcane spells can be placed in scrolls that anyone can use. Now, that might be going too far, but if that’s the case, then it’s certainly not out of the question to compromise and state that a non-mage can use such a scroll, but doesn’t have the training to be able to set off gunpowder with it. THAT requires a ‘gunnery’ expertise.

This proposal doesn’t just permit the flavor of swashbuckling and pirates, it infuses them with the fantasy flavor that was supposedly being sacrificed!

It’s when you consider the implications outside of sea battles that this pays off, big-time.

4.8.4.2 Crippled Land-Cannon
Use enough gunpowder to set off an explosion under the above concept, and you will blow any normal land cannon to pieces.

There are ways around that – using Adamantine or something similar – but they increase the weight of the cannon to the equivalent of the too-big seagoing cannon anyway, and would cost an absolute fortune. There’s nothing that can be done to lighten the load because the cannon would no longer be strong enough to resist the explosive force within.

Or, you might throw a bone, and let smaller cannon and smaller gunpowder loads function – at 1/4 the normal power. While the results may be effective against enemy troops, they won’t do squat against castle walls. And the cannon is too big and inconvenient to carry around just for an antipersonnel weapon. Magic gives you far more potent and far more portable options.

4.8.4.3 Personal Firearms

Blunderbusses and Flintlocks go away, too – they fire not with a bang, but with a fsst. No bullets flying, which means that your Fighters are still supreme up close and personal, and aren’t going to be cut down (short of magic) before getting into position to absolutely ruin somebody’s day. And untrained nobodies aren’t running around stealing spellcaster thunder, either. Again the Fantasy within the Fantasy Genre is protected.

4.8.4.4 Bombs and other explosive devices

Bombs remain possible – but they need someone lobbing a fireball into exactly the right place, or a fire elemental charging into that right place, to set the device off. A wick or fuse won’t cut it. Again, the fantasy element is preserved, even enhanced.

4.8.4.5 Other explosive materials

And as for the rest of the canonical realm of explosives? The changes to the way gunpowder works should tell any player worth his table-space that the laws of chemistry are different. This should be obvious, anyway – alchemy can do things, and potions work, neither of which are true outside of the fantasy genre.

And that means that all the other panoply of explosive compounds and related materials that mankind has come up with, over the years, are also off the table. They simply won’t work. Soaking rags in nitric acid simply eats holes in the rags – it doesn’t create nitrocellulose.

Or maybe they will work – but only on the Elemental Plane of Water, or something – and they still need a fire elemental to set them off. Given the environmental complications, that’s sure to be more trouble than it’s worth.

So yes, you can have cannon on board ships, all you want, without sacrificing the important bits of the genre elsewhere. You are the GM, you decide the game physics, i.e. what will work and what won’t.

4.8.5 Exotic Crews

Section 3.1.1 gives you everything you need to be able to amend ship designs to create vessels built for non-human crews. In particular, the size factor and the proportions factor are your guide, but the specifics given in 3.1.1.10 will be just as useful.

If you have a crew that are somewhat smaller than human average, there are two routes that you can go – either you keep the vessel more-or-less the same physical dimensions and increase the crew capacity, then tweak the other values accordingly, or you scale the vessel down to fit.

If you have a crew that are somewhat larger, you have little choice but to scale the vessel up somewhat.

In both cases, at least one fundamental will change in terms of the shape – the height. Humans build decks to be about 2m apart, plus double the thickness of the deck itself, probably 2 × 2.5cm more, for a total of 2.05m. (That’s 6′ 8.7″ in American, and decking that’s 1″ thick). That’s built to accommodate relatively tall individuals of the era, and a fairly normal range of heights today.

4.8.5.1 Human Height Adjustments

It’s hard for the modern mind to come to grips with how much smaller people were back then, mostly due to malnutrition over multiple years during youth. Even the nobility didn’t eat as well, in terms of nutrition, as most poor people today.

The simplest way of adjusting modern height tables is simply to lop 6-12″ (15.24-30.48cm) off the indicated height – so 5’5″ becomes 4’5″ to 4’9″ (165cm becomes 134.52-149.76cm). Or, to simplify it, 65″ becomes 52-59″.

But that doesn’t really get precise enough for most people. My method of calculation isn’t as neat or as simple, but it gives more specific results. It’s based on nothing more than having visited a number of houses that were more than a century old and built proportionately to the inhabitants. That last is an important point; nobility and gentry and wealth tended to build high and impressive ceilings, so they are still high and impressive in modern times, just a little less so.

Modern			Medieval Nobles & Wealthy			Fantasy Professionals			Fantasy Poor
‘	“	cm	‘	“	cm	‘	“	cm	‘	“	cm
3	0	91.4	2	4	71.1	2	9	83.8	2	7.5	80
3	1	94	2	6	71.1	2	10	86.4	2	8.5	82.6
3	2	96.5	2	7.5	76.2	2	11	88.9	2	9.25	84.5
3	3	99.1	2	9	80	3	0	91.4	2	10.5	87.6
3	4	101.6	2	10.5	83.8	3	1	94	2	11.25	89.5
3	4.5	102.9	2	11.25	89.5	3	1.5	95.3	3	0	91.4
3	5	104.1	3	0	87.6	3	2	96.5	3	0.75	93.3
3	6	106.7	3	1.75	91.4	3	3	99.1	3	1.5	95.3
3	7	109.2	3	3.5	95.9	3	4	101.6	3	2.5	97.8
3	8	111.8	3	5.5	100.3	3	5	104.1	3	3.25	99.7
3	9	114.3	3	7	105.4	3	6	106.7	3	4.25	102.2
3	10	116.8	3	8.75	109.2	3	7	109.2	3	5	104.1
3	11	119.4	3	10.5	113.7	3	7.75	111.1	3	6	106.7
4	0	121.9	4	1	118.1	3	8.75	113.7	3	7	109.2
4	1	124.5	4	2	124.5	3	9.5	115.6	3	8	111.8
4	2	127	4	3	127	3	11	119.4	3	8.75	113.7
4	3	129.5	4	4	129.5	4	0	121.9	3	9.5	115.6
4	4	132.1	4	5	132.1	4	1.5	125.7	3	10.75	118.7
4	5	134.6	4	6	134.6	4	2.5	128.3	4	0	121.9
4	6	137.2	4	7	137.2	4	4	132.1	4	1	124.5
4	7	139.7	4	8	139.7	4	5	134.6	4	2	127
4	8	142.2	4	9	142.2	4	6	137.2	4	3	129.5
4	9	144.8	4	10	144.8	4	7	139.7	4	4	132.1
4	10	147.3	4	11	147.3	4	8.25	142.9	4	5.25	135.3
4	11	149.9	5	0	149.9	4	9.5	146.1	4	6.5	138.4
5	0	152.4	5	0.75	152.4	4	10.5	148.6	4	7.5	141
5	1	154.9	5	1.5	154.3	4	11.5	151.1	4	8	142.2
5	2	157.5	5	2.25	156.2	5	0	152.4	4	8.75	144.1
5	3	160	5	3.5	158.1	5	0.5	153.7	4	9.5	146.1
5	4	162.6	5	4	161.3	5	1	154.9	4	10	147.3
5	5	165.1	5	4.5	162.6	5	1.75	156.8	4	10.5	148.6
5	6	167.6	5	5	163.8	5	2.5	158.8	4	11	149.9
5	7	170.2	5	5.75	165.1	5	3.5	161.3	4	11.35	150.7
5	8	172.7	5	6.5	167	5	4	162.6	5	0.5	153.7
5	9	175.3	5	7.25	168.9	5	4.5	163.8	5	1	154.9
5	10	177.8	5	8	170.8	5	5	165.1	5	1.75	156.8
5	11	180.3	4	11	172.7	5	5.5	166.4	5	2.5	158.8
6	0	182.9	5	10.5	149.9	5	6	167.6	5	3	160
6	1	185.4	5	11.75	179.1	5	7	170.2	5	4	162.6
6	2	188	6	0.5	182.2	5	8	172.7	5	4.75	164.5
6	3	190.5	6	1.75	184.2	5	8.5	174	5	5.25	165.7
6	4	193	6	2	187.3	5	9.25	175.9	5	6	167.6
6	5	195.6	6	2.5	188	5	10	177.8	5	6.75	169.5
6	6	198.1	6	3	189.2	5	11	180.3	5	7	170.2
6	7	200.7	6	3.5	190.5	6	0	182.9	5	7.75	172.1
6	8	203.2	6	4	191.8	6	0.5	184.2	5	8.5	174
6	9	205.7	6	4.5	193	6	1.5	186.7	5	9.5	176.5
6	10	208.3	6	5	194.3	6	2.5	189.2	5	10	177.8
6	11	210.8	6	5.5	195.6	6	3.25	191.1	5	11	180.3
7	0	213.4	6	6	196.9	6	4	193	6	0	182.9

I realize it can be hard to see exactly what’s going on – the human mind doesn’t do well at assessing columns of numbers without analytic tools being employed. One such tool is graphical analysis, and so here’s one (with a couple of minor mistakes) that I prepared earlier:



This not only factors in nutritional effects, it incorporates nutritional requirements (higher for those with height) and social attitudes (it also takes into account that we’re operating in a heroic environment, in which people are bigger and better; for ‘real world’ numbers, lop another 4.5 inches off). Because of these additional factors, the ratios change a number of times as heights increase.

So, with a comparative yardstick, let’s begin.

4.8.5.2 Non-human Height

First, cargo capacity depends on two factors – volume and buoyancy. Volume is length × width × depth × shape factor. If the shape and proportions of the vessel are unchanged (at least for the moment), then the shape factors will cancel out, and everything will be adjusted proportional to the Height of the non-human species, proportionate to a 6′ modern human – i.e. a 5’10.5″ human (70.5″, 149.9 cm but I would use 150 for convenience).

EG: Let’s do a Halfling-scale merchantman. Length is usually 175 feet, Wt 230 long tons, cargo capacity 120 short tons, crew of 16-125, 20 cannon. 3 Masts, Turn 5, Speed 3, Draft Deep.

Halflings are about 3′ tall, so we need to reduce the height of our vessel to 91.4/150 = 0.60933 = 60.933% of normal. But our stats don’t mention height, or width for that matter; only the product of those – volume, and even that is implied only by assuming that the density of cargo and wood are the same.

If we’re going to reduce things proportionately, we need to multiply those values by the cube of our ratio – once for length, once for width, and once for depth.

     ★ 175 ft long × 0.60933 = 106.633 ft.

     ★ 230 long tons × 0.60933^3 = 230 × 0.2262376 = 52.034648 long tons.

     ★ Cargo capacity = 120 × 0.60933&3 = 120 × 0.2262376 = 27.1485 short tons.

# Cannon is a function of length, and has to be an even number.

# of Masts is also a function of length, but rounds down to any whole number, and has a minimum of 1. But you can round up if the answer is reasonably close to a whole number.

     ★ Canon: 20 × 0.60933 = 12.1866, rounds down to 12.

     ★ Masts: 3 × 0.60933 = 1.82799; close enough, call it 2.

4.8.5.3 Non-human Proportions

The crew have to be able to work. If the shoulder width relative to the height is the same as human, there’s no problem – but if the crew are slender, or broad-shouldered, that will affect both the horizontal dimensions of the vessel.

Halflings are often compared to human children, and children grow vertically a LOT more than they do horizontally.

8 year old boys average 50-52 inches in height (127-132 cm)*; our Halflings are 91.4cm tall max. Too much, let’s try lopping off the years one at a time.

     * Determined by asking Google for the “proportions of an 8-year-old boy”.

7 year old boys range from 45-53 inches in height (114-135 cm). Still too tall.

6 year old boys run from 43-50 inches with an average of 46 inches (117 cm). Still too big.

5-year-olds are typically 110-115 cm tall (3′ 9″) – still too big.

4-year-olds typically range from 37.5 and 43 inches – getting close but not quite there yet!

At 3 years old, the average human male height is 37.5 inches, about an inch-and-a-half too tall.

BUT WAIT: Those are all for children exposed to modern nutrition. We need to boost our 36-inch height to get a correct comparison!

     ★ 36 × 183 / 150 = 43.92 = 44 inches (3′ 8″ or 118.8cm).

Bang! Right away we’re back with 6-year-old boys.

Chest sizes for a 6-year-old are 23-24″ and waists are around 21″ – but we’re talking Halflings, so let’s set the latter to 25″.

     ★ 23.5 × 72 (adult height) / 46 (3-year-old height) = 36.78″.

     ★ 25 × 72 / 46 = 39.13″

Human Adult shoulders are an average of 18″ but anything from 15.8 to 20.9 is normal.

     ★ 39.13 / 18 = × 2.174 – so our Halflings are more than twice the size of a scaled human.

We need to apply that factor to length and breadth, and the square of it (4.726276) to anything ‘three-dimensional”: Or we can reduce the maximum number of crew by this number to make room for them. That seems the more sensible answer, so:

     ★ Max Crew = 125 / 2.174 = 57.5 – round up to 58.

4.8.5.4 Crew Strength

It might be that the ship Needs fewer crew, anyway. To find out, we need to scale the average human Lift by our original Halfling Factor and compare it to the average Halfling Lift value. We can absorb up to a × 2.174 ratio; beyond that, we either make the ship bigger (to take maximum advantage of the crew strength) or we have to again cut crew numbers. The danger of the latter is that we can’t let the number drop below the minimum of 16 indicated for operating this class of vessel.

     ★ Average Human Strength = 10, giving lift (maximum load) of 2 × 100 lb = 200 lb.

     ★ Average Halfling Strength = 8, giving lift (maximum load) of 2 × 80 lb = 160 lb.

     ★ 200 / 160 = × 1.25.

That’s no problem; in fact, it’s reasonable to reduce the minimum number of crew by this factor.

     ★ 16 / 1.25 = 12.8, round up to 13.

     ★ Total crew: 13-58.

4.8.5.5 Handling and other parameters

Masts, Weight, Length, Cargo, Crew. That sequence is important.

Using the ship tables, we need to find the vessel that most accurately matches our modified vessel, in that sequence. That in turn will give us speed, turn, and draft.

In this case, our needs are 2 masts, 52 long tons, 107 feet, 27 tons cargo, and 13-58 crew. Obviously, we’re going to be looking on the first table, and probably toward the top. Or are we?

Looking for a Masts match, I find:

     Small Schooner = Masts 2.
     Medium Schooner = Masts 2.
     Medium Barque = Masts 2.
     Small Cargo Fluyt = Masts 2.
     Medium Cargo Fluyt = Masts 2.
     Small Brigantine = Masts 2.
     Medium Brigantine = Masts 2.
     Large Brigantine = Masts 2.

So that’s my short list.

Vessel Weight of 52 eliminates most of these. I’m left with:

     Small Schooner 160 lt
     Small Barque 160 lt
     Small Fluyt 160 lt
     Small Brigantine 50 lt

I need search no further; it’s clear that the Halfling Merchantman will most closely resemble the Small Brigantine, in fact it’s not even close. Our length is twice that of the normal small Brigantine, so we’re going to be half as wide – and that shape is better at cutting through water, so we can add one to the Speed. All of which gives us:

     ★ Turn 4, Speed 6. Medium Draft

…compared to our staring values of Turn 5, Speed 4, Deep Draft. So the Halfling vessel is a little more maneuverable, a lot faster, and can operate in shallower waters.

4.8.6 Mixed Crews

There are multiple ways of handling this, but the best one is to ask, “who was this vessel designed for?”

If it’s a Frost Giant ship being crewed by humans, scale it up for frost giants. Next, look at the most common crew, or the closest to Frost Giants in size and strength (if you need to break ties). Work the numbers based on the abilities of that race relative to Frost Giants.

Then look at anyone not already accounted for. If they are larger / stronger than the reference race, they count as multiple ‘people’ for the purposes of crew requirements. If smaller, they count as a fraction of a crew for that purpose.

Which brings me to the end of this post, and the beginning of the next, which should finally bring this chapter of “Trade In Fantasy” to a close.